Teste 1

Question 1: Correct

Scrum is a methodology that tells in detail how to build software incrementally

Explanation

Scrum is a lightweight framework that helps people, teams and organizations generate value through adaptive solutions for complex problems.

In a nutshell, Scrum requires a Scrum Master to foster an environment where:

1. A Product Owner orders the work for a complex problem into a Product Backlog.

2. The Scrum Team turns a selection of the work into an Increment of value during a Sprint.

3. The Scrum Team and its stakeholders inspect the results and adjust for the next Sprint.

4. Repeat

Scrum is simple. Try it as is and determine if its philosophy, theory, and structure help to achieve goals and create value. The Scrum framework is purposefully incomplete, only defining the parts required to implement Scrum theory. Scrum is built upon by the collective intelligence of the people using it. Rather than provide people with detailed instructions, the rules of Scrum guide their relationships and interactions.

Question 2: Correct

What areas of focus can help a Product Owner make sure that the product is delivering value? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

Customer Satisfaction, Customer Usage Index, and Customer or user satisfaction gap are Key Value Measures defined in the Evidence-Based Management (EBM) approach. It is an empirical approach that provides organizations with the ability to measure the value they deliver to customers.

Question 3: Correct

While Product Backlog Items can be re-estimated, reordered, modified, they can never be removed from the Product Backlog

Explanation

A Product Backlog Item can be removed if it turns out to be irrelevant or obsolete. The Product Owner only focuses on value.

Question 4: Incorrect

Which of the following are accountabilities of a Scrum Team?

Choose all that apply

Explanation

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, Developers, and a Scrum Master.

The fundamental unit of Scrum is a small team of people, a Scrum Team. The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers. Within a Scrum Team, there are no sub-teams or hierarchies. It is a cohesive unit of professionals focused on one objective at a time, the Product Goal.

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 5: Incorrect

The key stakeholders invited to the Sprint Review provide:

Explanation

A Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed. During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value. This is an informal meeting, not a status meeting, and the presentation of the Increment is intended to elicit feedback and foster collaboration.

Question 6: Correct

Scrum is best described as a

Explanation

Scrum is a framework for developing, delivering, and sustaining complex products.

Question 7: Incorrect

A Scrum Team has been working on a product for nine Sprints. A new Product Owner comes in, understanding he is accountable for the Product Backlog. However, he is unsure about his responsibilities. Which two activities are part of the Product Owner accountability according to Scrum ?

Choose 2 answers.

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 8: Incorrect

Select the true statements

Explanation

The Product Backlog can contain initiatives, functional and non-functional needs, enhancements, ideas or any other product needs.

Question 9: Incorrect

In accordance with the Scrum theory, how should a group of 100 people be divided into multiple Scrum Teams?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are self-managed. The agile professionals organize themselves into Scrum Teams.

Question 10: Incorrect

Select the true statements. Before starting the first Sprint, what are the prerequisites?

Explanation

• The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.

• Enough work is planned during Sprint Planning for the Developers to forecast what it believes it can do in the upcoming Sprint.

Question 11: Incorrect

The frequency of updating the product backlog is

Explanation

Requirements never stop changing, so a Product Backlog is a living artifact. Changes in business requirements, market conditions, or technology may cause changes in the Product Backlog.

Question 12: Incorrect

What is the most appropriate event for a Scrum Team to change the Definition of Done?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done.

Question 13: Correct

A Scrum Team member should play both Scrum Master and Product Owner roles.

Explanation

The Product Owner and the Scrum Master SHOULD NOT be the same person for neutrality reasons.

However, nothing says that they CANNOT be the same person in the Scrum Guide.
That is not best practice as there would be a conflict of interest. But it is not forbidden as it can be more convenient for small teams of 4 people for example.

Question 14: Incorrect

Who creates a Product Backlog item's estimate?

Explanation

The Developers are responsible for all estimates. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.

Question 15: Incorrect

Which concept illustrates that, as a forecast lengthens, the level of unknowns also increase? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of best case uncertainty during a project. At the beginning of a project, comparatively little is known about the product or work results, and so estimates are subject to large uncertainty. As more research and development is done, more information is learned about the project, and the uncertainty then tends to decrease.

Question 16: Correct

Revenue is the only measure of product’s value

Explanation

Revenue is not the only measure of product’s value.
Users’ satisfaction is the best measure of product’s value.

Question 17: Incorrect

A new Developer is having conflicts with other Developers of the Scrum Team and creating a hostile environment. If necessary, who is responsible for removing the Scrum Team member?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 18: Correct

When might a Sprint be abnormally terminated?

Explanation

A Sprint could be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint.

A Sprint would be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete. This might occur if the company changes direction or if market or technology conditions change. In general, a Sprint should be cancelled if it no longer makes sense given the circumstances. But, due to the short duration of Sprints, cancellation rarely makes sense.

Question 19: Incorrect

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

Choose 2 answers.

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 20: Correct

The Developers are always accountable for:

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 21: Incorrect

During a Sprint, when is new work or further decomposition of work added to the Sprint Backlog?

Explanation

The Developers modify the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Developers work through the plan and learn more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal.

Question 22: Correct

Which statement is true about the Product Backlog?

Explanation

Changes in business requirements, market conditions, or technology may cause changes in the Product Backlog.

Question 23: Incorrect

An organization that is new to Scrum wants to know how the interactions should be between the Product Owner and the Developers. Which two statements best describes the relationship? (choose the two best answers)

Explanation

The Product Owner helps the Developers to build on the right thing (ie the envisioned Increment). The Developers help the Product Owner to make sound decisions on what the right thing is (ie Product Backlog item) and when it should be done (ie ordering of the Product Backlog). Therefore, their collaboration must be frequent.

Question 24: Correct

There is a "Development Team" within the Scrum Team

Explanation

As per the Scrum Guide version of 2020 : "Within a Scrum Team, there are no sub-teams or hierarchies. It is a cohesive unit of professionals focused on one objective at a time, the Product Goal."

Question 25: Incorrect

Choose two responsibilities of the Developers of the Scrum Team?

Choose 2 answers

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 26: Correct

Kevin is a senior developer that has recently joined an existing Scrum Team. The existing team members are unable to get along with Kevin and conclude that he is not a culture fit. If necessary, who is responsible for removing the new team member, and why?

Explanation

The ones closest to the problem are the best ones to understand and solve the problems.

Question 27: Incorrect

What is the main reason for the Scrum Master to be at the Daily Scrum?

Explanation

The Scrum Master ensures that the Developers have the meeting, but the Developers are responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum. The Scrum Master teaches the Developers to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

Also, if the Product Owner or Scrum Master are actively working on items in the Sprint Backlog, they participate as Developers.

Question 28: Incorrect

If 5 Scrum Teams are working on the same product, how many Product Owners are needed?

Explanation

There must be one Product Owner per product.
The Product Owner is one person, not a committee.

Question 29: Correct

A Developer of the Scrum Team is requested by an important stakeholder to help them with some external tasks. The Developer referred him to the Product Owner. In this case, the Scrum Master should :

Explanation

No one can force the Developers of the Scrum Team to work from a different set of requirements.

Question 30: Incorrect

An increase of the Scrum Team's velocity and productivity is the positive sign of success as a Product Owner.

Explanation

Organizations adopting agile product delivery practices can easily lose sight of their real goal of improving the value they deliver, by focusing on improving activities and outputs instead of on business outcomes. Monitoring only the direct use of practices does not provide the best evidence of effectiveness; for example, tracking a Scrum Team's velocity says nothing about whether that team is actually delivering something that is useful to customers or users.

Question 31: Incorrect

Multiple Scrum Teams workings on the same project must have the same Sprint start date

Explanation

It's not mandatory in Scrum.org to start and end the Sprints at the same time. That makes it much more difficult to manage the whole project. It's not mandatory, because you may need it in certain cases: maybe some teams are working on parts of the project that need longer Sprints (four-week), while others need shorter ones (two-week) for shorter feedback loops.

Question 32: Incorrect

Select the correct statement. Before the Sprint Planning

Explanation

The Definition of Done doesn’t need the Product Owner’s approval.

A Scrum Board, User Stories and Acceptance Criteria are good practices but not mandatory parts of Scrum (they are not even mentioned in the Scrum Guide).

Question 33: Correct

A Product Owner cannot send a representative to the Sprint Review instead of himself.

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog. Therefore, he is the only person responsible for collecting feedback from the stakeholders in order the shape his product's vision.

While anyone in the Scrum Team can do the legwork at the Product Owner's discretion (by adding and ordering new Product Backlog Items for example), nobody can replace the Product Owner at the Sprint Review.

Question 34: Incorrect

Who has the final say on the order of the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.

Question 35: Incorrect

For the Product Backlog Refinement act, the Scrum Team needs to define a recurring pre-set time every week outside the current working hours of the Developers.

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is the act of adding detail, estimates, and order to items in the Product Backlog. This is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Developers collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items. During Product Backlog refinement, items are reviewed and revised. The Scrum Team decides how and when refinement is done.

Question 36: Incorrect

A key concern when multiple Scrum Teams are working on the same Product Backlog is minimizing dependencies between teams.

Explanation

Minimizing dependencies reduces complexity and enhances agility.

Question 37: Incorrect

What prerequisites must be met before a Sprint Planning can start? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

Scrum events should be held at the same time each Sprint. This helps with consistency, making improvements to the process, and reducing waste. In an event that a Scrum event cannot begin at the Scrum Team's designated time, they will need to inspect and adapt the event itself in order to maximize the effectiveness of the event. Delaying events is a short-term solution and results in reducing the team's opportunities to improve.

Question 38: Incorrect

When does a Developer of the Scrum Team take ownership of a Sprint Backlog item?

Explanation

All Sprint Backlog Items are “owned” by the entire Scrum Team, even though each one may be done by an individual Developer.

Question 39: Incorrect

The Product Owner must release each Increment to production?

Explanation

A releasable increment must be delivered at the end of each Sprint. However, releasing that increment to production is not mandatory. It's done only when necessary. When it makes sense...

Question 40: Incorrect

It is the responsibility of the Scrum Master to engage the stakeholders to maximize the value of the product

Explanation

It is the responsibility of the Product Owner.

Question 41: Skipped

Cross-functional Developers are defined as:

Explanation

The objective of the Sprint is to produce a shippable Increment at the end of each Sprint so that the team can effectively inspect and adapt accordingly.

Question 42: Incorrect

Scrum users must frequently inspect artifacts and progress toward the product's vision and goals. In what ways does a Product Owner take the lead on detecting desirable/undesirable variances? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

The Sprint Review includes the Scrum Team and key stakeholders invited by the Product Owner. During the Sprint Review the Product Owner: Explains what Product Backlog items have been 'Done' and what has not been 'Done'; Discusses the Product Backlog as it stands and any projections to date

Question 43: Incorrect

Your organization is new to Scrum. Management would like to understand what measures are helpful in determining if value is being delivered. As a Product Owner, which two metrics would be appropriate? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

Time-to-Market is a Key Value Area (KVA) of the Evidence Based Management (EBM) approach that expresses the organization’s ability to quickly deliver new capabilities, services, or products. Customer satisfaction is a Key Value Measure (KVM) under the Current Value KVA that helps gauge customer engagement and happiness with the product.

Question 44: Incorrect

What measures can help to determine the product success? (choose the best 3 answers)

Explanation

As a Product Owner, you have to find a balance in both delivering internal value and external value. Internal measures can be cost savings, FTE reductions, employee satisfaction, time spend on a certain (internal) process, revenues, etc. External measures can be customer satisfaction, NPS, etc.

Question 45: Incorrect

How will an organization know the outcomes of a product that is currently in development? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

As a Product Owner, releasing new features and/or functionalities every Sprint, maximizes value for your customers and users. You have to release a Product to customers/users, in order to find out if you have delivered value for them and to learn what they find valuable.

Question 46: Correct

What is the best suited structure for Scrum Teams in order to produce integrated increments?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 47: Correct

Each increment must be released to production to maximize the value

Explanation

Frequent releases to production are good practice to get some feedback from the market. However, releasing each increment is not mandatory.

Question 48: Correct

Which is the true statement?

Explanation

A Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed.

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:

• Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

• Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

• Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.

Question 49: Incorrect

If two Scrum Teams are added to the development of a product that previously had only one Scrum Team, what will be the immediate impact on the productivity of the original Scrum Team?

Explanation

The first team should spend time on interaction with the other teams and resolve dependencies. In the very beginning the productivity will decrease also because members of the first team will have to do some knowledge transfer to the new teams.

Question 50: Incorrect

As a Product Owner, which of the following would be a valid point of focus? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. The Product Owner works diligently to identify these needs. The Product Owner is responsible for ensuring that the status of the project is visible, transparent, and clear to all. At any point in time, the total work remaining to reach a goal can be summed and information is made transparent to all stakeholders.

Question 51: Correct

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 52: Correct

When can the Developers cancel a sprint?

Explanation

A Sprint can be cancelled before the Sprint time-box is over. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Development Team, or the Scrum Master.

Question 53: Incorrect

What is included in the Sprint Backlog?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal. The Sprint Backlog is a forecast by the Developers about what functionality will be in the next Increment and the work needed to deliver that functionality into a “Done” Increment.

Question 54: Incorrect

Who must ensure that the work done for a Product Backlog item conforms to the Definition of "Done"?

Explanation

The Developers must follow the Definition of "Done" and are accountable for the quality of the Product Backlog items.

Question 55: Incorrect

Who is responsible for estimating the Product Backlog items?

Explanation

The ones doing the work are the best ones to create the estimations.

Question 56: Skipped

A team should NOT start the first Sprint until the Product Owner has detailed all of the Product Backlog items in the Product Backlog.

Explanation

The earliest development of the Product Backlog lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. It evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves and constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful.

Question 57: Incorrect

Who is responsible for managing the tasks of the Developers during the Sprint?

Explanation

The Developers are responsible for managing and tracking the progress of their work during a Sprint.

Question 58: Skipped

The only time a Scrum Team can meet the Stakeholders is during the Sprint Review

Explanation

The Scrum Team can meet the Stakeholders whenever they need. During the Product Backlog Refinement sessions for example…

Question 59: Skipped

When is a Sprint over?

Explanation

All events are time-boxed events, such that every event has a maximum duration. Once a Sprint begins, its duration is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened.

Question 60: Skipped

Every Scrum Team should have the competencies and skills needed to deliver a Done Increment in a Sprint.

Explanation

Scrum Teams are self-managed and cross-functional.

Question 61: Skipped

Multiple teams working on the same product should maintain separate Product Backlogs.

Explanation

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.

Question 62: Skipped

During the Sprint, the Developers tracks the remaining work and the trend at least

Explanation

The Developers use the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog.

Question 63: Skipped

The number one priority of the Product Owner is

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team.

Question 64: Skipped

Each Scrum Team must have a different Product Owner.

Explanation

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.

Question 65: Skipped

The Scrum Master is no longer needed when teams become self-organized.

Explanation

There is always a Scrum Master in a Scrum Team

Question 66: Skipped

Developers select a set of Product Backlog items for a Sprint Backlog with the intent to get the selected Items "Done" by the end of the Sprint. Which three phrases best describes the purpose of a definition of "Done"?

Choose 3 answers

Explanation

The Definition of Done is a formal description of the state of the Increment when it meets the quality measures required for the product.

The moment a Product Backlog item meets the Definition of Done, an Increment is born.

The Definition of Done creates transparency by providing everyone a shared understanding of what work was completed as part of the Increment. If a Product Backlog item does not meet the Definition of Done, it cannot be released or even presented at the Sprint Review. Instead, it returns to the Product Backlog for future consideration.

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 67: Skipped

You are the Scrum Master on a newly formed Scrum Team. Which three of the following activities would probably help the team in starting up?

Explanation

The Scrum Master is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. Scrum Masters do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory, practices, rules, and values.

The Scrum Master is a true leader for the Scrum Team. The Scrum Master helps those outside the Scrum Team understand which of their interactions with the Scrum Team are helpful and which aren’t.

The Scrum Master helps everyone change these interactions to maximize the value created by the Scrum Team.

Question 68: Skipped

Which of the following is TRUE about the Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for optimizing the flow of value that the Developers create and the value that the Product delivers to its users. This is done through effective Product Backlog management. The Product Owner does not manage the rest of the Scrum Team and is entrusted to make the best decisions for the Product and business.

Question 69: Skipped

What should a Scrum Team do with non-functional requirements?

Explanation

Non-functional requirements should be worked on alongside functional development.

Question 70: Skipped

Which three of the following are time-boxed events in Scrum?

Choose 3 answers.

Explanation

Prescribed events are used in Scrum to create regularity and to minimize the need for meetings not defined in Scrum. All events are time-boxed events, such that every event has a maximum duration. Once a Sprint begins, its duration is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened. The remaining events may end whenever the purpose of the event is achieved, ensuring an appropriate amount of time is spent without allowing waste in the process.

Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection. Failure to include any of these events results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt.

5 Scrum Events :

The Sprint
Sprint Planning
Daily Scrum
Sprint Review
Sprint Retrospective

Question 71: Skipped

What should a Product Owner take in consideration when ordering the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

While the Product Backlog must be ordered, ordering by priority is only one many techniques. The Product Backlog indeed must be ordered: its ordering determines the Product Backlog items' (PBI) order of delivery. The Developers can discuss Product Backlog Items ordering with the Product Owner but, in the end, the Developers must take the Product Backlog Items in the Product Backlog order. However, the Product Backlog is not guaranteed to represent an ordering of PBIs by either value or priority. You can’t just assign priorities to the PBIs — whether they come from the ROI or importance to the business or anywhere else — and then prioritize the backlog on the basis of those relative values. As a Product Owner, you must consider the entire backlog of PBIs together. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

Question 72: Skipped

You are a Product Owner who is also responsible for monitoring the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership). What are the costs that can influence the TCO of the product being built? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is in charge of monitoring the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) and this entails contemplating all the investments (conception, development, operation and maintenance) to be made in the product. For example, quality impacts the TCO and life expectancy of a product. Getting software out of the door quickly with poor quality may achieve a short-term win but it incurs technical debt. The software becomes difficult to extend and maintain. This results in high cost and long lead times for new functionality. And software with poor quality often has to be replaced sooner rather then later resulting in a short life expectancy and a poor return on investment. A Product Owner is ultimately concerned with Maximizing Return On Investment (ROI), optimizing Total Cost of Ownership (TCO), and capitalizing on product Agility

Question 73: Skipped

Which topics are NOT appropriate in a Sprint Retrospective?

Choose 2 answers

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work. Assumptions that led them astray are identified and their origins explored. The Scrum Team discusses what went well during the Sprint, what problems it encountered, and how those problems were (or were not) solved.

Question 74: Skipped

What are the roles in a Scrum Team?

Explanation

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Developers, and a Scrum Master.

Question 75: Skipped

How should multiple Scrum Teams, working from the same Product Backlog, select the Product Backlog items their teams plan to work on?

Explanation

There is only one Product Backlog

The ones doing the work are the best ones to decide what they can do and how to do it.

Question 76: Skipped

All work to be done by the Developers must come from the Product Backlog.

Explanation

All work to be done by the Developers must ultimately come from the Product Backlog as it is the single source of product requirement. How the work is done can change, evolve, and emerge as more is learned.

Question 77: Skipped

It is good practice to maintain separate Product Backlogs for multiple Scrum Teams that work on one product

Explanation

Multiple Scrum Teams often work together on the same product. One Product Backlog is used to describe the upcoming work on the product. A Product Backlog attribute that groups items may then be employed.

Question 78: Skipped

Which two things are appropriate for a Scrum Master to do if the Developers don't have the engineering tools and infrastructure to completely finish each selected Product Backlog Item?

Choose 2 answers

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 79: Skipped

The Developers are always accountable for creating a plan for the Sprint

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 80: Skipped

What is the accountability of the Product Owner during Sprint 0?

Explanation

Developers deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is useable, so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. If the definition of "Done" for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum.

Question 81: Skipped

A properly functioning Scrum Team will have at least one Release Sprint and may well have several

Explanation

The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, a time-box of one month or less during which a “Done”, useable, and potentially releasable product Increment is created.

Question 82: Skipped

The Developers are always accountable for:

Explanation

The Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 83: Skipped

All of the items on the Product Backlog must be written by the Product Owner before they are handed over to the Developers.

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog. Who adds the items and how they are added to the Product Backlog vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

“Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.”

Question 84: Skipped

What are the desired benefits of a Product Owner having a clear Product Vision? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

Having a clear and inspiring Product vision helps in motivating and inspiring the people involved and affected by the product. It also provides a common understanding of the direction we are working towards. It also supports the Product Owner in making choices about what to build and what not to build for the Product.

Question 85: Skipped

The Sprint length should be:

Question 86: Skipped

Who must do all the work to make sure the Product Backlog items conform to the definition of "Done"?

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 87: Skipped

The Product Owner may consider the dependencies of the software tools the Developers use when ordering the Product Backlog

Explanation

The Product Owner may consider the dependencies between Product Backlog Items but not the dependencies of the software tools used by the Developers.

Question 88: Skipped

Which activity or event takes place between the current Sprint and the next Sprint beginning?

Explanation

A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

Question 89: Skipped

During the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog can be modified as more is learned. However, no changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal.

Question 90: Skipped

The Scrum Master observes the Product Owner struggling with ordering the Product Backlog. What is an appropriate action for the Scrum Master to take?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 91: Skipped

The Scrum Framework recommends:

Explanation

Early and frequent releases of usable increments offer more opportunities for valuable feedback.

Question 92: Skipped

Of the following choices, what is the most effective way a Scrum Master can keep a Scrum Team working at its highest level of productivity?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 93: Skipped

During a Sprint Review, the stakeholders notice that the product development progress is not clear and visible. Who is responsible for this lack of transparency?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

During the event, the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information, attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 94: Skipped

A Developer takes the Scrum Master aside to express his concerns about data security issues. What should the Scrum Master do?

Explanation

Scrum relies on transparency. Decisions to optimize value and control risk are made based on the perceived state of the artifacts. To the extent that transparency is complete, these decisions have a sound basis. To the extent that the artifacts are incompletely transparent, these decisions can be flawed, value may diminish and risk may increase.

Question 95: Skipped

A Scrum Team can have an exclusive first Sprint to prepare Product Backlog which is the sole outcome from that Sprint

Explanation

The only outcome of each Sprint is a potentially releasable Increment of “Done” product.

A “Done” increment is required at the Sprint Review.

Question 96: Skipped

When do the Developers create the Sprint Backlog?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal. The Sprint Backlog is a forecast by the Developers about what functionality will be in the next Increment and the work needed to deliver that functionality into a “Done” Increment.

Question 97: Skipped

What would be the responsibilities of self-managing Developers?

Explanation

It's the responsibility of the Developers to estimate the amount of work of Product Backlog items and to select appropriate number of them for each Sprint. They also break down the items into tasks during the Sprint.
Measuring the project performance is the responsibility of the Product Owner, while measuring the Sprint performance is done by the Developers. Creating new Product Backlog items, ordering them (prioritization) and making sure that everyone has a clear understanding of them is the responsibility of the Product Owner.

Question 98: Skipped

A Scrum Team is at the end of a Sprint. The next Sprint starts:

Question 99: Skipped

How is the Product Backlog ordered?

Explanation

For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force the Developers to work from a different set of requirements.

Question 100: Skipped

What is used by the Product Owner to identify unfinished work at the end of the Sprint

Explanation

The definition of “Done” provides the same shared understanding and transparency of what has been done at the end of the Sprint.

Question 101: Skipped

Which answer best describes the topics covered in Sprint Planning?

Explanation

Sprint Planning addresses the following topics:

Topic One: Why is this Sprint valuable?

Topic Two: What can be Done this Sprint?

Topic Three: How will the chosen work get done?

Question 102: Skipped

A Scrum Master is introducing Scrum to a new Scrum Team. The Developers have decided that a retrospective is unnecessary. What action should the Scrum Master take?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work. Assumptions that led them astray are identified and their origins explored. The Scrum Team discusses what went well during the Sprint, what problems it encountered, and how those problems were (or were not) solved.

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

The Sprint Retrospective concludes the Sprint. It is timeboxed to a maximum of three hours for a one- month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 103: Skipped

The Product Owner can invite the stakeholders to the Backlog Refinement sessions

Explanation

Stakeholders can be invited to Backlog Refinement sessions as needed.

Question 104: Skipped

Which of the following statements is not correct?

Explanation

Changes in business requirements, market conditions, or technology may cause changes in the Product Backlog. Also the dependencies between Product Backlog items may be taken into consideration.

Question 105: Skipped

When a Developer is having trouble delivering a working Increment because they don't understand a functional requirement, what should they do?

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 106: Skipped

Although Burn-down charts are optional, it can be useful tool for tracking what measure? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

Burn-down chart shows the amount of work left to be done, versus the time allocated for the iteration. Burn-down charts are an efficient tracking tool, because they show when the work remaining is projected to be completed if nothing changes on the backlog or Scrum Team. The burn-down chart is a helpful tool for the Scrum Teams to self-manage BUT it is not mandatory as the Scrum Teams will decide the best way to manage their own progress and promote transparency.

Question 107: Skipped

What happens if the Developers cannot complete its work by the end of the Sprint?

Explanation

Once a Sprint begins, its duration is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened. The remaining events may end whenever the purpose of the event is achieved, ensuring an appropriate amount of time is spent without allowing waste in the process.

Question 108: Skipped

Which of the following might the Scrum Team discuss during a Sprint Retrospective?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work. Assumptions that led them astray are identified and their origins explored. The Scrum Team discusses what went well during the Sprint, what problems it encountered, and how those problems were (or were not) solved.

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

The Sprint Retrospective concludes the Sprint. It is timeboxed to a maximum of three hours for a one- month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 109: Skipped

A Developer’s behavior causes issues to the whole Scrum Team and affects the progress of the development work. Who is responsible to solve the issue?

Explanation

The fundamental unit of Scrum is a small team of people, a Scrum Team. The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers. Within a Scrum Team, there are no sub-teams or hierarchies. It is a cohesive unit of professionals focused on one objective at a time, the Product Goal.

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 110: Skipped

Scrum Team adapts the definition of “Done” during

Explanation

During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of “Done”.

Question 111: Skipped

Why is the Daily Scrum held at the same time and same place?

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute event for the Developers of the Scrum Team. To reduce complexity, it is held at the same time and place every working day of the Sprint. If the Product Owner or Scrum Master are actively working on items in the Sprint Backlog, they participate as Developers.

Question 112: Skipped

What impact does technical debt have on the Product Owner? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

Technical debt is a concept in programming that reflects the extra development and testing work that arises when 'quick and dirty' solutions result in later remediation. It creates an undesirable impact on the delivery of value and an avoidable increase in waste and risk.

Question 113: Skipped

Who decides what to work on for the next Sprint?

Explanation

The Product Owner is  accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 114: Skipped

The Daily Scrum is an event that happens every day. What would be three key concerns if the frequency were to be lowered to every two or three days?

Choose 3 answers.

Explanation

Daily Scrums improve communications, eliminate other meetings, identify impediments to development for removal, highlight and promote quick decision-making, and improve the Developers' level of knowledge. This is a key inspect and adapt meeting.

Question 115: Skipped

What impact does an evolving environment have on the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is a living artifact that evolves and changes as more is learned.

The Product Backlog is an emergent, ordered list of what is needed to improve the product. It is the single source of work undertaken by the Scrum Team.

Product Backlog items that can be Done by the Scrum Team within one Sprint are deemed ready for selection in a Sprint Planning event. They usually acquire this degree of transparency after refining activities. Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 116: Skipped

What are the best ways for a Product Owner to manage value for the Product? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

As a Product Owner, releasing new features and/or functionalities every Sprint, maximizes value for your customers and users. You have to release a Product to customers/users, in order to find out if you have delivered value for them and to learn what they find valuable and feed the information into the Product Backlog.

Question 117: Skipped

Choose the 2 true statements

Question 118: Skipped

What is the tactic a Scrum Master should use to divide a group of 100 people into multiple Scrum Teams?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are self-managed. The agile professionals organize themselves into Scrum Teams.

Question 119: Skipped

Which statement regarding the Product Backlog is FALSE?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is a living artifact that evolves and changes as more is learned.

Question 120: Skipped

Who is accountable for engaging the stakeholders on the project?

Explanation

The Scrum Team is responsible for all product-related activities from stakeholder collaboration, verification, maintenance, operation, experimentation, research and development, and anything else that might be required.

Teste 2

Question 1: Incorrect

Which of the following does NOT apply to/suit Scrum?

Explanation

Agile is all about depending on adaptation, instead of predictive (static, upfront) plan and design.

Question 2: Correct

The purpose of the Sprint Review is…

Explanation

The Scrum Review is also an opportunity to collect customer / user feedback from the Stakeholders.

Question 3: Skipped

What are three benefits of self-organization?

Choose 3 answers.

Explanation

Scrum Teams are self-managing and cross-functional. Self-managing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team.

Question 4: Incorrect

Which of the following is required by Scrum?

Explanation

Scrum prescribes four formal events for inspection and adaptation:

- Sprint Planning

- Daily Scrum

- Sprint Review

- Sprint Retrospective

Question 5: Incorrect

The Increment must be released at the end of every Sprint

Explanation

The Increment can be released at the end of every Sprint, but it is not mandatory.

Question 6: Incorrect

When does the next Sprint begin?

Question 7: Incorrect

How often should the Developers change within the Scrum Team?

Question 8: Incorrect

For a 1 month sprint, select the best time-box for each Scrum event

Question 9: Incorrect

Technical debt… (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

Technical debt is a concept in programming that reflects the extra development work that arises when code that is easy to implement in the short run is used instead of applying the best overall solution. In other words it can be defined as the longer term consequences of poor design decisions. Technical debt is a real risk which can genuinely be incurred. It compromises long­-term quality of the Product. One of the ways of handling technical debt is recording it on the Product Backlog. So, it becomes visible to the Scrum Team.

Question 10: Incorrect

What would likely happen if management only changed the organization's current terminology to fit Scrum without the proper understanding and support of Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide?

Explanation

The the defined terminology in Scrum was selected, designed, and defined specifically for supporting the Scrum Framework. Understanding the differences between traditional methods and the Scrum Framework will help move teams in the right direction in Scrum adoption.

Question 11: Incorrect

When is the Sprint Backlog created?

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter. The Scrum Master ensures that the event takes place and that attendants understand its purpose. The Scrum Master teaches the Scrum Team to keep it within the time-box.

Sprint Planning answers the following:

- What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

- How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?

Question 12: Correct

Which of the following is a way of decreasing technical debt?

Explanation

There's usually room for improving the definition of "Done". A good definition will let less technical debt pass on to the next Sprints. Technical debt is minor shortcomings in the code that makes it less than "good enough" and therefore creates risks in the future. It usually decreases velocity in the future (because the team has to fix the shortcomings) and as some of the debt might remain in the final product, the maintenance cost will increase as well. Another Agile way of reducing technical debt is continuous refactoring.

Question 13: Correct

A first Sprint can start before the Product Owner has a complete and exhaustive Product Backlog in place.

Explanation

A first Sprint requires no more than a Product Owner, a team, and enough ideas to potentially complete a full Sprint.

Question 14: Correct

The practice of Product Backlog refinement focuses on items for upcoming Sprints, not the current Sprint in progress.

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is the act of adding detail, estimates, and order to items in the Product Backlog. The Items in the current Sprint are no longer on the Product Backlog, because they are now on the Sprint Backlog. However, it is certainly fine for the Product Owner to add detail and clarification to the current Sprint’s work as well.

Question 15: Correct

Every Scrum Team should have:

Explanation

The fundamental unit of Scrum is a small team of people, a Scrum Team. The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers. Within a Scrum Team, there are no sub-teams or hierarchies. It is a cohesive unit of professionals focused on one objective at a time, the Product Goal.

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 16: Incorrect

How does the Definition of 'Done' help to the Scrum Team?  (Choose the best three answers)

Explanation

Definition of Done is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment. Guides the Developers in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning. Definition of Done ensures artifact transparency.

Question 17: Correct

The Product Backlog is ordered by:

Explanation

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful.

Question 18: Incorrect

Who must attend the Daily Scrum?

Explanation

The Developers use the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog. The Daily Scrum optimizes the probability that the Developers will meet the Sprint Goal. Everyday, the Developers should understand how it intends to work together as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment by the end of the Sprint.

Question 19: Correct

If the costs exceed the benefits of releasing an increment, the product owner may elect to delay the release of an increment.

Question 20: Correct

The Sprint Backlog is crafted via the answers of these 3 questions : Why, What and How

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 21: Incorrect

As a Product Owner, how would you minimize the dependencies between the different Scrum Teams working on the same product.

Explanation

The Product Owner must take the dependencies into consideration to order the Product Backlog (along with the value of the Product Backlog Items or any criteria that seems relevant to the Product Owner).

Question 22: Incorrect

If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled and a new Sprint is created with a more realistic scope.

Explanation

The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete. If some work could not be done, the Sprint Backlog should be renegotiated between the Product Owner and the Developers.

Question 23: Incorrect

What action should a Scrum Master take if the Developers has decided that Retrospectives are no longer necessary?

Question 24: Incorrect

How should the Developers deal with non-functional requirements?

Question 25: Correct

Which of the following may change during the Sprint?

Explanation

a. The team stays the same during the Sprint. If you need to change it, wait until the beginning of the next Sprint.

b. The level of expected quality shouldn't decrease during the Sprint.

c. The Sprint Goal doesn't change after the Sprint Planning meeting

d. Product Backlog may change at any time.

Those that stay fixed during the Sprint are needed to avoid distractions, and create a more productive environment. After all, Sprints are not so long that they create problems.

Question 26: Incorrect

Which are properties of the Daily Scrum?

Choose 2 answers.

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Developers. The Daily Scrum is held every day of the Sprint. At it, the Developers plan work for the next 24 hours. This optimizes team collaboration and performance by inspecting the work since the last Daily Scrum and forecasting upcoming Sprint work. The Daily Scrum is held at the same time and place each day to reduce complexity.

Question 27: Correct

Which topics should be discussed in the Sprint Review?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

The Scrum Review is also an opportunity to collect customer / user feedback.

Question 28: Incorrect

When multiple Scrum Teams are working on the same product, their Sprints should start and end at the same time.

Explanation

It's not mandatory in Scrum.org to start and end the Sprints at the same time. That makes it much more difficult to manage the whole project. It's not mandatory, because you may need it in certain cases: maybe some teams are working on parts of the project that need longer Sprints (four-week), while others need shorter ones (two-week) for shorter feedback loops.

Question 29: Incorrect

As a Scrum Master, what would you strive for if five new Scrum Teams were to work on one product?

Explanation

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.

Question 30: Correct

The Product Owner manages… (select 1)

Question 31: Incorrect

Who is responsible for tracking the remaining work of the Sprint?

Explanation

Developers are structured and empowered by the organization to organize and manage their own work. The resulting synergy optimizes the Developers' overall efficiency and effectiveness.

The Product Owner is responsible for measuring the progress of the project, and tracking the remaining work in the Product Backlog.
The Developers are responsible for measuring the progress of the Sprint, and tracking the remaining work in the Sprint Backlog.

Question 32: Correct

Who identifies the Key Stakeholders for the Product?

Question 33: Incorrect

Which are considered Scrum Values. (choose all that apply)

Explanation

Successful use of Scrum depends on people becoming more proficient in living five values:

Commitment, Focus, Openness, Respect, and Courage

Question 34: Incorrect

Which does a self-managing Scrum Team choose?

Question 35: Incorrect

For the purpose of transparency, when does Scrum say a new increment of working software must be available?

Explanation

Scrum Teams deliver products iteratively and incrementally, maximizing opportunities for feedback. Incremental deliveries of “Done” product ensure a potentially useful version of working product is always available.

Question 36: Incorrect

What factor should be considered when deciding to release an increment?

Question 37: Incorrect

When does inspection occur?

Explanation

All Scrum events are opportunities for inspection and adaptation. Inspection makes adaptation possible and that's why it's important. However, like anything else in Agile, we just like to have "enough" of it.

Question 38: Incorrect

Which Scrum artifacts are ordered?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is ordered (prioritized) based on the business value. The items in the Sprint Backlog follow the same order they had in the Product Backlog, therefore, are prioritized.

Question 39: Correct

Which of the following is a valid service from the Scrum Master to the Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 40: Incorrect

What are the two primary ways a Scrum Master keeps the Scrum Team working at its highest level of productivity?

Choose 2 answers.

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 41: Incorrect

Which of the following is a prerequisite for starting the Sprint Planning meeting?

Explanation

We prefer to have "ready" items at the top of the Product Backlog before Sprint Planning, which is done through Product Backlog refinement. However, nothing stops our flow of Sprints. For example, we do not delay the Sprint because the items are not ready. In such cases, the "unready" items would be selected for the Sprint and refined during the Sprint. "Ready" items are those that are clear and small enough to fit into one Sprint.

Question 42: Correct

The result of the Sprint Review is…

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

The Scrum Review is also an opportunity to collect customer / user feedback from the Stakeholders.

During the event, the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information, attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 43: Incorrect

During the Sprint, the Scrum Master's role is to help the Scrum Team with which two of the following:

Choose 2 answers

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 44: Incorrect

When is it time to integrate the code?

Explanation

You can't know if the code will work properly, unless you integrate it with the rest of the code. That's why we have continuous integration in Agile, which can happen multiple times a day.

Question 45: Incorrect

How much of the Sprint Backlog must be defined during the Sprint Planning meeting?

Question 46: Correct

Who can do the legwork of gathering the marketplace data for the Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner may or may not be the one doing the legwork of gathering the marketplace data, but he/she should definitely be aware of said data/research.

Question 47: Incorrect

Which output from the Sprint Planning provides the Developers with a target and overarching direction for the Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Developers on why it is building the Increment. It is created during the Sprint Planning meeting. The Sprint Goal gives the Developers some flexibility regarding the functionality implemented within the Sprint. The selected Product Backlog items deliver one coherent function, which can be the Sprint Goal. The Sprint Goal can be any other coherence that causes the Developers to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

Question 48: Incorrect

At the end of the Sprint, all items are done except for one that is almost done. What should be done with this item?

Explanation

a. Everything in the Increment must be Done; i.e., 100% DONE! If an item is not done, we won't include it in the Increment and send it back to the Product Backlog.

b. The Increment contains only 100% DONE items.

c. We only present the Increment, and the Increment contains only the DONE items.

d. The Increment contains only 100% DONE items.

Question 49: Incorrect

How much time is required after a Sprint to prepare for the next Sprint?

Question 50: Incorrect

When a product grows, it is quite possible that the Product Owner will get help from other Product Managers and others in the organization who interact regarding the customer facing activities and knowledge of the product marketplace. Is it a good idea for the Product Owner to proxy or outsource some of their duties to these people (for example, Scrum Team facing duties)?

Explanation

When a product grows, it is quite possible that the Product Owner will get help from other Product Managers and others in the organization who interact regarding the customer facing activities and knowledge of the product marketplace. While it is fine for the Product Owner to be aided by the aforementioned people, it is NOT acceptable for him/her to attempt to proxy or outsource their Product Ownership duties, especially the Scrum Team facing duties.

Question 51: Correct

Who is responsible for the monitoring of the remaining work towards the Project Goal? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.

The Product Owner is responsible for measuring the progress of the project, and tracking the remaining work in the Product Backlog.
The Developers is responsible for measuring the progress of the Sprint, and tracking the remaining work in the Sprint Backlog.

Question 52: Skipped

Who is responsible for communicating the vision of the product to the Scrum Team?

Question 53: Correct

At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What could the Scrum Team do? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

Question 54: Correct

The Product Owner’s authority to change and update the Product Backlog is unlimited, except for:

Question 55: Correct

Which of the following describe the definition of "Done"? (choose 2 answers)

Explanation

Definition of "Done" increases transparency because everyone knows what it means by "Done". It includes everything required for creating something usable by the end users (potentially releasable).

Question 56: Incorrect

Which two of the following are correct about the Product Owner role?

Question 57: Correct

When multiple teams are working on the same product, a Developper can be a member of more than one Scrum Team.

Explanation

The Scrum Guide doesn’t prohibit it even though it is not considered best practice.

None of the Scrum roles are necessarily full-time, and a single person can occupy more than one role or the same role in more than one team; e.g., there may be a special expertise that is needed in multiple teams, but it's not needed in a full-time basis. So, one person can provide that special type of expertise to multiple teams.

Question 58: Incorrect

No one but the scrum team is allowed to participate in sprint planning.

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

The Developers may also invite other people to attend to provide technical or domain advice.

Question 59: Incorrect

Who participates in the Sprint Planning? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

Question 60: Incorrect

Which statements are correct about Sprint Retrospective meeting? (Choose 2 answers)

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective happens after the Sprint Review; it's the last event in the Sprint. It's three hours in a one-month Sprint and all Scrum Team members attend it. Its purpose is planning for improvements in the process (the way we're working), but it's not the only time we try to improve. Similar to Sprint Planning, Sprint Review and Daily Scrum, it's an opportunity for inspection and adaptation.

Question 61: Incorrect

When multiple teams are working on the same product, who should make sure that their outputs can be integrated into one Increment?

Explanation

It's up to the whole Scrum Teams to find their way and ensure that their outputs will create an integrated Increment that is potentially releasable.

Question 62: Skipped

Why is it important that there is only one Product Owner per product? (Choose 3 answers)

Question 63: Incorrect

Which of these may a Scrum Team deliver at the end of a Sprint?

Explanation

Scrum Teams deliver products iteratively and incrementally, maximizing opportunities for feedback. Incremental deliveries of “Done” product ensure a potentially useful version of working product is always available.

Question 64: Skipped

A company has three products. Which two of the following are acceptable way of forming Scrum Teams?

Explanation

When there's one Product Backlog, there can be only one Product Owner, even if the product is large and there are many Scrum Teams. However, when there are multiple Products Backlogs, there are two options: a) Considering them separate and have a Product Owner for each of them b) Have only one Product Owner for all of them

Question 65: Skipped

A product increment must be released to production at the end of each Sprint

Explanation

An increment is a body of inspectable, done work that supports empiricism at the end of the Sprint. The increment is a step toward a vision or goal. The increment must be in useable condition regardless of whether the Product Owner decides to release it.

Question 66: Skipped

The Product Goal is a short-term objective for the Scrum Team.

Explanation

The Product Goal describes a future state of the product which can serve as a target for the Scrum Team to plan against. The Product Goal is in the Product Backlog. The rest of the Product Backlog emerges to define “what” will fulfill the Product Goal.

A product is a vehicle to deliver value. It has a clear boundary, known stakeholders, well-defined users or customers. A product could be a service, a physical product, or something more abstract.

The Product Goal is the long-term objective for the Scrum Team. They must fulfill (or abandon) one objective before taking on the next.

Question 67: Skipped

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

After the Developers forecast the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.

Question 68: Skipped

If burndown charts are used to visualize progress, what does a trend through a release burndown chart indicates

Question 69: Skipped

A Daily Scrum is consistently taking longer than 15 minutes. Which statement best describes what should be done? (select 1)

Question 70: Skipped

Which of the following refers to the average amount of work done per Sprint?

Explanation

Velocity is the amount of work (usually in "story points") done per Sprint.

Question 71: Skipped

A Product Owner wants advice from the Scrum Master about estimating work in Scrum. Which of these is the guideline that a Scrum Master should give?

Explanation

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 72: Skipped

The Sprint Backlog must be detailed enough so that…

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 73: Skipped

Which statement best describes Scrum?

Explanation

Scrum is a framework for developing, delivering, and sustaining complex products. This Guide contains the definition of Scrum. This definition consists of Scrum’s roles, events, artifacts, and the rules that bind them together. Ken Schwaber and Jeff Sutherland developed Scrum; the Scrum Guide is written and provided by them. Together, they stand behind the Scrum Guide.

Question 74: Skipped

When does the second Sprint start?

Explanation

A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

Question 75: Skipped

Which statements are correct about Product Backlog refinement? (Choose 2 answers)

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 76: Skipped

Who assigns tasks to the Developers?

Explanation

The Developers take responsibility for doing the tasks themselves and the Developers ensure that all tasks are done properly. Remember that they are self-managed. When items are "Done", the Product Owner checked them but this is focused on the item rather than individuals; all Developers are accountable for the team's outputs.

Question 77: Skipped

Which two metrics will help a Product Owner establish that value is being delivered?

Explanation

EBM guide: Customer Satisfaction KVM and Time to Market KVA.
Budget, velocity and productivity do not contribute directly to capturing Product value.

Question 78: Skipped

Which Scrum Value is impacted by trust?

Explanation

Successful use of Scrum depends on people becoming more proficient in living five values:

Commitment, Focus, Openness, Respect, and Courage

Without trust, team members will have difficulties acting and behaving in the ways that reflect the Scrum values and how effective they apply empiricism.

Question 79: Skipped

If it's not possible to complete the Sprint Backlog, who would try to resolve it?

Explanation

First of all, it's OK of the Sprint Backlog is not complete until the end of the Sprint. However, we would try to complete it if it's possible. When the Developers find out they are behind schedule they will ask the Product Owner for help and the two roles together will adjust the work (tasks), or reorder the times to make sure the highest value will be created at the end of the Sprint.

Question 80: Skipped

What is the recommended size for a Scrum Team?

Explanation

The Scrum Team is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint, typically 10 or fewer people. In general, we have found that smaller teams communicate better and are more productive.

Question 81: Skipped

Which three of the following are true about Scrum?

Choose 3 answers.

Explanation

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk.

Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 82: Skipped

In order to start the first Sprint, Scrum only requires a Product Owner with enough ideas, Developers to execute on those ideas, and a Scrum Master to guide the process.

Explanation

In complex domains, you are only able to know the outcomes in hindsight. Empiricism, from which Scrum was founded on, asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. New knowledge will emerge as work is being done.

Question 83: Skipped

A Scrum Team uses 2-week Sprints and time box their Sprint Planning to 6 hours. Does this break the rules of Scrum?

Explanation

The concept of "event duration proportional to the sprint duration" used to be mandatory but it has been abandoned in the last updates of the Scrum Guide. It's now only best practice but not mandatory so no rule is broken here.

Question 84: Skipped

Who is responsible for monitoring the progress of work during a Sprint?

Question 85: Skipped

Who determines how work is performed during the Sprint?

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 86: Skipped

Which of the following is not a pillar of Scrum?

Explanation

The three pillars of Scrum are adaptation, inspection and transparency. Scrum is based on empiricism but it's not one of the pillars.

Question 87: Skipped

What are three ways Scrum promotes self-management?

Choose 3 answers

Question 88: Skipped

Scrum is an iterative and incremental Agile framework.

Explanation

Scrum is iterative because processes are repeated in each Sprint. It's incremental because it delivers the product in multiple incremental steps instead of in a big bang. And of course it's Agile (adaptive instead of predictive).

Question 89: Skipped

Once the definition of "Done" is decided upon, it may never change.

Explanation

As Scrum Teams mature, it is expected that their definitions of “Done” will expand to include more stringent criteria for higher quality. New definitions, as used, may uncover work to be done in previously “Done” increments. Any one product or system should have a definition of “Done” that is a standard for any work done on it

Question 90: Skipped

How much work must the Developers do to a Product Backlog item they select for a Sprint?

Question 91: Skipped

Who can do the work to ensure the Product Backlog is refined to a state that it is useful?

(Select 2)

Question 92: Skipped

Who can change the Sprint Backlog in the middle of the Sprint?

Explanation

Only the Developers can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. As new work is required, the Developers add it to the Sprint Backlog. As work is performed or completed, the estimated remaining work is updated. When elements of the plan are deemed unnecessary, they are removed.

Question 93: Skipped

Who monitors the remaining work of the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for measuring the progress of the project and tracking the remaining work in the Product Backlog. The Developers are responsible for measuring the progress of the Sprint and tracking the remaining work in the Sprint Backlog.

Question 94: Skipped

The Developers are required to deliver a done increment by the end of a Sprint. Select two statements that explain what "done" means.

Choose 2 answers

Explanation

- The purpose of each Sprint is to deliver Increments of potentially releasable functionality that adhere to the Scrum Team’s current definition of “Done”.

- Developers deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is useable, so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. If the definition of "Done" for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum.

Question 95: Incorrect

The Scrum Master is responsible for?

Question 96: Skipped

What are two responsibilities of testers among the Developers?

Choose 2 answers

Question 97: Skipped

Which of the following limits work in progress?

Explanation

When using timeboxes, you have a rather small and relatively clear scope for the timebox, and your goal is to complete as many items as possible. This limits the amount of work you can have in progress.

Question 98: Skipped

What type of test should be done during the Sprint?

Explanation

Remember that the Increment has to be "Done", and potentially releasable. It means that all tests should be done

Question 99: Skipped

There can be multiple Definitions of Done when multiple teams are working on the same product.

Explanation

According to the Scrum Guide of 2020:
"The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done."

Question 100: Skipped

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 101: Skipped

It is good practice to have at least two Product Owners on larger projects.

Explanation

When you have 1 project for creating 1 product, there would be only 1 Product Backlog and 1 Product Owner. Having more than one Product Backlog makes it hard to prioritize the items and having more than one Product Owner might create inconsistency in the system.

Question 102: Skipped

Who determines when it is appropriate to update the Sprint Backlog during a Sprint?

Explanation

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 103: Skipped

Which three questions may be answered by all Developers at the Daily Scrum?

Choose 3 answers

Explanation

The Developers can select whatever structure and techniques they want, as long as their Daily Scrum focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal and produces an actionable plan for the next day of work. This creates focus and improves self-management.

Question 104: Skipped

What enhances the transparency of an increment?

Explanation

When a Product Backlog item or an Increment is described as Done”, everyone must understand what “Donemeans. Although this may vary significantly per Scrum Team, members must have a shared understanding of what it means for work to be complete, to ensure transparency.

Question 105: Skipped

The Scrum Team is empowered by the organization to manage their own work.

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 106: Skipped

What type of process control is Scrum?

Explanation

Scrum is empirical; based on the real-world experiences. It asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. In order to do so, Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk.

Question 107: Skipped

Developers should be set stretch goals by the Product Owner as part of Sprint Planning

Explanation

During Sprint Planning the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.

Question 108: Skipped

What is the maximum duration of a Sprint Planning?

Explanation

Sprint Planning is 8 hours for a one-month Sprint and usually shorter proportionally for shorter Sprints (best practice but not mandatory).

Question 109: Skipped

What activities would a Product Owner typically undertake in the phase between the end of the current Sprint and the start of the next Sprint?

Question 110: Skipped

What is one way that the scrum master serves the Product Owner?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 111: Skipped

Which of the following is required by Scrum?

Question 112: Skipped

When the Developers of the Scrum Team determine that it has over-committed itself for a Sprint, who has to be present when reviewing and adjusting the Sprint work selected?

Explanation

If the Developers determine it has too much or too little work, it may renegotiate the selected Product Backlog items with the Product Owner.

Question 113: Skipped

What's the optimal length of a Sprint?

Explanation

We prefer shorter Sprints as long as we can produce enough output. Shorter Sprints reduce the risk to the business.

Question 114: Skipped

The Product Owner must attend the Sprint Retrospective

Question 115: Skipped

Which of the following is mandatory in Scrum?

Explanation

a. This is what you can use to estimate the size of items better. It's not mandatory though.

c. You can use any form of progress measurement, tracking, and visualization.

d. This is what some people use to vote on the value of items and use them to order the items in the Product Backlog.

Only the roles, events, and artifacts (+ Definition of Done and progress measurement) are mandatory.

Question 116: Skipped

Management need to monitor progress on a daily basis and decide to do so by attending the Daily Scrum. What are the likely results?

Question 117: Skipped

What should the Developers be able to explain by the end of sprint planning?

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 118: Skipped

Which best describes the Product Backlog?

Explanation

Requirements never stop changing, so a Product Backlog is a living artifact. Changes in business requirements, market conditions, or technology may cause changes in the Product Backlog.

Question 119: Skipped

A Scrum Team is only allowed to meet the stakeholders during the Sprint Review

Explanation

A Scrum Team can meet the stakeholders whenever they want, whenever it makes sense.

Question 120: Skipped

What does it mean for a Scrum Team to be cross-functional?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Teste 3

Question 1: Skipped

What are the artifacts in Scrum? (choose all that apply)

Explanation

The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.

Scrum’s artifacts represent work or value. They are designed to maximize transparency of key information.

Thus, everyone inspecting them has the same basis for adaptation. Each artifact contains a commitment to ensure it provides information that enhances transparency and focus against which progress can be measured:

● For the Product Backlog it is the Product Goal.

● For the Sprint Backlog it is the Sprint Goal.

● For the Increment it is the Definition of Done.

Question 2: Skipped

During the sprint, no changes can be made to the Sprint Backlog

Question 3: Skipped

What should the Sprint Backlog contain?

Question 4: Skipped

What activities would a Product Owner do during an active Sprint?

Question 5: Skipped

Which tasks can be delegated to others by the Product Owner :

(Select the two best answers)

Explanation

The Product Owner cannot send a delegate to represent himself / herself at the Sprint Review.

Regarding the Product Goal, the Product Owner is accountable for it.

Regarding the Sprint Goal, it’s the Developers’ accountability (because the Sprint Goal, the Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus the plan for delivering them are together referred to as the Sprint Backlog, and the Sprint Backlog solely belongs to the Developers).

The Product Owner remains accountable for ordering the Product Backlog but it doesn’t matter who do the legwork so the Product Owner can delegate it.

Question 6: Skipped

What Scrum Team structure is the best suited to produce integrated increments?

Question 7: Skipped

Who is accountable for creation of the Definition of Done?

Explanation

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

Question 8: Skipped

Who decides the duration of the Sprint?

Explanation

Once a Sprint begins, its duration is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened.

Question 9: Skipped

A Product Owner cannot send a representative to replace him to the Sprint Review.

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

Question 10: Skipped

The Developers are responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum.

Question 11: Skipped

The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Developers.

Explanation

The Developers modify the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Developers work through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Developers add it to the Sprint Backlog.

Question 12: Skipped

The Scrum Master should lead the Daily Scrum and ensure that everyone actively participates

Explanation

The Scrum Master ensures that the Developers have the meeting, but the Developers are responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum. The Scrum Master teaches the Developers to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

Question 13: Skipped

Why is it important that there is only one Product Owner per product?

Explanation

It isn't important as multiple Product Owners can easily share a single Product Backlog.

Question 14: Skipped

What factors should be considered by the Product Owner in the release decision (select four)?

Question 15: Skipped

Could the Product Owner and the Scrum Master be a Developer?

Explanation

Yes. Scrum does not prohibit the Product Owner or the Scrum Master do development work. However, it is not the best practice because it could create a conflict of interest.

Question 16: Skipped

What should happen if an item in the sprint backlog cannot be completed in the current sprint?

Question 17: Skipped

What activities occur during the sprint review?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

During the event, the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information, attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 18: Skipped

A time-box is:

Question 19: Skipped

What are considered attributes of a Product Backlog? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it only lays out the initially known and best understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.

Question 20: Skipped

Who determines how to do the work during the Sprint?

Question 21: Skipped

What does "Done" mean?

Question 22: Skipped

Adryelle is a scrum master for a scrum team. She has received new information that may cause issues during the next sprint. What should Adryelle do?

Question 23: Skipped

You must use user stories for tasks in the product backlog

Explanation

Product Backlog Items can be User Stories and/or any other form.

Question 24: Skipped

Developers are self-managed and empowered. It is also the authority deciding what business needs are required to be developed

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

Question 25: Skipped

The Developers are always accountable for instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done

Explanation

The Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 26: Skipped

Which two accountabilities would NOT be a good representation of a Product Owner implementing Value Driven Development? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

“Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality” and “Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress” are the accountabilities of the Scrum Master.

Question 27: Skipped

Who is allowed to tell the Developers to work from a set of requirements?

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 28: Skipped

Which of these tools is mandatory for the Product Owner to use?

Explanation

The Product Owner can use any tool, method or practice that he/she finds fit in order for him/her to make the best decisions possible.

Question 29: Skipped

How can the Product Owner bring his Product vision to life? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

The Product Owner should communicate and reiterate his product vision early and often, reminding all involved of how to help maximize value. Utilizing the underlying empirical product planning features of Scrum, the Product Owner should also be ready to make strategic pivots for the product vision. This vision is brought to life in a more tactical way, via the Product Backlog and iterating towards that vision every Sprint.

Question 30: Skipped

What is an increment?

Question 31: Skipped

The developers are only allowed to work with stakeholders during the sprint review

Explanation

The Scrum Team and its stakeholders agree to be open about all the work and the challenges with performing the work.

Question 32: Skipped

Who has final say over changes to the Sprint Backlog during a Sprint

Question 33: Skipped

The architectural features of product need to be

Question 34: Skipped

Who is accountable for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Developers tracks this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Developers can manage its progress.

Question 35: Skipped

What could be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.

Question 36: Skipped

Who is accountable for ensuring the Product Backlog items are understood to the level needed.

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for managing the Product Backlog.

Question 37: Skipped

What best describes the Sprint Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.

Question 38: Skipped

The product development project is about delivering an internal feature for an organization.

The team has good skill composition and worked in similar projects. The Sprint lengths can be:

Explanation

Sprints are limited to one calendar month. When a Sprint’s horizon is too long the definition of what is being built may change, complexity may rise, and risk may increase.

Question 39: Skipped

What are true statements?

Question 40: Skipped

A scrum team was under pressure to get certain features of their product "Done" three sprints sooner than they had planned. In order to meet that goal, the developers would have to choose development solutions that could be implemented quicker and easier than the solutions they were intending to use. What would be your rationale to the customer against implementing the quicker solution over the longer solution already planned?

Question 41: Skipped

Which two metrics best help the Product Owner to ensure that the Scrum Team delivers value ?

Explanation

Customer satisfaction and Time to market ensure that the customer get what they need when they need it.

Question 42: Skipped

Customer satisfaction should be measured:

Explanation

Frequent enough to ensure the team is building the right thing at the right time but not so frequent it hinders the team from the work.

Question 43: Skipped

During the sprint, no changes can be made to the sprint backlog that would endanger the sprint goal.

Question 44: Skipped

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

Only the Developers can change the Sprint Backlog during a Sprint as the Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal.

Question 45: Skipped

What should happen when a sprint is cancelled?

Question 46: Skipped

What should the Developers do if they realize it has selected too much work after starting the Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is a living artifact that evolves and changes as more is learned or discovered.

Question 47: Skipped

Who is accountable for promoting and supporting Scrum? Select the best choice.

Explanation

The Scrum Master is accountable for establishing Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. They do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory and practice, both within the Scrum Team and the organization.

The Scrum Master is accountable for the Scrum Team’s effectiveness. They do this by enabling the Scrum Team to improve its practices, within the Scrum framework.

Scrum Masters are true leaders who serve the Scrum Team and the larger organization. The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 48: Skipped

Who is accountable for managing the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 49: Skipped

What does the word 'development' mean in the context of Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

When the words 'develop' and 'development' are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.

As Scrum’s use spreads, developers, researchers, analysts, scientists, and other specialists do the work. We use the word “developers” in Scrum not to exclude, but to simplify. If you get value from Scrum, consider yourself included.

Question 50: Skipped

Who is the chief product visionary? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is the chief product visionary. The PO should be able to clearly articulate the product vision to the Scrum Team and key stakeholders, and how that vision aims to maximize the value of the product and of the work the Scrum Team performs.

Question 51: Skipped

If multiple scrum teams are working together on the same product, how many product backlogs should exist?

Question 52: Skipped

An increment is

Explanation

The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints. At the end of a Sprint, the new Increment must be “Done” which means it must be in useable condition and meet the Scrum Team’s Definition of Done. An increment is a body of inspectable, done work that supports empiricism at the end of the Sprint. The increment is a step toward a vision or goal. The increment must be in useable condition regardless of whether the Product Owner decides to release it.

Question 53: Skipped

When does a Sprint end?

Question 54: Skipped

The Scrum Team should have all the skills and competencies needed to:

Explanation

Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and to control risk. Scrum engages groups of people who collectively have all the skills and expertise to do the work and share or acquire such skills as needed.

Question 55: Skipped

An organization decides to have very small Scrum Teams of size fewer than three. The likely result could be:

Question 56: Skipped

What must the Developers do during the first Sprint?

Explanation

Sprints promote iterative and incremental development.

Question 57: Skipped

The Definition of Done is

Question 58: Skipped

Scrum Team uses the information of Scrum artifacts to make ongoing decisions. The soundness of these decisions depends on:

Question 59: Skipped

The Product Owner and the Developers can only work together during Backlog refinement.

Explanation

They can work together any time.

Question 60: Skipped

What does Burn-down Chart show?

Explanation

Various projective practices upon trending have been used to forecast progress, like burn- downs, burn-ups, or cumulative flows. These have proven useful. However, these do not replace the importance of empiricism. In complex environments, what will happen is unknown.

Only what has already happened may be used for forward-looking decision-making.

Question 61: Skipped

In the middle of a Sprint, a team member was required by another department manager to support an important task outside the Sprint work. What is recommended for the team member to do?

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog and the Developers is fully dedicated to turning the Product Backlog items into releasable increments.

For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force the Developers to work from a different set of requirements.

Question 62: Skipped

A Product Owner is not available for Scrum events and not supportive enough for the Developers. The next immediate accountability is with

Question 63: Skipped

What might be a valid reason for abnormally cancelling a Sprint?

Question 64: Skipped

During a Sprint Retrospective, a Scrum Team identified four issues in the last Sprint that impacted their ability to efficiently get work done. What should the Scrum Team do?

Explanation

The Definition of Done is a formal description of the state of the Increment when it meets the quality measures required for the product.

The moment a Product Backlog item meets the Definition of Done, an Increment is born.

The Definition of Done creates transparency by providing everyone a shared understanding of what work was completed as part of the Increment. If a Product Backlog item does not meet the Definition of Done, it cannot be released or even presented at the Sprint Review. Instead, it returns to the Product Backlog for future consideration.

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 65: Skipped

Who should be present to review and adjust the selected Sprint work if the Developers determine that it will not be able to finish the complete forecast?

Question 66: Skipped

When a Product Backlog is retired?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. If a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.

Question 67: Skipped

What factors are best considered when defining the Sprint length?

Question 68: Skipped

Every developer must answer the three questions during the daily scrum.

- What did I do yesterday that helped meet the sprint goal?

- What will I do today to help meet the sprint goal?

- Are there any impediments or blockers impacting the team's ability to meet the sprint goal?

Explanation

The structure of the meeting is set by the Developers and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal.

Question 69: Skipped

What should be considered when ordering the product backlog items?

Question 70: Skipped

Who is allowed to tell the Developers what work is needed to be done? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one is allowed to tell the Developers to work from a different set of requirements, and the Developers aren’t allowed to act on what anyone else says.

Question 71: Skipped

What can be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the Product? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that might be needed in the product and is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.

Question 72: Skipped

What should the Developers do if they don't understand a functional requirement?

Question 73: Skipped

How long should a sprint be?

Question 74: Skipped

Why should a developer be cross-functional?

Question 75: Skipped

When more Scrum Teams are added to a project that works on one single product, the productivity of the original Scrum Teams mostly likely will increase

Explanation

It generates too much complexity for an empirical process to be efficient.

Question 76: Skipped

Developers are waiting for a specific software component that they need to integrate and use.

The component should be ready in a month.

The Backlog Items with highest priorities depend on this specific component.

What should the Product Owner do?

Question 77: Skipped

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?

Explanation

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.

Question 78: Skipped

How often should Scrum Team membership change?

Explanation

It is not mandatory that the same team stay together, although it must be understood that any changes to the team will impact how they work together.

Question 79: Skipped

When is the Scrum Team allowed to interact with the Key Stakeholders? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for making sure that the Key Stakeholders attend and interact in the Sprint Reviews, but really the Stakeholders can be involved with the Scrum Team any time where it’s valuable to have the Stakeholder input.

Question 80: Skipped

The Product Owner can change the sprint backlog at any time.

Explanation

Only the Developers can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint.

Question 81: Skipped

The Sprint Review is no more than a demo of the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint. Is this statement correct? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Sprint Review contains much more activities to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog. For example: The Product Owner also explains what has not been “Done”; The entire group collaborates on what to do next, so that the Sprint Review provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning; Review of the timeline, budget.

Question 82: Skipped

The Scrum Master is tasked with coaching the Scrum Team in self-management and cross-functionality

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 83: Skipped

What should the time-boxes for the Sprint Review and the Sprint Retrospective be for a 1-month Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

The Sprint Retrospective concludes the Sprint. It is timeboxed to a maximum of three hours for a one- month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 84: Skipped

Within just few Sprints, Scrum increases the transparency of the following:

Question 85: Skipped

Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate.

Question 86: Skipped

During the Sprint Review, the Product Owner should only observe and not participate.

Explanation

During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint.

Question 87: Skipped

During a sprint review, the stakeholders notice that the product development progress is not very clearly visible and lacked transparency. Moreover, they are not able to understand the next steps. Who is responsible for this?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

During the event, the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information, attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 88: Skipped

Who is accountable for monitoring progress toward high-level goals?

Explanation

At any point in time, the total work remaining to reach a goal can be summed. The Product Owner tracks this total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.

Question 89: Skipped

Which KVA categories should the Product Owner consider to measure and track the creation and delivery of value to the market place (select three)?

Question 90: Skipped

The Product Backlog is a scrum artifact.

Question 91: Skipped

What Product Owner activities occur between the end of the current Sprint and the beginning of the next Sprint?

Question 92: Skipped

When does a new Sprint begin?

Question 93: Skipped

A Product Owner is also knowledgeable on technology. In addition to product requirements, they also impose some technical conditions that the product should meet. These conditions must be added to the:

Question 94: Skipped

What does the word “development” mean in the context of Scrum? Select the best option.

Question 95: Skipped

Who manages the progress of work during a Sprint?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Question 96: Skipped

What is product backlog refinement?

Question 97: Skipped

Which consideration is not valid for ordering the Product Backlog?

Explanation

Tool and techniques are managed by the Developers but do not interfere with the Product Backlog ordering.

Question 98: Skipped

How frequently product releases should occur?

Question 99: Skipped

The success of a product can be measured by :

(Select the three best answers)

Explanation

Margin and customers satisfaction are the two most important things for the business.

Question 100: Skipped

The purpose of a Sprint is to produce a potentially releasable product Increment.

Explanation

Sprints promote iterative and incremental development.

Question 101: Skipped

What are the characteristics of a Product Backlog Item that is “Ready” for selection in a Sprint Planning? Select three.

Question 102: Skipped

A new Product Owner is hired to work on an existing product that has ongoing for five Sprints. He/she is unsure about all of the responsibilities of a Product Owner. Which of these Product Owner activities are defined in Scrum?

Question 103: Skipped

How much work must the Developers do to a Product Backlog item it selects for a Sprint?

Explanation

As much as it can fit into the Sprint. Any remaining work will be moved to a subsequent Sprint.

Question 104: Skipped

Who is responsible for estimating the work effort in the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Developers are responsible for all work effort estimations in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping it understand and select tradeoffs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.

Question 105: Skipped

Product Backlog Refinement... (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

Question 106: Skipped

What is "Progressive Elaboration"

Question 107: Skipped

The Product Owner is responsible for developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal

Explanation

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 108: Skipped

The Scrum Master is the sole creator of the Definition of Done.

Explanation

If "Done" for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Developers of the Scrum Team must define a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

Question 109: Skipped

James is a product owner for a scrum team. The customer has expressed concerns about releasing new software after every sprint. What should James do?

Question 110: Skipped

Which stakeholder is the most important for the Product Owner to satisfy?

Explanation

The highest priority is the satisfy the end users.

Question 111: Skipped

The developers use the daily scrum to inspect progress towards the sprint goal.

Question 112: Skipped

One purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to examine what went well and what did not during the Sprint.

Question 113: Skipped

Removing impediments to the progress of the developers is one of the duties of the Scrum Master

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 114: Skipped

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.

Explanation

Scrum’s artifacts represent work or value to provide transparency and opportunities for inspection and adaptation. Artifacts defined by Scrum are specifically designed to maximize transparency of key information so that everybody has the same understanding of the artifact.

Question 115: Skipped

What does the Product Owner do during the Sprint Review?

Explanation

It's up to the Developers to demonstrate all Done items, not the Product Owner.

Question 116: Skipped

How should the product backlog be ordered?

Question 117: Skipped

Once a Sprint begins, the Sprint Backlog cannot be changed.

Explanation

The Developers modify the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Developers work through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal.

Question 118: Skipped

Which of the following statements are true? Select all that apply

Question 119: Skipped

During a sprint, scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Scrum Master and Developers as more is learned.

Explanation

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Developers as more is learned.

Question 120: Skipped

Where Scrum can be used? Check all the applicable items.

Explanation

Scrum was initially developed for managing and developing products. Starting in the early 1990s, Scrum has been used extensively, worldwide, to:

- Research and identify viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities;

- Develop products and enhancements;

- Release products and enhancements, as frequently as many times per day;

- Develop and sustain Cloud (online, secure, on-demand) and other operational environments for product use; and,

- Sustain and renew products.

Scrum has been used to develop software, hardware, embedded software, networks of interacting function, autonomous vehicles, schools, government, marketing, managing the operation of organizations and almost everything we use in our daily lives, as individuals and societies.

Teste 4

Question 1: Incorrect

How long should the sprint retrospective be?

Question 2: Skipped

Sunil is a product owner for a scrum team. A two-week long sprint began four days ago and the team is well on their way towards meeting the sprint goal. Sunil has just learned that five of the six features chosen for the current sprint are features the customer no longer wishes to implement. What should Sunil do?

Question 3: Skipped

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers, it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus, encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint, they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.

Question 4: Skipped

A “Done” increment is required at the Sprint Review.

Question 5: Skipped

William is a scrum master for a scrum team. He keeps receiving complaints from the developers about the clarity of items in the product backlog. When he investigates he learns that the product owner frequently makes meetings with the team and fails to show up or cancels at the last minute. What should William do?

Question 6: Skipped

The product increment must always be released to production after each sprint.

Explanation

The increment must be in useable condition regardless of whether the Product Owner decides to release it.

Question 7: Skipped

What are the three most applicable characteristics of the Product Owner?

Question 8: Skipped

The role of Scrum Master in Sprint Retrospective is

Explanation

The Scrum Master ensures that the meeting is positive and productive. The Scrum Master teaches all to keep it within the time-box. The Scrum Master participates as a peer team member in the meeting from the accountability over the Scrum process.

Question 9: Skipped

How does the Product Owner communicate his marketplace knowledge to the Scrum Team (select three)?

Question 10: Skipped

How can the Scrum Team keeps the Product Backlog at its maximum level of transparency?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 11: Skipped

Duration (length) of the Sprint is decided by

Question 12: Skipped

What is the essence of Scrum? Select the most appropriate option.

Explanation

The essence of Scrum is a small team of people. The individual team is highly flexible and adaptive. These strengths continue operating in single, several, many, and networks of teams that develop, release, operate and sustain the work and work products of thousands of people. They collaborate and interoperate through sophisticated development architectures and target release environments.

Question 13: Skipped

In addition to leadership, communication, analysis, and decision-making skills, a Product Owner needs to skilled at:

Explanation

Testing is not officially the role of the Product Owner. Nor programming and database management...

Relationship building comes along with communication but it’s 2 different things.

Question 14: Skipped

The scrum master helps the product owner do what in regards to the product backlog?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 15: Skipped

Who is allowed to make changes in the Product Backlog? Select two options.

Explanation

Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.

Question 16: Skipped

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning meeting.

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment. It is created during the Sprint Planning meeting.

Question 17: Skipped

Paul is a scrum master over a team of eight people. He wants to add a ninth person to the developers to help shore up some areas where the current skills are lacking. He recently gained approval from his managers to hire one additional developer. How should Paul go about choosing the right developer for the team?

Explanation

Developers are structured and empowered by the organization to organize and manage their own work. The resulting synergy optimizes the Developers' overall efficiency and effectiveness.

Question 18: Skipped

Select all that apply :

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Developers. Which means 15 mins is the maximum duration, not the minimum. A Daily Scrum can last less than 15 mins.

The Daily Scrum is held at the same time and place each day to reduce complexity.

Daily Scrums improve communications, eliminate other meetings, identify impediments to development for removal, highlight and promote quick decision-making, and improve the Developers' level of knowledge. This is a key inspect and adapt meeting.

Question 19: Skipped

All the Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.

Explanation

False. Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams.

Question 20: Skipped

Without product ownership, the team may build products that are:

Question 21: Skipped

During the Daily Scrum, the Product Owner can share his opinion and encourage the Developers to be more productive

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Developers. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Question 22: Skipped

Only the Developers may cancel a sprint.

Explanation

It's the Product Owner's Responsibility

Question 23: Skipped

If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled.

Explanation

The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete. If some work could not be done, the Sprint Backlog should be re-negotiated between the Product Owner and the Developers.

Question 24: Skipped

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Developers.

Question 25: Skipped

Scrum is an agile framework for developing complex products

Explanation

Scrum is a framework for developing, delivering, and sustaining complex products.

Question 26: Skipped

The Sprint Backlog is not allowed to change during the sprint.

Explanation

As new work is required, the Developers adds it to the Sprint Backlog. As work is performed or completed, the estimated remaining work is updated. When elements of the plan are deemed unnecessary, they are removed. Only the Developers can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Developers.

Question 27: Skipped

The Product Owner wants to get some additional product backlog items added to the current sprint backlog. Sprint planning has already happened, what should the Product Owner do?

Question 28: Skipped

The Product Backlog and the Sprint Backlog are two names for the exact same backlog.

Question 29: Skipped

What provides guidance to the Developers on why it is building the Increment?

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers, it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus, encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint, they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.

Question 30: Skipped

You are the Scrum Master for a software development project and monitor the progress of the sprint being done by the developers.

Everything seems to be going well when suddenly you hear from the senior management that the business priorities for the project are changing and the development work needs to stopped right away. The abnormal cancelation of the current sprint is decided by the:

Explanation

A Sprint could be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint.

Question 31: Skipped

A group of stakeholders want to come to the daily scrum. How should the scrum master handle that situation?

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Developers. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Question 32: Skipped

John is looking to create an agile team. He knows that he will need to rely on each person to help each other learn new skills. This type of team is known as:

Question 33: Skipped

Who participates in the Sprint Planning? Select three.

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

Question 34: Skipped

The three questions must always be answered during the Daily Scrum.

Explanation

It's best practice, but NOT mandatory

Question 35: Skipped

What questions must be answered during Sprint Planning in order to make an effective Sprint Goal?

Explanation

Sprint Planning addresses the following topics:

Topic One: Why is this Sprint valuable?

Topic Two: What can be Done this Sprint?

Topic Three: How will the chosen work get done?

Question 36: Skipped

Only the Developers may attend the Daily Scrum.

Explanation

But only the developers may PARTICIPATE in the daily scrum.

Question 37: Skipped

The Developers can work on Product Backlog refinement.

Explanation

Product Backlog items that can be Done by the Scrum Team within one Sprint are deemed ready for selection in a Sprint Planning event. They usually acquire this degree of transparency after refining activities. Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 38: Skipped

Is it not unusual that a Sprint is cancelled

Explanation

Sprint cancellations consume resources, since everyone regroups in another Sprint Planning to start another Sprint. Sprint cancellations are often traumatic to the Scrum Team, and are very uncommon.

Question 39: Skipped

Who is the chief product visionary?

Question 40: Skipped

Once a Sprint begins, its duration can be:

Explanation

Once a Sprint begins, its duration is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened.

Question 41: Skipped

Rebecca, a scrum master, has recognized that Ricky, a developer, is having issues getting along with the other members of the team. The other developer has complained about Ricky frequently and often cite him as one reason they struggle to complete some work on time. After evaluating the situation, it is clear to Rebecca that Ricky has the skill needed to do the work but not the emotional intelligence required to work well with others. What should Rebecca do about the situation?

Explanation

Developers are self-managing. The Scrum Master has no authority on the Developers but he can let the management know about the issue so the management can remove Ricky.

Question 42: Skipped

What tool is used by teams to visualize the sprint plan?

Question 43: Skipped

A product backlog has:

Question 44: Skipped

When does the Sprint Retrospective occur?

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective occurs after the Sprint Review and prior to the next Sprint Planning.

Question 45: Skipped

Which Agile principle does a 'Sprint Retrospective' meeting follow?

Explanation

Scrum combines four formal events for inspection and adaptation within a containing event, the Sprint. These events work because they implement the empirical Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 46: Skipped

What are the five scrum events?

Question 47: Skipped

The Scrum Master participates in the Sprint Retrospective as a:

Explanation

The Scrum Master ensures that the meeting is positive and productive. The Scrum Master teaches all to keep it within the time-box. The Scrum Master participates as a peer team member in the meeting from the accountability over the Scrum process.

Question 48: Skipped

How long does the Product Backlog exists?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. If a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 49: Skipped

What is the Increment?

Question 50: Skipped

The primary objective of a SCRUM team at the end of a Sprint is to?

Question 51: Skipped

A backlog is an important part of making sure that the end product:

Explanation

The backlog needs to align to the product vision, outcomes, and be valuable to customer and user.

Question 52: Skipped

Who are the typical Key Stakeholders (select three)?

Question 53: Skipped

Product Backlog refinement is the act of defining Product Backlog items into bigger and wider items.

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

Question 54: Skipped

Sam is a Developer within a Scrum Team. Sam believes that top item in the Product Backlog is not very clear. He asks the other developers if they understand it. They have expressed to Sam that it does seem unclear and they are not able to help. What should Sam do?

Question 55: Skipped

The Developers hold each other accountable as professionals.

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 56: Skipped

What is the Sprint Retrospective?

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.

Question 57: Skipped

What is the role of the Scrum Master in the Daily Scrum?

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Developers. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Question 58: Skipped

A Sprint Review is held at:

Explanation

A Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed.

Question 59: Skipped

The Developers are managed by:

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work.
However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 60: Skipped

What are the five values of scrum?

Explanation

When the values of commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect are embodied and lived by the Scrum Team, the Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation come to life and build trust for everyone. The Scrum Team members learn and explore those values as they work with the Scrum roles, events, and artifacts.

Question 61: Skipped

A Sprint Retrospective can last up to 8 hours in a month-long sprint.

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective occurs after the Sprint Review and prior to the next Sprint Planning.

It should be at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.

Question 62: Skipped

When is the proper time for a Business Analyst on a scrum team to discuss the proper workflow of the application?

Question 63: Skipped

James and Bob are on a Scrum Developers. They have a disagreement about how to implement a package tracking feature they are working on in the current Sprint. The end result of each method is the same, it is only the process to implement that is different. What is the best way for them to handle their disagreement?

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 64: Skipped

It is a good practice to have at least two Product Owners on big projects.

Explanation

The Product Owner is one person, not a committee. The Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog, but those wanting to change a Product Backlog item’s priority must address the Product Owner.

Question 65: Skipped

During the Sprint, the Sprint Goal can be changed

Explanation

No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal

Question 66: Skipped

Select the five Scrum Values.

Explanation

When the values of commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect are embodied and lived by the Scrum Team, the Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation come to life and build trust for everyone.

The Scrum Team members learn and explore those values as they work with the Scrum roles, events, and artifacts.

Question 67: Skipped

Who is responsible for the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is solely responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.

Question 68: Skipped

Once a Sprint begins, its duration can be shortened or lengthened as more is learned.

Explanation

Once a Sprint begins, its duration is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened.

Question 69: Skipped

The Developers should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-managing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 70: Skipped

Which of the following is a trait of effective stakeholder engagement?

Explanation

The whole point of Scrum is : Delivering and releasing as many increments as possible with the greatest value.

“Conducting periodic reviews” is a mean, not the purpose.

Question 71: Skipped

James wants to use a waterfall approach for a project, and Lucia would like to use her Scrum Team. What is a disadvantage of using a waterfall approach?

Question 72: Skipped

Only the Scrum Master may cancel a sprint.

Explanation

A Sprint can be cancelled before the Sprint time-box is over. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Developers, or the Scrum Master.

Question 73: Skipped

The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Scrum Master.

Explanation

The Developers is self-managed.

Question 74: Skipped

Burn-down charts are the only recognized way in scrum to track progress.

Explanation

Burn-down charts are best practice but NOT mandatory.

Question 75: Skipped

What is the result of the Sprint Review?

Explanation

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.

Question 76: Skipped

As Scrum Team is in the process of defining Product Backlog items. The Scrum Master notices that the team is not using User Story format to capture the backlog items. Scrum Master should:

Question 77: Skipped

What are the two questions the Sprint Planning answers?

Explanation

Sprint Planning answers the following:

• What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

• How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?

Question 78: Skipped

Select the two focus areas that are not considered in executing Value Driven Development by the Product Owner.

Explanation

"Coach of the Developers in self-organization and cross-functionality" and "Remover of impediments to the Developers' progress" are parts of the Scrum Master's accountabilities.

Question 79: Skipped

Who serves the Product Owner helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 80: Skipped

How long should the daily scrum be?

Question 81: Skipped

Selena, a product owner for a scrum team, has refined the product backlog based on risk and value. John, a program manager with the PMO overseeing the group of projects Selena is working on, has ordered Selena to place a different item at the top of the product backlog. What should Selena do?

Question 82: Skipped

How long should the Sprint Planning be?

Question 83: Skipped

In a Product Backlog, which items are at the top?

Question 84: Skipped

Which of the following BEST describes the essence of stakeholder engagement?

Question 85: Skipped

A Sprint would be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete.

Explanation

A Sprint would be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete. This might occur if the company changes direction or if market or technology conditions change. In general, a Sprint should be cancelled if it no longer makes sense given the circumstances. But, due to the short duration of Sprints, cancellation rarely makes sense.

Question 86: Skipped

If a developer cannot complete all of the required elements of a sprint, what should they do?

Explanation

As the Developers work, it keeps the Sprint Goal in mind. In order to satisfy the Sprint Goal, it implements functionality and technology. If the work turns out to be different than the Developers expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of Sprint Backlog within the Sprint.

Question 87: Skipped

What is the Sprint Backlog?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 88: Skipped

In an Agile project, an environment based on trust, learning, and collaboration promotes teams which are:

Question 89: Skipped

A scrum Team crafts the following Sprint Goal: "All the Sprint code should have passed 100% automated unit tests".

Question 90: Skipped

What does product owner planning focus on?

Question 91: Skipped

What is the Cone of Uncertainty?

Question 92: Skipped

Juan is a Product Owner for a scrum team. He decides each sprint what items will go into the sprint backlog during sprint planning. He is growing increasingly frustrated with the development team not able to complete the task items he has chosen for the sprint. What should Juan do to help the development team reach the sprint goal?

Question 93: Skipped

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.

Question 94: Skipped

A Scrum Master may cancel a sprint at any time.

Explanation

A Sprint can be cancelled before the Sprint time-box is over. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Developers, or the Scrum Master.

Question 95: Skipped

What is true of Agile ceremonies/meetings?

Question 96: Skipped

The Scrum Master can also be a Developer of the Scrum Team.

Question 97: Skipped

The Scrum Master is:

Explanation

Scrum Masters are true leaders who serve the Scrum Team and the larger organization.

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 98: Skipped

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to:

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.

Question 99: Skipped

The Product Owner should be expertly aware of the marketplace for the product.

Question 100: Skipped

During Daily Scrum, this plan is used as a reference to understand the changes in progress.

Question 101: Skipped

The Sprint Retrospective marks the beginning of a new sprint.

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective is the last event of a Sprint.

A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

Question 102: Skipped

By the end of the Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team should have identified:

Explanation

By the end of the Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team should have identified improvements that it will implement in the next Sprint. Implementing these improvements in the next Sprint is the adaptation to the inspection of the Scrum Team itself.

Question 103: Skipped

Who is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum ?

Explanation

The Scrum Master ensures that the Developers have the meeting, but the Developers are responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum. The Scrum Master teaches the Developers to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

Question 104: Skipped

A demonstration of the working product is scheduled at the end of each sprint. This type of meeting is generally referred to as:

Question 105: Skipped

Who is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Developers are responsible for all estimates. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.

Question 106: Skipped

One of the Scrum Teams chose to have a Developers also playing the role of Scrum Master. A Developer cannot also play Scrum Master's role.

Explanation

There is no official rule set up that a scrum master cannot be a developer.

Question 107: Skipped

Which of the following is a 'True' statement?

Question 108: Skipped

Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal?

Explanation

The Developers use the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog.

Question 109: Skipped

"Scrum Master" and "Project Manager" are not the same thing.

Explanation

Scrum does not recognizes the "Project Manager" role.

Question 110: Skipped

Who must participate in every Sprint Planning

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

Question 111: Skipped

Who participates in the Sprint Review? Select all applicable variants.

Explanation

A Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed. During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint.

Question 112: Skipped

What are the pillars of the empirical process in Scrum?

Explanation

Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 113: Skipped

The Daily Scrum is held at the same time and place

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is held at the same time and place each day to reduce complexity.

Question 114: Skipped

To deliver a single product, three different Developers are formed. How many Product Owners are needed?

Explanation

The Product Owner is one person, not a committee. The Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog, but those wanting to change a Product Backlog item’s priority must address the Product Owner.

Question 115: Skipped

Scrum framework is founded on

Question 116: Skipped

How frequently the Product Owner should communicate and re-iterate his product vision to the Scrum Team and the Key Stakeholders?

Explanation

Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 117: Skipped

After Sprint Review, Production release in Scrum requires

Question 118: Skipped

What are the three pillars of product ownership?

Question 119: Skipped

An important executive wants the Developers to take in a highly critical feature in the current Sprint. The Developers:

Explanation

For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force the Developers to work from a different set of requirements.

Question 120: Skipped

When a product grows, it is quite possible that the PO will get help from other Product Managers and others in the organization who interact regarding the customer facing activities and knowledge of the product marketplace. Is it a good idea for the PO to proxy or outsource some of their PO Scrum Team duties to these people (for example, Scrum Team facing duties)?

Explanation

When a product grows, it is quite possible that the PO will get help from other Product Managers and others in the organization who interact regarding the customer facing activities and knowledge of the product marketplace. While it is fine for the PO to be aided by the aforementioned people, it is NOT acceptable for the PO to attempt to proxy or outsource their PO Scrum Team duties, especially the Scrum Team facing duties.

Teste 5

Question 1: Skipped

All of the following are characteristics of a Product Owner EXCEPT:

Select an answer:

Question 2: Skipped

Which two of the following are mandatory in Scrum?

Question 3: Skipped

What happens during the Sprint? Select three answers.

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers, it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus, encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint, they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.

Question 4: Skipped

What are the Scrum artifacts?

Explanation

Scrum’s artifacts represent work or value to provide transparency and opportunities for inspection and adaptation. Artifacts defined by Scrum are specifically designed to maximize transparency of key information so that everybody has the same understanding of the artifact.

Question 5: Skipped

The Product Owner is responsible for preparing the Sprint Goal before the Sprint Planning.

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is prepared during the Sprint Planning by the whole Scrum Team.

Question 6: Skipped

Which of the following is not allowed in Scrum?

Explanation

Hardening Sprints are not allowed because the subject of hardening should be continuously address throughout normal Sprints. All Sprints are the same in Scrum. Other options are not described in the framework but are good practices recommended for Scrum projects.

Question 7: Skipped

When more Scrum Teams are added to a project that works on one single product, the productivity of the original Scrum Teams most likely will increase

Explanation

Each Scrum Team needs to mutually define their definition of done so their work will be potentially releasable. That involves some overhead work in syncing up, and hence the impact to productivity.

Question 8: Skipped

Scrum is easy to master

Explanation

Scrum is:

• Lightweight

• Simple to understand

• Difficult to master

Question 9: Skipped

To deliver a single product, three different Scrum Teams are formed. How many Product Owners are needed?

Explanation

A single product should have a single Product Backlog and hence the only one owner, a Product Owner. A P.O. can delegate some of his responsibilities to the team, however they are still accountable for Product Backlog ownership.

Question 10: Skipped

What does product owner planning focus on?

Select an answer:

Question 11: Skipped

A manager from accounting has an urgent task for one of the Developers on a Scrum Team.

He says the VP of product development has ordered the Developers to complete this task for him. What should the developers do?

Explanation

For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force the Developers to work from a different set of requirements.

Question 12: Skipped

It is OK for the items at the bottom of the Product Backlog not to be as clear as those at the top.

Explanation

Items at the bottom of the Product Backlog won't be developed soon, so, there's no need to spend too much time making them clear and add details; that would be some kind of upfront planning. Not that the items do not go to the bottom of the backlog because they are not clear or do not have enough detail; the only basis for order of items is the business value. When the item does not have enough detail and starts to go to the top of the Product Backlog, it should be refined by adding more detail.

Question 13: Skipped

Who identifies the Key Stakeholders for the Product?

Explanation

In order to maximize value, the Product Owner should identify the Key Stakeholders for the Product, and involve them as necessary throughout the development effort.

Question 14: Skipped

What must the Scrum Team do for each sprint?

Explanation

The Scrum Team consists of professionals who do the work of delivering a potentially releasable Increment of “Done” product at the end of each Sprint. A “Done” increment is required at the Sprint Review.

Question 15: Skipped

Imagine the following situation. At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What may the Scrum Team do? Select the best option.

Explanation

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

Question 16: Skipped

During the Daily Scrum, a team member says he does not know when his task will be complete

Question 17: Skipped

An inspector finds that a work aspect deviates outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable. When will the team adjust this work aspect to minimize the deviation?

Explanation

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.

Question 18: Skipped

Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum?

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Developers. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Question 19: Skipped

Select the three best options to finish the sentence below.

Technical debt…

Explanation

“Technical debt (also known as design debt or code debt) is a concept in software development that reflects the implied cost of additional rework caused by choosing an easy solution now instead of using a better approach that would take longer.”

Technical debt can be defined as the longer term consequences of poor design decisions. In a sense it’s like any other debt - there ought to be a clear understanding of why it is incurred, and how and when to pay it back. Sometimes it is genuinely thought to be worth it. For example, “poor design decisions” might be made for the sake of expediency. Continuing with an unscalable architecture might facilitate a delivery to a Product Owner which would otherwise be impossible if redesign was to happen now. There will be long-term costs associated with the delay in taking remedial action, because it will become harder to refactor the architecture the longer it is left in place and used. That’s clearly a kind of debt, because we are borrowing time from the product’s future which will have to be repaid with interest. Yet given the advantage to be obtained by making that early delivery, the choice to take on this debt might be considered to be appropriate and worthwhile.

Question 20: Skipped

When should the Product Backlog items be refined? (choose 2 answers)

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is a continuous activity. When an item is at the top of the backlog, which means it will be developed in the near future, more refinements are usually needed to make sure it is clear and contains just enough details (not all possible details). It's preferred to have the items that will be selected in the Sprint Backlog completely refined before Sprint Planning; however, it's OK to have more refinement done during the development. Remember that there's no such thing as Sprint 0 and there's no time between two Sprints that can be spent on something such as refinement. The team is also cross-functional and does the a-z of the work needed for each item, including refinement; they don't use people from other parts of the company.

Question 21: Skipped

If "Done" for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Scrum Team must define a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

Explanation

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

Question 22: Skipped

How important is it for a Product Owner to order Product Backlog items by value points?

Explanation

Indications of value on Product Backlog are useful but are only a prediction until validated against users and market.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 23: Skipped

Which is not a Product Backlog Management activity?

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog. Product Backlog management includes:

- Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

- Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

- Optimizing the value of the work the Developers perform;

- Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

-Ensuring the Developers understand items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.

Question 24: Skipped

What happens when the Product Backlog is not clear enough at Sprint Planning?

Explanation

We prefer to have "ready" items at the top of the Product Backlog before Sprint Planning, which is done through Product Backlog refinement. However, nothing stops our flow of Sprints, for example, we do not delay the Sprint because the items are not ready. In such cases, the "unready" items would be selected for the Sprint anyway and refined during the Sprint. "Ready" items are those that are clear and small enough to fit into one Sprint.

Question 25: Skipped

Which statement is correct when the Developers are working in the middle of the Sprint?

Explanation

The Developers modify the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Developers work through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. The work and scope of work to be 'done' may be clarified or re-negotiated together with the Product Owner if necessary.

Question 26: Skipped

Who defines the Definition of Done?

Explanation

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 27: Skipped

What is the order of items in the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for placing the most valuable and clear items at the top of the Product Backlog.

Question 28: Skipped

In the middle of the Sprint, a team member was required by another dept. manager to support an important task outside the Sprint work. What is recommended for the team member to do?

Explanation

If any external authority brings different work, the team should explain about how they self-organize their work in Scrum way. After that, the team can refer them to speak with the Product Owner if the external authority still wants to add this new work.

Question 29: Skipped

What are Product Backlog features? Select three.

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.

A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. If a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 30: Skipped

Which of the following is a 'FALSE' statement?

Select an answer:

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 31: Skipped

When is user acceptance testing done?

Explanation

We can't really call it "Done" when user acceptance tests (or any other tests) are not done. Therefore, it has to be done during the Sprint.

Question 32: Skipped

The Sprint Review is the only time when stakeholder feedback is captured.

Explanation

The Sprint Review is probably the most important opportunity for capturing feedback but adaptation is not limited to that. The Product Owner is constantly in contact with the stakeholders to identify new Product Backlog items or to refine them.

Question 33: Skipped

Which statement is correct when multiple Scrum Teams are working on the same product?

Explanation

"One" project and "one" product has only "one" Product Backlog and "one" Product Owner. Otherwise, prioritization and accountability would be difficult.

Question 34: Skipped

What technique should be used for representing Product Backlog Items?

Explanation

Scrum is not a process, technique, or definitive method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques.

User stories are a fairly common technique for representing Product Backlog Items, but other techniques can be used instead. For instance, a team can use scenarios, use cases, acceptance tests, etc. The Product Backlog might even contain a heterogeneous mix of the above. The Product Owner should work with the rest of the Scrum Team on choosing and optimizing the techniques used to represent Product Backlog Items.

Question 35: Skipped

At the end of Sprint Planning, the Developers could not decompose all of the work into units of one day or less. It could decompose the work for only the first few days of the Sprint.

Explanation

1. Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter. The Scrum Master ensures that the event takes place and that attendants understand its purpose. The Scrum Master teaches the Scrum Team to keep it within the time-box.

2. Work planned for the first days of the Sprint by the Developers is decomposed by the end of this meeting, often to units of one day or less. The Developers self-manage to undertake the work in the Sprint Backlog, both during Sprint Planning and as needed throughout the Sprint.

Question 36: Skipped

When is the Scrum Team allowed to interact with the Key Stakeholders (select the most applicable option)?

Question 37: Skipped

Every Product Backlog Item should be created by the Product Owner personally and only then the Developers can add details to it at the PO’s discretion.

Explanation

Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.

Question 38: Skipped

On average, items on the Sprint Backlog tend to be:

Explanation

This is how it works: When you first add the items to the Product Backlog, you don't have to break them down into very small and clear items, because it's a form of upfront planning. Some of them may be very large. When you order the items, if they are on the top of the list, you have to make them clear, and make sure they can fit into one Sprint; therefore, you will break them down into smaller items.

Question 39: Skipped

Each new Sprint starts immediately after the previous Sprint.

Explanation

Nothing happens between two Sprints; the next one starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous.

Question 40: Skipped

Product Backlog Refinement…

Select the two most applicable sentence endings.

Question 41: Skipped

Select all that apply. Scrum Team participates in:

Explanation

Only the Developers participate in the Daily Scrum. Not the entire Scrum Team.

Question 42: Skipped

Who is the leader in terms of getting feedback from the Key Stakeholders in the Sprint Review?

Explanation

During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value.

Question 43: Skipped

Which of the following statements are true? Select all that apply

Question 44: Skipped

Who creates the Definition of Done?

Explanation

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 45: Skipped

What should happen to the "Done" Product Backlog items when the Sprint is cancelled?

Explanation

The Developers are responsible for the definition of "Done" rather than the Product Owner. So, if the Product Owner doubts the quality of the definition of "Done", he/she can discuss it with the team on the next Sprint Retrospective, so that if they agree, it would be adjusted for the next Sprint.

Question 46: Skipped

How can the Product Owner bring his product vision to life (select 3)?

Question 47: Skipped

Hundreds of developers are identified for a Scrum work. Which two of the following may be appropriate considerations to form these developers into Scrum Teams?

Question 48: Skipped

Which statement best describes the Sprint Backlog in an active Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is a living artifact and the scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and the Developers as more is learned. A Sprint Backlog is flexible, as long as changes do not distract from the focus on the Sprint Goal.

Question 49: Skipped

Besides user stories, what helps a product team understand requirements?

Select an answer:

Question 50: Skipped

All interactions between the stakeholders and the Developers must be through the Product Owner.

Explanation

The interactions can be through the Product Owner or during the Sprint Review. Other interactions are discouraged if it distracts the Developers.

Question 51: Skipped

What is the Product Owner accountable for in Scrum?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product and the work of the Developers. The primary tool to do so is the Product Backlog.

Question 52: Skipped

What variables should a Product Owner consider when ordering the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions, thereby optimizing the value of the work the Developers perform. How this is done, and what value means, may vary widely across organizations.

Question 53: Skipped

Transparency and trust in an Agile project is built by:

Select an answer:

Question 54: Skipped

How should multiple Scrum Teams, working on the same product, manage their Definition of Done?

Explanation

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 55: Skipped

The Product Backlog is the single source of all planned work that is to be done by the Developers.

Explanation

All work to be done by the Developers must ultimately come from the Product Backlog as it is the single source of truth for any changes to be made to the product. How the work is done can change, evolve, and emerge as the work is being done.

Question 56: Skipped

Who has the “last say” on the order of items in the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person accountable for managing the Product Backlog.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 57: Skipped

All of the following are key ingredients of defining a Scrum method EXCEPT:

(Select an answer)

Explanation

The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.

Question 58: Skipped

Who among the following is responsible for causing the removal of impediments during the course of a SCRUM project?

Select an answer:

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 59: Skipped

The Product Owner doesn't spend enough time on the project. Which of the following options is the best response from the Scrum Master?

Explanation

The Scrum Master is responsible to train and coach team members on a proactive way and convince them to do the right thing. All other options are either reactive or not self-organized.

Question 60: Skipped

During the Daily Scrum, the Scrum Master goes around the room pointing to each Developer and asks them for their status updates.

Each team member gives their update and the Scrum Master goes to the next person. The Daily Scrum goes smoothly and everyone is happy with how they work.

What is the Scrum Master doing wrong?

Explanation

The Scrum Master ensures that the Developers have the meeting, but the Developers are responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum. The Scrum Master teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Developers. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Question 61: Skipped

The Scrum Master should not allow the Product Owner to attend the Sprint Planning if the PO is not ready with a Sprint Goal. Is this true or false?

Explanation

Sprints are the heartbeat of Scrum, where ideas are turned into value.

They are fixed length events of one month or less to create consistency. A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

Question 62: Skipped

You are assigned to conduct a feasibility study on a complicated software development project to see if it can be delivered in an Agile environment. Which approach would you adopt to maximize the business value?

Select an answer:

Explanation

Scrum combines four formal events for inspection and adaptation within a containing event, the Sprint. These events work because they implement the empirical Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 63: Skipped

Usually, he 'Daily Scrum' is a:

Select an answer:

Question 64: Skipped

What are the roles on a Scrum team?

Explanation

The fundamental unit of Scrum is a small team of people, a Scrum Team. The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers.

Question 65: Skipped

Who decides whether to release the latest increment of the product?

Question 66: Skipped

Which event is the most appropriate for discussing or updating the Definition of Done?

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work.

Question 67: Skipped

What can you take into consideration when ordering items in the Product Backlog?

(Choose all that apply)

Explanation

When maximizing the flow of value, the Product Owner needs to consider the business value, user's unmet needs, effort to complete the item, availability of Developers and skills, dependencies within the product and outside of the product, etc. The Development tools and techniques and the availability of the Scrum Master has no direct impact on the flow of value.

Question 68: Skipped

What are the true statements?

Question 69: Skipped

You are the Scrum Master for a software development project and one of your goals is to ensure that the team performs at its highest level of productivity. What is the BEST way to realize this objective?

Select an answer:

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 70: Skipped

Who should do the legwork of gathering the marketplace data for the Product Owner?

Question 71: Skipped

If a Developer becomes an impediment, can the project manager remove them from the Scrum Team?

Explanation

The fundamental unit of Scrum is a small team of people, a Scrum Team. The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers.

Question 72: Skipped

Who creates the Sprint Goal?

Explanation

All Scrum Team members together compose the Sprint Goal during the Sprint Planning.

Question 73: Skipped

Without product ownership, the team may build products that are _____.

Select an answer:

Question 74: Skipped

How complete should the Sprint Backlog be at the end of the Sprint Planning meeting?

Explanation

Not all tasks are identified in the Sprint Planning; just enough to show what the development team is going to do in the next few days. The rest of the tasks will be created during the Sprint.

Question 75: Skipped

Product Backlog Refinement practice focuses on Items for upcoming Sprints, not the current Sprint in progress. True or false?

Question 76: Skipped

Which two statements explain why the Definition of Done is important to the Product Owner?

Explanation

The Definition of Done is a formal description of the state of the Increment when it meets the quality measures required for the product.

The moment a Product Backlog item meets the Definition of Done, an Increment is born.

The Definition of Done creates transparency by providing everyone a shared understanding of what work was completed as part of the Increment. If a Product Backlog item does not meet the Definition of Done, it cannot be released or even presented at the Sprint Review. Instead, it returns to the Product Backlog for future consideration.

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 77: Skipped

The Product Goal is in the Product Backlog.

Explanation

The Product Goal describes a future state of the product which can serve as a target for the Scrum Team to plan against. The Product Goal is in the Product Backlog. The rest of the Product Backlog emerges to define “what” will fulfill the Product Goal.

A product is a vehicle to deliver value. It has a clear boundary, known stakeholders, well-defined users or customers. A product could be a service, a physical product, or something more abstract.

The Product Goal is the long-term objective for the Scrum Team. They must fulfill (or abandon) one objective before taking on the next.

Question 78: Skipped

Which three statements are correct about non-functional requirements?

Question 79: Skipped

In addition to leadership, communication, analysis, and decision-making skills, a product owner needs to skilled at _____.

Select an answer:

Question 80: Skipped

For the first Sprint, the inputs are the Product Backlog and the Projected Capacity of the Developers. What are the additional inputs to the subsequent Sprints?

Explanation

The input to the Sprint Planning is the Product Backlog, the latest product Increment, projected capacity of the Developers during the Sprint, and past performance of the Developers.

Question 81: Skipped

In a two-week long sprint, the Sprint Planning meeting should be how long?

Question 82: Skipped

The Sprint Goal and Sprint Backlog are outputs of Sprint Planning.

Explanation

Sprint Planning initiates the Sprint by laying out the work to be performed for the Sprint. This resulting plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

The Product Owner ensures that attendees are prepared to discuss the most important Product Backlog items and how they map to the Product Goal.

The Sprint Goal, the Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus the plan for delivering them are together referred to as the Sprint Backlog.

Question 83: Skipped

Select all that apply. Empiricism provides...

Question 84: Skipped

Scrum is best described as

Explanation

Scrum is a framework for developing, delivering, and sustaining complex products.

A framework within which people can address complex adaptive problems, while productively and creatively delivering products of the highest possible value.

Question 85: Skipped

Impacts and inputs to the product roadmap can include _____.

Select an answer:

Question 86: Skipped

If multiple Stakeholders have varied interests in the product and different viewpoints what is the best strategy for the Product Owner?

Question 87: Skipped

The Product Owner's authority to change and update the Product Backlog is unlimited, except for:

Explanation

For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force the Developers to work from a different set of requirements.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 88: Skipped

Which topics should be discussed in the Sprint Review?

Question 89: Skipped

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

- Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

- Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

- Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

- Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

- Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

- Understanding and practicing agility; and,

- Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.

Question 90: Skipped

The purpose of the Daily Scrum is for the developers to inform the Product Owner of the progress.

Explanation

The main purpose of Daily Scrum is synchronization of the developers.

Question 91: Skipped

The Product Owner can ask the Developers to order the Product Backlog items instead of him/her.

Explanation

The Product Owner can delegate his/her responsibilities to the Developers but he/she stays accountable.

Question 92: Skipped

What is a key inspect and adapt meeting for the Developers?

Explanation

The Developers use the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog.

Question 93: Skipped

The Product Owner and Scrum Master are not allowed to be a Developer.

Explanation

It's OK for a Product Owner or a Scrum Master to be also a Developer even though it's not recommended.

Question 94: Skipped

Experimenting and prototyping are great ways to gather and elicit _____.

Select an answer:

Question 95: Skipped

The Developers finds out during the Sprint that they aren't likely to build everything they forecasted. What would you expect a Product Owner to do?

Explanation

During the Sprint scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Developers as more is learned.

Question 96: Skipped

When multiple Scrum Teams are working on same project, what best describes the Definition of Done?

Explanation

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 97: Skipped

When is a Sprint Completed?

Question 98: Skipped

In the middle of a Sprint, a Scrum Team identifies a defect. Initially, they were not sure about the cause of the defect, and hence they involved the P.O. to discuss. After discussing, both the P.O. and the Scrum Team agreed that the defect is indeed a clear gap in the feature being developed in their Sprint and not a new requirement. The defect should be

Explanation

The defect is from the work performed in the current Sprint.

Question 99: Skipped

You are the lead for a project ABC and you receive communication from the client that the work units delivered by the team are not satisfactory. What is the BEST method to address this issue?

Select an answer:

Question 100: Skipped

All of the following are examples of valid SCRUM rules EXCEPT:

Select an answer:

Explanation

Only the Product Owner can cancel a Sprint.

Question 101: Skipped

What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.

Explanation

Product Backlog management includes:

Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

Optimizing the value of the work the Developers perform;

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

Ensuring the Developers understand items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.

Question 102: Skipped

Scrum should be tailored for the project.

Explanation

Unlike methodologies, the Scrum "framework" is not tailored because it's already limited to the essentials. Even the terms should not change let along adding or removing elements such as roles and events. However, you need to add many practices and techniques to the framework.

Question 103: Skipped

A discussion of what to do next is additional in the Sprint Review.

Explanation

Every Scrum event is an opportunity for inspection and adaptation. In the Sprint Review, inspecting the product Increment provides insights and clarity. This newly found knowledge is used to 'adapt the next steps,' i.e., find out what to do next.

Question 104: Skipped

Must the Product Owner be present at the Sprint Retrospective?

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.

Question 105: Skipped

It's required to use user stories in Scrum.

Explanation

It's a good idea to use user stories for describing the Product Backlog items but it's not required.

Question 106: Skipped

Learning turns into 'validated learning' when assumptions and goals can be assessed through results. What is a key way for a Product Owner to apply validated learning?

Explanation

The Product Owner manages Product Backlog against the assumption that value will be generated. This assumption remains invalidated when not checked against users and market.

Question 107: Skipped

The Scrum Master is a participant in Sprint Retrospective.

Explanation

All team members participate and try to find ways for improvement.

Question 108: Skipped

It's up to the Developers to decide which Scrum events are needed during the Sprint.

Explanation

All Scrum events are necessary; they should never be removed.

Question 109: Skipped

The Scrum Master is accountable for releasing the most valuable product possible.

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for releasing the most valuable product possible. The Developers are accountable for doing the work. The Scrum Master is accountable for ensuring Scrum is adopted and used properly.

Question 110: Skipped

You are entrusted with the responsibility of 'Forming an Agile Team' to add business value to the project. What KEY competencies would you look for in creating the team?

Select an answer:

Question 111: Skipped

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?

Explanation

The Key Stakeholders can participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time

Question 112: Skipped

In general, when is it most important to have documentation about a product's requirements?

Select an answer:

Explanation

In Agile : Working Software Over Comprehensive Documentation

Historically, enormous amounts of time were spent on documenting the product for development and ultimate delivery. Technical specifications, technical requirements, technical prospectus, interface design documents, test plans, documentation plans, and approvals required for each. The list was extensive and was a cause for the long delays in development. Agile does not eliminate documentation, but it streamlines it in a form that gives the developer what is needed to do the work.

In Scrum : We must put all the products requirements in the Product Backlog.

Question 113: Skipped

In an Agile project, the customer is kept satisfied by :

Select an answer:

Question 114: Skipped

Sprint Retrospectives focus on:

(Select an answer)

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work. Assumptions that led them astray are identified and their origins explored. The Scrum Team discusses what went well during the Sprint, what problems it encountered, and how those problems were (or were not) solved.

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

The Sprint Retrospective concludes the Sprint. It is timeboxed to a maximum of three hours for a one- month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 115: Skipped

The Scrum Framework defines rules or guidelines for documentation?

Explanation

Scrum is a process framework that has been used to manage work on complex products since the early 1990s. Scrum is not a process, technique, or definitive method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques. Scrum makes clear the relative efficacy of your product management and work techniques so that you can continuously improve the product, the team, and the working environment.

Question 116: Skipped

The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Developers.

Explanation

As new work is required, the Developers adds it to the Sprint Backlog. As work is performed or completed, the estimated remaining work is updated. When elements of the plan are deemed unnecessary, they are removed. Only the Developers can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Developers.

Question 117: Skipped

When multiple teams are working on the same product, their Sprints should start and end at the same time.

Explanation

It's not mandatory in Scrum.org to start and end the Sprints at the same time because you may need it in certain cases. For example, some teams may be working on parts of the project that need longer Sprints (four-week), while others need shorter ones (two-week) for more regular feedback loops...

Question 118: Skipped

Duration (length) of Sprint is decided by

Question 119: Skipped

All work that the Developers plan to deliver in a Sprint originates from the Product Backlog.

Explanation

During Sprint Planning, the first topic the Scrum Team discusses is "What can be done this Sprint." The items under discussion comes from the Product Backlog. The Product Backlog is the single source of truth that lists all features, functions, requirements, enhancements, and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases. This list would be considered the work. However, how the work is delivered can change during the implementation.

Question 120: Skipped

The value delivered by a product can only be determined by tangible business benefits and performance.

Explanation

Value is likely to vary across products and organizations.

Question 121: Skipped

The Product Owner wants to apply some non-functional requirements to the Product. What is the best way to proceed?

Explanation

Non-functional requirements describe qualities of the Product being developed. For example, the Product should be secure and extensible. The only way to meet such requirements is to have them as a part of the DoD and check every Increment against these criteria.

As Scrum Teams mature, it is expected that their definitions of “Done” will expand to include more stringent criteria for higher quality. New definitions, as used, may uncover work to be done in previously “Done” increments. Any one product or system should have a definition of “Done” that is a standard for any work done on it.

Question 122: Skipped

What is empirical process control in relation to Scrum?

Explanation

Scrum combines four formal events for inspection and adaptation within a containing event, the Sprint. These events work because they implement the empirical Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 123: Skipped

At the end of the Sprint, all items are done except for one that is almost done. What should be done with this item?

Explanation

Everything in the Increment must be Done

Question 124: Skipped

The Sprint Review is just a demo of the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint. Do you agree?

Explanation

The Sprint Review includes the following elements:

- Attendees include the Scrum Team and key stakeholders invited by the Product Owner;

- The Product Owner explains what Product Backlog items have been “Done” and what has not been “Done”;

- The Developers discuss what went well during the Sprint, what problems it ran into, and how those problems were solved;

- The Developers demonstrate the work that it has “Done” and answers questions about the Increment;

- The Product Owner discusses the Product Backlog as it stands. He or she projects likely target and delivery dates based on progress to date (if needed);

- The entire group collaborates on what to do next, so that the Sprint Review provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning;

- Review of how the marketplace or potential use of the product might have changed what is the most valuable thing to do next; and,

- Review of the timeline, budget, potential capabilities, and marketplace for the next anticipated releases of functionality or capability of the product.

Question 125: Skipped

Agility is enhanced by:

Select an answer:

Explanation

The following 12 Principles are based on the Agile Manifesto:

1 Our highest priority is to satisfy the customer through early and continuous delivery of valuable software.

2 Welcome changing requirements, even late in development. Agile processes harness change for the customer’s competitive advantage.

3 Deliver working software frequently, from a couple of weeks to a couple of months, with a preference to the shorter timescale.

4 Business people and developers must work together daily throughout the project.

5 Build projects around motivated individuals. Give them the environment and support they need, and trust them to get the job done.

6 The most efficient and effective method of conveying information to and within a development team is face-to-face conversation.

7 Working software is the primary measure of progress.

8 Agile processes promote sustainable development. The sponsors, developers, and users should be able to maintain a constant pace indefinitely.

9 Continuous attention to technical excellence and good design enhances agility.

10 Simplicity–the art of maximizing the amount of work not done–is essential.

11 The best architectures, requirements, and designs emerge from self-organizing teams.

12 At regular intervals, the team reflects on how to become more effective, then tunes and adjusts its behavior accordingly.

Question 126: Skipped

Which of the following is NOT correct about the Product Owner role?

Explanation

Only the Developers can participate in the Daily Scrum meeting

Question 127: Skipped

What two phrases best describe the relationship of the Product Owner and the Developers?

Explanation

The Product Owner clearly expresses Product Backlog items, ensuring the Developers understand items in the Product Backlog to the level needed for developing them and creating the value the Product Owner envisions. Scope may be re-negotiated if the effort grows much higher than anticipated.

Question 128: Skipped

The Sprint Backlog is baselined at the end of the Sprint Planning.

Explanation

We don't baseline any artifact in Scrum. The Sprint Backlog is dynamic and changes during the Sprint to include newly identified tasks.

Question 129: Skipped

Which two of the following are required by Scrum?

Explanation

There's no Definition of Ready in Scrum

Question 130: Skipped

When a sprint is cancelled, the Scrum Team discards all the work and refines a new Product Backlog.

Explanation

The team still conducts Sprint Review to review "Done" Product Backlog items. If parts of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.

Question 131: Skipped

Which description best fits the role of the Product Owner?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product. How this is done will vary widely.

Question 132: Skipped

Which statement is true about the projects which has multiple teams?

Question 133: Skipped

In an Agile environment, which role BEST describes the 'Voice of the Customer'?

Select an answer:

Explanation

A product is a vehicle to deliver value. It has a clear boundary, known stakeholders, well-defined users or customers. A product could be a service, a physical product, or something more abstract.

Question 134: Skipped

How should items in the Product Backlog be ordered?

Question 135: Skipped

During Daily Scrum, this plan is used as reference to understand the changes in progress

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 136: Skipped

What would a Product Owner typically do during a Sprint? (choose all that apply)

Explanation

The Product Owner works with the Developers and internal/external stakeholders to diligently manage the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions of the Product and the business.

Question 137: Skipped

Which of the following is a 'TRUE' statement?

Select an answer:

Explanation

When the values of commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect are embodied and lived by the Scrum Team, the Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation come to life and build trust for everyone. The Scrum Team members learn and explore those values as they work with the Scrum roles, events, and artifacts.

Successful use of Scrum depends on people becoming more proficient in living these five values. People personally commit to achieving the goals of the Scrum Team.

Question 138: Skipped

Select all that apply. For a Scrum Team, the Sprint Planning meetings are always going beyond the time-boxing. What could be the likely causes?

Question 139: Skipped

The Product Owner manages the Product Backlog. Who is accountable for estimating the effort to complete the Product Backlog items?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions, thereby optimizing the value of the work the Developers perform. How this is done, and what value means, may vary widely across organizations.

Question 140: Skipped

What two attributes are optional for a Product Backlog Item?

Explanation

The Product Backlog lists all features, functions, requirements, enhancements, and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases. Product Backlog items have the attributes of a description, order, estimate, and value.

Question 141: Skipped

John is working on a software development project in an Agile environment and discusses with his team ways to improve and manage stakeholder expectations. Which of the following BEST describes his efforts in achieving this objective?

Select an answer:

Explanation

6 principles for building trusting and lasting relationships with your stakeholders:


1. Listen to others and seek first to understand before being understood.

2. Have empathy and think in win/win solutions.

3. Set a good example as project manager.

4. Be honest and open about project progress and have the courage to ask for help.

5. Be proactive and take responsibility for your actions.

6. Maintain a positive mental attitude and don’t be afraid to show your funny side.

Question 142: Skipped

Which of the following is the most important opportunity for capturing lessons learned?

Explanation

Lessons learned are always captured but the main purpose of Sprint Retrospective is capturing and planning for lessons learned.

Question 143: Skipped

The Product Owner can delegate some of his/her responsibilities to the Developers.

Explanation

The Product Owner can delegate his/her responsibilities to the Developers but he/she stays accountable.

Question 144: Skipped

There can be a maximum of one release per Sprint.

Explanation

You can have more than one release per Sprint, if needed.

When you use continuous integration and have a Definition of Done that covers everything, you can practically release the product at any time you want (think of it as a typical DevOps environment). The Increments that are created at the end of the Sprint are NOT the only potentially releasable products; they are just packaged and named like this, to be used for receiving feedback at certain intervals.

Question 145: Skipped

Which two of the following may change during the Sprint?

Explanation

- The Product Backlog is an emergent, ordered list of what is needed to improve the product. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

- The Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned.

Question 146: Skipped

When something about Scrum frustrates the Product Owner, the PO can delegate some responsibilities to the Scrum Master.

Explanation

he Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 147: Skipped

Ordering the Product Backlog items is part of the Product Backlog refinement.

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is defined in the Scrum Guide as the act of adding detail, estimates and order to the Product Backlog items. Remember that the Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing activity and is not timeboxed.

The Product Backlog is a living artifact which is continually kept up to date with the most recent insights.

Question 148: Skipped

A Scrum Team maintains a Sprint burn-down to track estimated remaining work. In the middle of the Sprint, the burn down graph shows and upward spike. This indicates

Explanation

A spike indicates added work. The Product Owner cannot add new work without the Developers consent.

Question 149: Skipped

You are in a Scrum Team that is in the middle of the Sprint. Your team gets some additional team members. The likely results is:

Explanation

The productivity will not increase bc there will be a learning curve for new members. the sprint cannot be aborted to go back to sprint planning. the sprint can only be cancelled by the p.o. upon their inference that the sprint goal is not valid anymore.

Question 150: Skipped

What pre-conditions must be fulfilled in order to allow Sprint Planning to begin?

Explanation

Sprint Planning serves to plan the work to be performed in the Sprint. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team. Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. What can be achieved in this time-box may be influenced by additional practices that are however not prescribed by Scrum.

Question 151: Skipped

The Developers cannot deliver the Increment because they don't understand a functional requirement. What should they do?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible to make all items clear and understood. If the problem wasn't solved, then there's no option other than leaving it to go back to the Product Backlog at the end of the Sprint and be done later. The team is cross-functional and doesn't use external help. We don't deliver partially complete items; everything should be done based on the definition of "Done".

Question 152: Skipped

The items in the Product Backlog are ordered by priority. Where the highest priority item is on top and gradually moves to the lowest priority on the bottom.

Explanation

As stated in the Scrum Guide, the Product Backlog is an ordered list. This means that the ordering has a logical sequence. The Product Owner orders the Product Backlog to maximize the flow of value. Priority is only one attribute to take into consideration when ordering the Product Backlog items. Others may include software dependencies, other items in the Product Backlog, availability of the team members, skillset and level of expertise, other products, urgency, size, etc. For example, if a high priority item depends on a lower priority item. Then the lower priority item would be ordered higher.

Question 153: Skipped

All Developers working on the same Product should use the same Product Backlog.

Explanation

Multiple Scrum Teams often work together on the same product. One Product Backlog is used to describe the upcoming work on the product.

Question 154: Skipped

When multiple teams are working on the same product, each team should have their own Definition of Done.

Explanation

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 155: Skipped

It's allowed to have team leaders when there are many developers working on a complex project.

Explanation

No extra roles and titles are recognized in Scrum because it blocks self-organization, collaboration and accountability.

Question 156: Skipped

A Scrum Team can identify the improvements only during the Sprint Retrospective

Explanation

Although improvements may be implemented at any time, the Sprint Retrospective provides a formal opportunity to focus on inspection and adaptation.

Question 157: Skipped

Conflicts should be avoided at all cost on Agile teams.

Explanation

Managed conflicts can be very helpful to the project. The Scrum Team must always keep a constructive mind though.

Question 158: Skipped

What are two typical activities for a Product Owner in a Sprint?

Explanation

The Product Owner represents the stakeholders to the Scrum Team. This typically requires active interaction in order to be able to represent stakeholders and their needs.

Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Development Team collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items.

Question 159: Skipped

Collaboration with the stakeholders helps in:

Select an answer:

Question 160: Skipped

Once the Product Owner gained his Product Vision and defined the tactics of bringing this vision to life, it is a bad idea to change them before the next Product Release.

Explanation

The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful.

Teste 6

Question 1: Skipped

What typically happens during an active Sprint? (choose the best three answers)

Explanation

During the Sprint: No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal; Quality goals do not decrease; Scope may be clarified and renegotiated between the Product Owner and Developers as more is learned.

The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers, it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus, encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint, they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.

Question 2: Skipped

How does the Scrum Master serve the Organization? Select the three most appropriate answers.

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:

● Leading, training, and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

● Planning and advising Scrum implementations within the organization;

● Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact an empirical approach for complex

work; and,

● Removing barriers between stakeholders and Scrum Teams.

Question 3: Skipped

What belongs solely to the Developers?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 4: Skipped

The Product Owner's primary concern is the flow of value reflected in the ordering of the Product Backlog.

Explanation

The Product Owner is also known as the value maximizer. He is responsible for maximizing the value of the work that the Developers do. This is done through the ordering of the Product Backlog.

Question 5: Skipped

Who is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Developers is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.

Question 6: Skipped

What are two valid options if the Product Owner is not accessible? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the flow of value and the value the Development Team does. Without a Product Owner, the team would not be employing Scrum. Self-managed teams are empowered to make and rely on their own decisions when and if they feel they are at risk of being impeded.

Question 7: Skipped

During the Product Backlog refinement, the Product Owner is responsible for the sizing.

Explanation

Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 8: Skipped

You are a Product Owner of a Scrum Team. In the middle of the Sprint, you find out that the Developers will not be able to finish the Sprint Backlog by the end of the Sprint. What is the most appropriate response? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

As a collaborator, the Product Owner, is responsible for engaging with and closely working together with the Developers. He/she supports them in optimizing the work it performs in order to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.

Question 9: Skipped

The Developers are always accountable for holding each other accountable as professionals.

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 10: Skipped

Who participates in the Sprint Planning? Select three.

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

Question 11: Skipped

In Scrum, Team Velocity (Rate of Completion) is a good metric to track the progress of product development.

Explanation

No. This is only an internal metric used by the team to manager their work. It is not an indicator of progress for stakeholders.

Question 12: Skipped

The Scrum Team consists of:

Explanation

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Developers, and a Scrum Master.

Question 13: Skipped

Which of the following is true about Scrum? (choose the best three options)

Explanation

Scrum is founded on empiricism and lean thinking. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is observed. Lean thinking reduces waste and focuses on the essentials.

Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and to control risk. Scrum engages groups of people who collectively have all the skills and expertise to do the work and share or acquire such skills as needed.

Scrum combines four formal events for inspection and adaptation within a containing event, the Sprint. These events work because they implement the empirical Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 14: Skipped

In the middle of the Sprint, the Developers find that they have more room for additional work. They decide to change the Sprint Backlog by adding a few more Backlog Items from the Product Backlog. Who should be present to decide the additional work and accordingly modify the Sprint Backlog?

Explanation

Only the Developers can make changes to the Sprint Backlog and it is the P.O.'s job to optimize the value of their work and they are needed to explain the content of the Product Backlog and give mutual consent on the next work.

Question 15: Skipped

An organization that is new to Scrum wants to know how the interactions should be between the Product Owner and the Stakeholders. Which statement best describes the relationship? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

There is a lot of knowledge, experience and there are many interesting perspectives from others you can learn from. So, estimate the value of Product Backlog Items together with your stakeholders and Scrum Team. Involve your customers, involve your users and don't forget your Developers. They may have very interesting viewpoints to learn from, which could lead to you delivering much more value, with much less effort.

Question 16: Skipped

Could the Product Owner and the Scrum Master also be a Developer?

Explanation

Yes, if they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog.

Question 17: Skipped

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, when must an adjustment be made?

Explanation

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.

Question 18: Skipped

What is the logic behind which parameter is chosen to order the Product Backlog?

Explanation

As a market expert, the Product Owner has a total authority on how to order the Product Backlog.

He or she can come up with an urgency (due to a market change...) that doesn't seem to increase the overall value of team's work. Still, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions.

The Product Backlog is an emergent, ordered list of what is needed to improve the product. It is the single source of work undertaken by the Scrum Team.

Product Backlog items that can be Done by the Scrum Team within one Sprint are deemed ready for selection in a Sprint Planning event. They usually acquire this degree of transparency after refining activities. Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

Question 19: Skipped

What could be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that might be needed in the product and is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.

Question 20: Skipped

In the middle of the Sprint, the customer decides that there are 2 new features she wants. The Product Owner could: (choose the best option)

Explanation

During the Sprint:

No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal;

Quality goals do not decrease; and,

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and the Developers as more is learned.

As the adding new features will endanger the sprint goal so it should be introduced

Question 21: Skipped

During the Sprint, you receive a request from an influential stakeholder to add two new features needed for the product. As a Product Owner, what actions would be appropriate? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

Part of the Product Owner's responsibility is to listen the the stakeholders for feedback and input. This process is ongoing as long as the product exists. The Product Owner is accountable optimizing the flow of value and the entire organization must respect his/her decisions. If he feels an item is highly critical and time sensitive, it's ok for him to ask the Development Team if they can add it to the active Sprint. But it's up to the Development Team to decide if they can do it and make aware the risks. The Product Owner cannot force the team to work on something they are not capable of doing. He/she also must be aware and accept risks associated with making this change.

Question 22: Skipped

Who is allowed to make changes in the Product Backlog? Select two options.

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for the Product Backlog. However, he or she can delegate some work related to product backlog management to the Developers.

Question 23: Skipped

During Sprint Planning, the Developers was not able to confidently forecast a Sprint Backlog but the Scrum Team was able to create a Sprint Goal for upcoming Sprint. What action should the Scrum Master take?

Explanation

The Scrum Master is accountable for establishing Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. They do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory and practice, both within the Scrum Team and the organization.

The Scrum Master is accountable for the Scrum Team’s effectiveness. They do this by enabling the Scrum Team to improve its practices, within the Scrum framework.

Scrum Masters are true leaders who serve the Scrum Team and the larger organization.

Question 24: Skipped

How should multiple Scrum Teams, working on the same product, manage their definition of "Done"?

Explanation

The Developers are required to conform to the Definition of Done. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working together on a product, they must mutually define and comply with the same Definition of Done.

Question 25: Skipped

What is Scrum?

Explanation

Scrum is a lightweight framework that helps people, teams and organizations generate value through adaptive solutions for complex problems.

Question 26: Skipped

A Scrum Team, that has remote Developers, typically spends time before the Daily Scrum to setup the meeting rooms and conference calling equipment and tools in order to have their Daily Scrum. How should the Scrum Master handle this situation?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

As a self-managed team, they will decide for themselves how to best manage communication between team members. The Scrum Master will only take action if requested or if he/she observes that there is a potential problem.

Question 27: Skipped

What is the input to the Sprint Planning? Select four.

Explanation

The input to the Sprint Planning is:

The Product Backlog

The latest product Increment

Projected capacity of the Developers during the Sprint

Past performance of the Developers

Question 28: Skipped

How does the Scrum Master serve the Scrum Team? Select the three most appropriate answers.

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 29: Skipped

When technical debt occurs, the system will become more unstable as development progresses and code is added resulting in future work being slowed down.

Explanation

It's important to understand how technical debt can impact transparency.

Question 30: Skipped

Who is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog? (choose the best option)

Explanation

The Developers are responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 31: Skipped

As a Scrum Master, you observe that the Product Owner is not collaborating with the Developers effectively. What actions would you take?

Explanation

Scrum Masters are true leaders who serve the Scrum Team and the larger organization.

A Scrum Master is also a facilitator who coaches those inside and outside the team on the values of Scrum and incremental delivery.

Question 32: Skipped

Stakeholders should hold their feedback until the Sprint Review occurs.

Explanation

Stakeholder feedback is taken into account at anytime. This increases the Scrum Team's opportunity to quickly adapt if needed.

Question 33: Skipped

Revenue generated is the primary measure of Product value.

Explanation

Defined measures of value will vary by organization. For example, the EBM looks at 4 Key Value Areas where all 4 areas contribute to an organization’s ability to deliver business value. Revenue is only a single measure of many that the Product Owner must take into consideration.

Question 34: Skipped

What is the result of the Sprint Review?

Explanation

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.

Question 35: Skipped

Which of the following are the characteristic of a good product backlog? (choose the best three options)

Explanation

Small is not a characteristic of the product backlog; it’s a characteristic of a good user story. The acronym DEEP to summarize several important characteristics of good product backlogs: Detailed appropriately, Emergent, Estimated, and Prioritized. DEEP criteria are useful for determining if a product backlog has been structured in a good way.

Question 36: Skipped

True or False, All work to be done by the Developers must ultimately originate from the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.

Question 37: Skipped

A Scrum Master teaches those who are interested in the Developers' progress that progress in Scrum comes from inspecting an Increment at the Sprint Review.

Explanation

Functional product is the primary measure of progress.

Question 38: Skipped

Other people than the Scrum Team can attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.

Explanation

The Product Owner ensures that attendees are prepared to discuss the most important Product Backlog items and how they map to the Product Goal. The Scrum Team may also invite other people to attend Sprint Planning to provide advice.

Question 39: Skipped

What is the Sprint Backlog?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.

Question 40: Skipped

What is the essence of Scrum? Select the most appropriate option.

Explanation

The fundamental unit of Scrum is a small team of people, a Scrum Team.

Question 41: Skipped

How does the Scrum Master help to the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 42: Skipped

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?

Explanation

The Key Stakeholders can participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time

Question 43: Skipped

What are Product Backlog features? Select three.

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an emergent, ordered list of what is needed to improve the product. It is the single source of work undertaken by the Scrum Team.

Product Backlog items that can be Done by the Scrum Team within one Sprint are deemed ready for selection in a Sprint Planning event. They usually acquire this degree of transparency after refining activities. Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 44: Skipped

Doing your best and helping other Scrum Team members demonstrates which of the following?

Explanation

People personally commit to achieving the goals of the Scrum Team by doing their best and helping others.

Successful use of Scrum depends on people becoming more proficient in living five values: Commitment, Focus, Openness, Respect, and Courage

Question 45: Skipped

Select the best answer. Scrum is a newer way of doing things to address complex problems. It is a new way because

Explanation

Scrum is a lightweight framework that helps people, teams and organizations generate value through adaptive solutions for complex problems.

Scrum is simple. Try it as is and determine if its philosophy, theory, and structure help to achieve goals and create value. The Scrum framework is purposefully incomplete, only defining the parts required to implement Scrum theory. Scrum is built upon by the collective intelligence of the people using it. Rather than provide people with detailed instructions, the rules of Scrum guide their relationships and interactions.

Scrum does not guarantee success, but it increases the likelihood of success by controlling the risk and optimizing predictability.

Question 46: Skipped

What does Burn-down Chart show?

Explanation

Burn-down chart shows the evolution of remaining effort against time.

Question 47: Skipped

Several Sprints into a project, a client is complaining to the Product Owner about the poor performance of the product. As a Scrum Master, how can you help the Product Owner?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 48: Skipped

The Scrum Master does the following regarding the Daily Scrum (select all applicable variants):

Question 49: Skipped

True or False, Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.

Explanation

False. Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams.

Question 50: Skipped

What is a good way for a Scrum Team to ensure that security concerns are addressed and transparent?

Explanation

The Product Backlog and the Definition of "Done" are artifacts that promote transparency.

Question 51: Skipped

What are the 3 pillars of Scrum (select three)?

Explanation

Scrum combines four formal events for inspection and adaptation within a containing event, the Sprint. These events work because they implement the empirical Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 52: Skipped

How can a Product Owner to validate the results of his/her assumptions made for the Product? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

Your can measure value in many different ways, but what's most important is that you actually measure and steer on value. Start validating value, by releasing to your customers and users early and often. There is no way you can 'determine' the value of a Product Backlog Item upfront. You could make an estimate, you can take a guess, but you can't 'determine' the value. Something is valuable, when you've released a Done Product Increment to customers/users, and they've told you that the stuff you've delivered is valuable, or if you can measure changes in your automated Key Value Indicators (such as DAM/DAU/Usage/etc). Learning turns into 'validated learning' when assumptions and goals can be validated through the outcomes of the releases.

Question 53: Skipped

What two things best help the Product Owner manage the value of a product? (choose the best two options)

Explanation

The Product Owner manages Product Backlog against the assumption that value will be generated. Indications of value on Product Backlog are useful but are only a prediction until validated against users and market.

Question 54: Skipped

What measure will you most likely use for calculating the velocity of the Team? (choose the best option)

Explanation

A story point is an abstract measure of effort required to implement a user story. In simple terms, it is a number that tells the team about the difficulty level of the story. At the end of each iteration, the team adds up effort estimates associated with user stories that were completed during that iteration. This total is called velocity. User stories are estimated via story points.

Question 55: Skipped

Is it allowed to skip the Daily Scrum if there is nothing interesting to talk about?

Explanation

Each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection. Failure to include any of these events results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt.

Question 56: Skipped

What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 57: Skipped

What two phrases best describe the relationship of the Product Owner and the Developers? (choose the best two options)

Explanation

The Product Owner clearly expresses Product Backlog items, ensuring the Developers understand items in the Product Backlog to the level needed for developing them and creating the value the Product Owner envisions. Scope may be re-negotiated if the effort grows much higher than anticipated.

Question 58: Skipped

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes: (choose the best two options)

Explanation

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

Question 59: Skipped

The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Developers.

Explanation

The Developers modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Developers work through the plan and learn more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Developers add it to the Sprint Backlog.

Question 60: Skipped

True or False, The Sprint Goal is a result of Sprint Planning, as is the Sprint Backlog.

Explanation

The Sprint Goal, the Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus the plan for delivering them are together referred to as the Sprint Backlog.

Question 61: Skipped

What is the order of items in the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for placing the most valuable and clear items at the top of the Product Backlog.

Question 62: Skipped

The Developers are always accountable for (select three):

Explanation

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint.

The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However, the Developers are always accountable for:

● Creating a plan for the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog;

● Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;

● Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and,

● Holding each other accountable as professionals.

Question 63: Skipped

Which of the following practices might help the Product Owner minimize waste in developing and sustaining the Product Backlog? (choose the best two options)

Explanation

Minimize waste in Product Backlog can be done by non-ambiguous and fully described stories in Product Backlog.

Question 64: Skipped

In the first few Sprints, the Developers is expected to focus on

Explanation

The Developers must try to deliver at least one piece of functionality NOT Only in the first few Sprints but in every single Sprint.

Question 65: Skipped

In what ways does the Scrum Master keep the Developers working at its highest level of productivity?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 66: Skipped

The Daily Scrum always should take exactly 15 minutes. For example, if your team managed doing it in 5 minutes, you should spend 10 more minutes on some useful team activity like Product Backlog refinement, but not more.

Explanation

All events in Scrum are time-boxed. It means that every event has a maximum duration. However, the Scrum Guide does not require a minimal duration for any event. As Scrum Teams mature, they can do some events faster (e.g. the Sprint Planning or the Sprint Retrospective).

Question 67: Skipped

Why is it important for the Product Owner to have awareness of the Definition of 'Done'? (choose the best two answers)

Explanation

When a Product Backlog item or an Increment is described as 'Done', everyone must understand what 'Done' means. Scrum Team members must have a shared understanding of what it means for work to be complete, to ensure transparency. This is the definition of 'Done' for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment. The 'done' Increment must be useable, so a Product Owner may choose to release it.

Question 68: Skipped

Which practice must be used by a Product Owner to manage the Product Backlog and share the Product Backlog progress? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering. Various projective practices upon trending have been used to forecast progress, like burn-downs, burn-ups, or cumulative flows but it's up to the Product Owner to know which practices provides the most value in his/her situation. The Scrum Master can help the PO find different techniques for effective Product Backlog management as specific practices and how this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individual.

Question 69: Skipped

It is a good practice to have at least two Product Owners on big projects.

Explanation

The Product Owner is one person, not a committee. The Product Owner may represent the needs of many stakeholders in the Product Backlog. Those wanting to change the Product Backlog can do so by trying to convince the Product Owner.

Question 70: Skipped

What is the primary advantage of calculating and utilizing the Payback Period when comparing and prioritizing user stories? (choose the best option)

Explanation

Net present value, internal rate of return, and payback period are three major factors to consider when ordering the Product Backlog on financial factors. Payback period, the time when the organization will start earning positively from the investment. Payback Period calculation is straightforward and it measures the amount and duration of financial risk taken on by the organization.

Question 71: Skipped

Scrum recommends using only those Scrum components and rules which suit most for a particular project.

Explanation

Each component within the Scrum framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.

Question 72: Skipped

Which of the following statement is not correct?

Explanation

Because the P.O. strives to maximize the collective value of the Product and the Developer's work to achieve that, they can follow any appropriate logic for ordering.

Question 73: Skipped

It is normal to have a “hardening” Sprint to remove all technical debt and prepare the Product for upcoming release.

Explanation

It is not normal. Developers deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is usable, so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. So, there is nothing to prepare. Each increment contains only “Done” functionality that could be released immediately.

Question 74: Skipped

A Product Owner is applying value estimations to Product Backlog items. Is this acceptable? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

As a Product Owner, find a Key Value Indicator (KVI) for your product, which can be measured early and often. Ensure that you deliver work that really has an impact on your KVI(s), so that you are consciously steering on value. There is no way you can 'determine' the value of a Product Backlog Item upfront. You could make an estimate, you can take a guess, but you can't 'determine' the value. Keep in mind that something is valuable, when you've released a Done Product Increment to customers/users, and they've told you that the work you've delivered is valuable.

Question 75: Skipped

All Developers working on the same Product should use the same Product Backlog.

Explanation

Multiple Scrum Teams often work together on the same product. One Product Backlog is used to describe the upcoming work on the product.

Question 76: Skipped

What are the three pillars that uphold Scrum?

Explanation

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Question 77: Skipped

What should be taken into account for the Definition of “Done”? Select the two most appropriate items.

Explanation

If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Developers of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the Developers on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”

Question 78: Skipped

The Scrum framework helps (select 2 answers):

Explanation

Scrum is a lightweight framework that helps people, teams and organizations generate value through adaptive solutions for complex problems.

Question 79: Skipped

What is the Product Owner accountable for in Scrum? (choose the best option)

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management, which includes:

● Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;

● Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;

● Ordering Product Backlog items; and,

● Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent, visible and understood.

The Product Owner may do the above work or may delegate the responsibility to others. Regardless, the Product Owner remains accountable.

Question 80: Skipped

The Daily Scrum time-box depends on number of Developers.

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Development Team of any size.

Question 81: Skipped

Imagine the following situation. At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What should the Scrum Team do? Select the best option.

Explanation

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

Question 82: Skipped

What are the limitations on the decisions of the Product Owner for the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering and is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog. For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions.

Question 83: Skipped

Where can Scrum be used? Check all the applicable items.

Explanation

Scrum has been used to develop software, hardware, embedded software, networks of interacting function, autonomous vehicles, schools, government, marketing, managing the operation of organizations and almost everything we use in our daily lives, as individuals and societies.

Scrum has been used extensively, worldwide, to:

Research and identify viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities;

Develop products and enhancements;

Release products and enhancements, as frequently as many times per day;

Develop and sustain Cloud (online, secure, on-demand) and other operational environments for product use; and,

Sustain and renew products.

Question 84: Skipped

Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less?

Question 85: Skipped

How much time is required after a Sprint to prepare for the next Sprint?

Explanation

A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

Question 86: Skipped

If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled.

Explanation

The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete.

Question 87: Skipped

Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate.

Explanation

The Developers may invite other people to attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.

The Product Owner is responsible for inviting the Key Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting.

Question 88: Skipped

Scrum is founded on

Explanation

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known.

Question 89: Skipped

What is the time-box for the Daily Scrum?

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event.

Question 90: Skipped

The Sprint Review is an event that requires

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

During the event, the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information, attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 91: Skipped

The Developers has suggested to move the Daily Scrum to every two days instead of every day. What is the most appropriate action for the Scrum Master to take?

Explanation

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 92: Skipped

After a Sprint Review, the P.O. deems the Product has come to the end of its life and the Product Backlog can be closed. The next immediate step is:

Explanation

The Stakeholders must be informed in priority of what is happening. There is no point to conduct a Retrospective if there won’t be another sprint.

Usually, the Retro is the last event of the Sprint. However, when the Product Owner decides that the development work is over, there is no need for a Sprint Retrospective. The transition documentation is defined a part of the definition of "Done" if that transition documentation is a requirement for the Increment's release.

Question 93: Skipped

True or False, During the Sprint Review it is up to the stakeholders to reorder the Product Backlog.

Explanation

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. As the Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering so stakeholders are not allowed to reorder Product Backlog.

Question 94: Skipped

The structure of the Daily Scrum is well-defined and constant. Every team member should answer the three main questions:

What did I do yesterday?

What will I do today?

Do I see any impediment?

Explanation

There is not any prescribed structure. The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. It is still perfectly fine to use the questions, but other ways of conducting the meeting are also possible.

Question 95: Skipped

What the minimum plan necessary to start a Scrum project consists of: (choose the best option)

Explanation

The minimum plan necessary to start a Scrum project consists of a Vision and a Product Backlog. The vision describes why the project is being undertaken and what the desired end state is.

The Product Goal describes a future state of the product which can serve as a target for the Scrum Team to plan against. The Product Goal is in the Product Backlog. The rest of the Product Backlog emerges to define “what” will fulfill the Product Goal.

A product is a vehicle to deliver value. It has a clear boundary, known stakeholders, well-defined users or customers. A product could be a service, a physical product, or something more abstract.

The Product Goal is the long-term objective for the Scrum Team. They must fulfill (or abandon) one objective before taking on the next.

Question 96: Skipped

Who is responsible for the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.

Question 97: Skipped

Imagine you are a Scrum Master in a small Organization that tries to adopt Scrum. There are 11 developers and the Product Owner. How can they be divided into Scrum Teams? Choose all applicable options:

Explanation

There is no separate QA team in Scrum!
Scrum Teams are cross-functional, with all the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment.

The Scrum Team is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint, typically 10 or fewer people. In general, we have found that smaller teams communicate better and are more productive. If Scrum Teams become too large, they should consider reorganizing into multiple cohesive Scrum Teams, each focused on the same product. Therefore, they should share the same Product Goal, Product Backlog, and Product Owner.

Question 98: Skipped

What happens during the Sprint? Select three answers.

Explanation

During the Sprint:

No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal;

Quality goals do not decrease; and,

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned.

Question 99: Skipped

What is the most appropriate action for the Scrum Master to take if the Product Owner is having difficulties managing the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner's primary concern is the flow of value reflected in the ordering of the Product Backlog.

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:

● Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;

● Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

● Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and,

● Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.

Question 100: Skipped

A done Increment is valuable if: (choose the best two options)

Explanation

Key Value Measures are current value (CV), Time-to-Market (T2M), Ability to Innovate (A2I) and Unrealized Value (UV). Operational cost reduction and customer satisfaction are part of current value, but rest options are not part of any key value measures.

The Definition of Done is a formal description of the state of the Increment when it meets the quality measures required for the product.

The moment a Product Backlog item meets the Definition of Done, an Increment is born.

Question 101: Skipped

In a Scrum Team, only the Product Owner communicates with the stakeholders. There is no exception to this rule.

Explanation

The Scrum Master can work with stakeholders to make them understand Scrum and the entire team collaborates with them during Sprint Reviews.

Question 102: Skipped

Who is responsible for monitoring progress toward high-level goals?

Explanation

The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.

Question 103: Skipped

What does the word “development” mean in the context of Scrum? Select the best option.

Explanation

Scrum is a lightweight framework that helps people, teams and organizations generate value through adaptive solutions for complex problems.

When the words “develop” and “development” are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.

Question 104: Skipped

At the eighth Sprint Review, the stakeholders are upset that the product being built is not what they expected and will incur additional costs that was not planned for. What may have led to this?

Explanation

Scrum requires significant aspects of the process to be visible to those responsible for the outcome. This includes transparency with internal and external stakeholders. Although, the Scrum Guide does not directly state that the Scrum Master is responsible for ensuring transparency it is implicit. The Scrum Master is responsible for the process in which Scrum is adopted and enacted. Scrum is founded on empiricism and the Scrum Master helps those inside and outside the team work in an empirical environment which includes transparency (one of the three pillars of empiricism).

Question 105: Skipped

Who creates the increment?

Explanation

Only the Developers create the Increment.

Question 106: Skipped

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?

Explanation

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.

Question 107: Skipped

What is inspected in the Sprint Retrospective and potentially adapted in the next Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.

Question 108: Skipped

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog.

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers, it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus, encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint, they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.

Question 109: Skipped

Definition of “Done” is created during the first Sprint and remains unchanged until the Product release.

Explanation

False. During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by adapting the definition of “Done” as appropriate.

Question 110: Skipped

Technical Debt can lead to false assumptions about the current state of the system and the Increment reviewed at the end of the Sprint.

Explanation

Technical debt is any shortcomings in the code. It is a natural by-product of software development (unavoidable) and can at best be managed. If neglected, it will compound and have a negative effect on the team's ability to the deliver value. A team can have an artificially high velocity by taking shortcuts or introducing technical debt into the system. This can give a false assumption about the current state of the product. It can look good on the surface but underneath can be a mess.

Question 111: Skipped

Who takes the lead in terms of getting feedback from the Key Stakeholders in the Sprint Review? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner is a vital leader in terms of getting feedback from the key stakeholders in the Sprint Review.

Question 112: Skipped

The Scrum Master should not allow the Product Owner to attend the Sprint Planning if the Product Owner is not ready with a Sprint Goal.

Explanation

The Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal during the Sprint Planning.

The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers, it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus, encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint, they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected, they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.

Question 113: Skipped

Check all the formal opportunities to inspect and adapt.

Explanation

Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection.

Question 114: Skipped

Who identifies the Key Stakeholders for the Product? (choose the best option)

Explanation

In order to maximize value, the Product Owner should identify the Key Stakeholders for the Product, and involve them as necessary throughout the development effort.

Question 115: Skipped

What is the Sprint Retrospective?

Explanation

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.

Question 116: Skipped

Who is responsible for coping with incomplete artifact transparency?

Explanation

The Scrum Master’s job is to work with the Scrum Team and the organization to increase the transparency of the artifacts. This work usually involves learning, convincing, and change.

Question 117: Skipped

Who is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum? Select the best choice.

Explanation

The Scrum Master is accountable for establishing Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. They do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory and practice, both within the Scrum Team and the organization.

The Scrum Master is accountable for the Scrum Team’s effectiveness. They do this by enabling the Scrum Team to improve its practices, within the Scrum framework.

Scrum Masters are true leaders who serve the Scrum Team and the larger organization.

Question 118: Skipped

How frequently should Scrum users inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal?

Explanation

Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work.

Question 119: Skipped

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

Explanation

The Sprint Backlog is composed of the Sprint Goal (why), the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint (what), as well as an actionable plan for delivering the Increment (how).

The Sprint Backlog is a plan by and for the Developers. It is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Developers plan to accomplish during the Sprint in order to achieve the Sprint Goal. Consequently, the Sprint Backlog is updated throughout the Sprint as more is learned. It should have enough detail that they can inspect their progress in the Daily Scrum.

Question 120: Skipped

A good guideline to differentiate Acceptance Criteria from the definition of "Done" is "the definition of "Done"" provides a checklist to take the Increment to a potentially shippable state, while the Acceptance Criteria focuses on testing the business requirements.

Explanation

The definition of "Done" is a standard to define the quality for the production release.

Acceptance Criteria are the specifications of the expected business behavior.

Question 121: Skipped

What is the Increment?

Explanation

The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints.

Question 122: Skipped

A Developer has notified the Scrum Master of a potential data security risk. What action should the Scrum Master take?

Explanation

It is best to coach the Developers to collaborate on issues regardless of severity.

The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

Question 123: Skipped

When can the Product Backlog be revised? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. There is no set period for when it can be changed. Changes are constant and immediate.

The Product Owner may delegate the responsibility of ordering Product Backlog items to others. Regardless, the Product Owner remains accountable.

Question 124: Skipped

What would be the main benefits of self-management?

Explanation

Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.

Self-managed teams allow teams to creatively solve difficult problems, be accountable for the work they do, and commit to each other and the goals of the team.

Question 125: Skipped

How can the Product Owner benefit from having time-boxed Sprints? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Owner employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk. As a Product Owner, you have to release a Product to customers/users early and often, in order to find out if you have delivered value for them. This can be done at least every Sprint.

Question 126: Skipped

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to (select three):

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to plan ways to increase quality and effectiveness.

The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals, interactions, processes, tools, and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work. Assumptions that led them astray are identified and their origins explored. The Scrum Team discusses what went well during the Sprint, what problems it encountered, and how those problems were (or were not) solved.

The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint.

The Sprint Retrospective concludes the Sprint. It is timeboxed to a maximum of three hours for a one- month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 127: Skipped

What action can the Scrum Master take to ensure communication between the Developers and Product Owner is effective?

Explanation

One of the primary responsibilities of a Scrum Master is the ability to facilitate regardless of the context or setting.

Question 128: Skipped

Who has the authority to cancel the Sprint?

Explanation

Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Developers, or the Scrum Master.

Question 129: Skipped

Why would you expect a Product Owner to care about the Developers adhering to its definition of “Done?” (choose the best two options)

Explanation

Scrum Team members must have a shared understanding of what it means for work to be complete (Definition of done), to ensure transparency. This is the definition of “Done” for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment. It also control the total cost of ownership of the product.

Question 130: Skipped

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?

Explanation

After the Developers forecast the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.

Question 131: Skipped

True or False, The value delivered by a product only be determined by revenue.

Explanation

The value of the product can’t be only determined by revenue as there are other factors like customer satisfaction, market place feedback etc.

Question 132: Skipped

Only the Product Owner and the Developers participate in the Sprint Planning. There is nothing to do for the Scrum Master.

Explanation

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.

Question 133: Skipped

What provides guidance to the Developers on why it is building the Increment?

Explanation

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Developers on why it is building the Increment.

Question 134: Skipped

What typically happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.

Explanation

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.

A Sprint could be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint.

Question 135: Skipped

It is a good practice to have from time to time a special technical Sprint that consists only of tasks removing the technical debt without implementing any new functionality.

Explanation

It is prohibited. The purpose of each Sprint is to deliver Increments of potentially releasable functionality that adhere to the Scrum Team’s current definition of “Done.”

Question 136: Skipped

What should be the frequency of Inspection in Scrum? Choose all that apply.

Explanation

Every event is an opportunity for inspection. In addition, a team can optionally inspect more frequently without having the inspections getting in the way of the work.

Question 137: Skipped

In the Sprint Review, the presentation of the product Increment to stakeholders is

Explanation

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed.

During the event, the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information, attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.

The Sprint Review is the second to last event of the Sprint and is timeboxed to a maximum of four hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 138: Skipped

The Sprint Review is just a demo of the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint. Do you agree? (choose the best option)

Explanation

No. The Sprint Review contains much more activities to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog.

For example:

- The Product Owner also explains what has not been “Done”;

- The entire group collaborates on what to do next, so that the Sprint Review provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning;

- Review of the timeline, budget, potential capabilities, and marketplace for the next anticipated releases of functionality.

Question 139: Skipped

Definition of Done can be reviewed and adapted during each Sprint Retrospective.

Explanation

During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of “Done”, if appropriate and not in conflict with product or organizational standards.

Question 140: Skipped

The Developers should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.

Explanation

By the end of the Sprint Planning, the Developers should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.

Question 141: Skipped

Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal?

Explanation

At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Developers track this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Developers can manage its progress.

Question 142: Skipped

How long should the Sprint Planning be?

Explanation

Sprint Planning is timeboxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Question 143: Skipped

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.

Explanation

Scrum’s artifacts represent work or value. They are designed to maximize transparency of key information. Thus, everyone inspecting them has the same basis for adaptation.

Each artifact contains a commitment to ensure it provides information that enhances transparency and focus against which progress can be measured:

● For the Product Backlog it is the Product Goal.

● For the Sprint Backlog it is the Sprint Goal.

● For the Increment it is the Definition of Done.

These commitments exist to reinforce empiricism and the Scrum values for the Scrum Team and their stakeholders.

Question 144: Skipped

Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum?

Explanation

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Developers. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Question 145: Skipped

Which statement of the following is a best description for sprint?  (choose the best option)

Explanation

The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, a time-box of one month or less during which a “Done”, useable, and potentially releasable product Increment is created. Sprints have consistent durations throughout a development effort. When a Sprint’s horizon is too long the definition of what is being built may change, complexity may rise, and risk may increase. Sprints enable predictability by ensuring inspection and adaptation of progress toward a Sprint Goal at least every calendar month. Sprints also limit risk to one calendar month of cost.

Question 146: Skipped

Which role would know the most about the progress toward a business objective or a release, and be able to explain clearly the alternatives?

Explanation

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.

Question 147: Skipped

If it is not an organizational standard, who is responsible for creation of the Definition of “Done”?

Explanation

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard, the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.

Question 148: Skipped

What are the time-boxes for the Sprint Review and the Sprint Retrospective?

Explanation

The Sprint Review is at most a four-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.
The Sprint Retrospective is at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.

Question 149: Skipped

Sprint Planning addresses the following topics: (choose the best three options)

Explanation

Sprint Planning addresses the following topics:

Topic One: Why is this Sprint valuable?

Topic Two: What can be Done this Sprint?

Topic Three: How will the chosen work get done?

Question 150: Skipped

How should a Scrum Master coordinate the work when more than one Scrum Team is working on one product?

Explanation

One of the benefits of self-managed teams is the ability to decide how best to work together to product a shippable Increment.

Question 151: Skipped

All the Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.

Explanation

False. Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams.

Question 152: Skipped

Developers are waiting for a specific software component that they need to integrate and use. The component should be ready in two months. The Product Backlog items with highest priorities depend on this specific component. What should the Product Owner do? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The ordering of the Product Backlog is a key mechanism for reducing and eliminating dependencies. Usually items with external dependencies are not considered “Ready” for selection unless the other team is at the Sprint Planning to provide their support. Developers should deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint.

Question 153: Skipped

Scrum has a role called "Project Manager."

Explanation

The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers. Within a Scrum Team, there are no sub-teams or hierarchies. It is a cohesive unit of professionals focused on one objective at a time, the Product Goal.

Question 154: Skipped

Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog?

Explanation

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

Question 155: Skipped

Which of the following statements are true about the Scrum Master?

Explanation

The Scrum Master is responsible not only for coaching the Scrum Team but also the organization.


The Scrum Master serves the Scrum Team in several ways, including:

● Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;

● Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;

● Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and,

● Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive, productive, and kept within the timebox.

The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:

● Leading, training, and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

● Planning and advising Scrum implementations within the organization;

● Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact an empirical approach for complex work; and,

● Removing barriers between stakeholders and Scrum Teams.

Question 156: Skipped

Who participates in the Sprint Review? Select all applicable variants.

Explanation

During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value.

Question 157: Skipped

What best describes the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explanation

The Product Backlog is an emergent, ordered list of what is needed to improve the product. It is the single source of work undertaken by the Scrum Team.

Product Backlog items that can be Done by the Scrum Team within one Sprint are deemed ready for selection in a Sprint Planning event. They usually acquire this degree of transparency after refining activities. Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

The Developers who will be doing the work are responsible for the sizing. The Product Owner may influence the Developers by helping them understand and select trade-offs.

Question 158: Skipped

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.

Explanation

DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

DoD ensures artifact transparency


The Definition of Done is a formal description of the state of the Increment when it meets the quality measures required for the product.

The moment a Product Backlog item meets the Definition of Done, an Increment is born.

The Definition of Done creates transparency by providing everyone a shared understanding of what work was completed as part of the Increment. If a Product Backlog item does not meet the Definition of Done, it cannot be released or even presented at the Sprint Review. Instead, it returns to the Product Backlog for future consideration.

Question 159: Skipped

True or False, Multiple Scrum Teams working on the same project must have the same start date.

Explanation

It's not mandatory in Scrum.org to start and end the Sprints at the same time. That makes it much more difficult to manage the whole project. It's not mandatory, because you may need it in certain cases: maybe some teams are working on parts of the project that need longer Sprints (four-week), while others need shorter ones (two-week) for shorter feedback loops.

Question 160: Skipped

Scrum does not allow additional meetings that are not defined in Scrum.

Explanation

Scrum allows additional meetings if they facilitate achieving the Sprint Goal.

Teste 7 - Curso Deki

Pergunta 1: Correto

How should the Product Owner order the Product Backlog?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Product Owner optimizes value, and one way it does that is through ordering the Product Backlog. There is no rule in place dictating how to do this. It is totally up to the Product Owner to decide how the Backlog is ordered.

Pergunta 2: Correto

Two members of the Scrum Team cannot work together due to personal differences. What should happen next?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

A self-managing team will resolve any internal conflicts. It is the decision of the team if, for example, the HR department should be involved.

The Scrum Master must let the Scrum Team self-manage first and not take decisions for them.

Pergunta 3: Correto

Scrum requires the Product Owner to write the Product Backlog Items as User Stories so the Developers can better understand the value, the use-case, and the business requirements.

True or False?

Explicação

While very common, User Stories are not mandatory in Scrum. The format in which the Product Backlog Items are described is left to the Scrum Team.

Pergunta 4: Incorreto

Which of the following are responsibilities of the Scrum Master?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The Scrum Master plans Scrum implementations within the organization. The Scrum Master will also encourage the Scrum Team to improve as part of the Sprint Retrospective.

The Scrum Master does not manage the Scrum Team or the Developers.

Pergunta 5: Incorreto

Multiple Scrum Teams work on the same Product. How should the Scrum Masters help the teams coordinate their work efforts?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Master does not direct or coordinate the Developers.

Pergunta 6: Correto

Only a fully working and tested Product Increment should be released to production. When multiple teams work on the same Product, it is mandatory to have a Release Sprint so work can be integrated and tested.

True or False?

Explicação

"Release Sprints" are common in organizations that did not fully understand or adopt Scrum. The main idea is to have a separate Sprint, usually shorter than a regular Sprint, which they call a "Feature Sprint," in which the Increment is "properly" tested.

This indicates suboptimal development practices and outdated processes.

Scrum does not recognize "Release Sprints." Any work needs to be integrated and tested within the Sprint.

Pergunta 7: Incorreto

The Product Backlog Items selected by the Developers must be done by the end of the Sprint. Which of these statements are "true" regarding the Definition of Done?

Select the best four answers.

Explicação

The Product Owner does not "verify" the Developers. The Definition of Done ensures transparency and can be used to identify work but cannot track work.

The number of Product Backlog Items selected = forecast for the Sprint.

Pergunta 8: Correto

The velocity is a mandatory measurement used to track the Scrum Team's past performance by tracking the amount of Product Backlog turned into an Increment.

True or False?

Explicação

While often used in Scrum implementation, tracking the velocity of the Scrum Team is not mandatory.

Pergunta 9: Correto

What does it mean for a Product Backlog Item to be "ready" for selection during the Sprint Planning meeting?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Product Backlog Items are refined so any one item can be completed within the Sprint time-box. Product Backlog items that can be done within one Sprint are considered "ready" for selection.

Pergunta 10: Incorreto

When can the Scrum Master cancel the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Only the Product Owner can cancel a Sprint, but the Scrum Master or others might influence this decision.

The Product Owner should spend enough time with the rest of the Scrum Team to ensure the Product Backlog is clear.

Pergunta 11: Incorreto

A very important Customer urgently needs a new feature in the Product. What could the Product Owner do?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

The Product Owner can look at the Product Backlog, at the size of the Items, and at the past velocity to determine the most likely release date based on what is known in the present.

The Product Owner can only modify the Product Backlog but not the Sprint Backlog. Only the Developers can modify the Sprint Backlog. The Product Owner can collaborate with the Developers and change the selected Product Backlog Items as long as the Sprint Goal is not impacted.

The Product Owner does not attend the Daily Scrum.

Pergunta 12: Incorreto

The Product Owner needs a few days before the next Sprint to prepare the Product Backlog. Is this possible?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

There is no gap between Sprints. As soon as one Sprint ends, the next one starts. The Sprint is the container for all the work to be done. The Product Owner continually works on the Product Backlog during the Sprint.

The same goes for the Developers. Delivering quality work should be constantly improved. Quality criteria (such as tests) should be in the Definition of Done. Any non-functional needs (such as Technical debt) should be discussed with the Product Owner and made transparent in the Product Backlog.

Pergunta 13: Ignorado

The Stakeholders are unsure what the Developers will be working on in the next Sprint. Who is responsible for the lack of transparency?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Product Backlog, managed by the Product Owner, should make transparent which features the Developers will implement next.

Pergunta 14: Ignorado

When does Sprint 0 start?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

There is no Sprint 0 or Kick-off Sprint in Scrum.

The Scrum Team will build the first Product Increment right from the first Sprint.

Pergunta 15: Ignorado

Only the Product Owner may interact with the Stakeholders outside of the Sprint Review meeting.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Guide imposes no restrictions on this matter. Other members of the Scrum Team could interact with the Stakeholders anytime needed.

Pergunta 16: Ignorado

Who must attend the Daily Scrum?

Select all that apply.

Explicação

Please note the "must" in the question.

The Daily Scrum is an event for the Developers.

Pergunta 17: Ignorado

What should the Product Owner do during the Sprint?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

The Product Owner is by no means absent during the Sprint. The main concern is the Product Backlog and making sure it is refined. The Product Owner will gather feedback from the market and discuss with the Developers the Product Backlog.

The Product Owner manages the Product Backlog, not the Sprint Backlog.

The Product Owner should focus on tracking the value generated by the Product and finding ways to improve that. The cost with the Developers is often fixed and predictable.

Pergunta 18: Ignorado

Five Scrum Teams work on the same Product. Which is the main concern in this scenario?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

This situation is not explained at all in the Scrum Guide.

Only the Nexus Guide gives some details regarding this and explains that dependencies should be monitored and minimized.

While other answers are correct, they are not the primary concern.

Pergunta 19: Ignorado

Which of the following are management roles in Scrum?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The Product Owner is managing the Product Backlog and the value that the Developers generate. The Scrum Master manages the Scrum implementation in the organization. The Developers manage the Sprint Backlog and the work needed to create a new Product Increment with each new Sprint.

Pergunta 20: Ignorado

The Scrum Master is a servant leader who takes the lead in planning and inspecting the Developers' work.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Master coaches the Developers in self-management. The Developers decide how to plan and execute their work.

Pergunta 21: Ignorado

Who measures progress toward the Product Goal?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Product Owner tracks the progress toward the Product Goal. This information must be made transparent to the Stakeholders.

The following is from the section "Monitoring Progress Toward Goals" in the Scrum Guide v2017:

“At any point, the total work remaining to reach a goal can be summed. The Product Owner tracks this total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.”

Pergunta 22: Ignorado

Before Product Backlog Items can be deemed ready for selection in a Sprint Planning event, the Product Owner must add unambiguous acceptance criteria to them.

True or False?

Explicação

Product Backlog Items may have the attributes of a description, acceptance criteria, order, estimate, and value. However, the Scrum Guide does not make any of them mandatory.

Pergunta 23: Ignorado

Scrum is based on empiricism. The Scrum artifacts need to be transparent. Otherwise, decisions can be flawed, and risk can increase. How can the Product Backlog ensure transparency?

Select the two best answers.

Explicação

Product Backlog Items should be small enough to fit in one Sprint. The Product Backlog is continuously changing and should capture any changes in the market.

The Product Owner can update the Product Backlog anytime. The backlog should be a real-time image of the work the Developers will do next.

Pergunta 24: Ignorado

The only way to verify if a Product is delivering value is to look at the revenue generated.

True or False?

Explicação

Revenue can be a way to verify if a Product is generating value. But because of the radical use of the word "only," the entire meaning changes.

Value can take different shapes and depends on the Product. Each Product can have its own criteria of what is a value delivery.

Pergunta 25: Ignorado

How should the Developers make non-functional specifications transparent towards the Product Owner?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

There is no specific rule in the Scrum Guide prohibiting the Developers from creating Product Backlog Items. While the Product Owner is responsible for managing the Product Backlog, they often need input from other parties, like the Developers.

Another way to deal with non-functional aspects is to include them in the Definition of Done, so everybody (including the Product Owner) knows what complete work means.

Creating a separate Backlog is not acceptable as this impacts transparency. There is only one Product Backlog.

If the team uses automated tests, it is typical to include them in the Definition of Done. Testing is part of the Increment and should not be postponed for the next Sprint.

Pergunta 26: Ignorado

The Scrum Master is overwhelmed by an extensive list of unresolved impediments. Which approach can help the Scrum Master manage this situation?

Select answers that apply.

Explicação

The Scrum Master removes impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress. Discussing the impediments with them and ordering the impediments is the best approach to get things back on track.

The Scrum Team knows more about how the impediments affect their work and could give the Scrum Master valuable insights.

Pergunta 27: Ignorado

How should a Scrum Team handle non-functional specifications?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Non-functional specifications are still part of the Product and should be part of every Increment. Typical non-functional specifications or requirements can refer to performance, reliability, security, usability, or regulatory compliance.

In Scrum, there are no Lead Developers. No work happens outside of a Sprint as there are no gaps between Sprints or dedicated Sprints for handling no-functional aspects of the Product.

If multiple Teams work on the same Product, Scrum encourages that each team works through all the technical layers of the Product.

Pergunta 28: Ignorado

Toward the end of the Sprint Planning event, the Developers notice that the work in the Sprint Backlog is more than initially estimated. How should the Scrum Team go forward?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

If the Developers notice they have too much work, they may renegotiate the selected Product Backlog Items with the Product Owner.

The Developers may also inform the Product Owner about the situation and continue with the Sprint without further changes. They may also renegotiate the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint as they learn more.

This situation is not an Impediment and also not a reason for canceling the Sprint.

While adding new members to the Scrum Team can happen as needed, this is not the best answer.

Pergunta 29: Ignorado

Which of the following does the Scrum Guide state as mandatory?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The only correct answer is Daily Scrum, but the Developers do not need to stand. However, this is a common practice to raise awareness about the short time-box.

Using a burn-down chart is not required but often a beneficial instrument.

Scrum is never about advanced planning, so Scrum cannot mandate a detailed architecture.

Having a Product Goal is explicit in the Scrum Guide, a Product Vision not.

Pergunta 30: Ignorado

Complete the following sentence:

The Sprint ends when _____

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Sprint ends when the time-box allocated for the Sprint expires, regardless of the completeness or incompleteness of the Sprint Backlog or the desires of the Product Owner or Stakeholders.

Pergunta 31: Ignorado

After the Sprint Review, the Product Owner has added some new work to the top of the Product Backlog. During the first part of the Sprint Planning meeting, the Product Owner has explained how the Product can increase its value and the Product Backlog Items that would help meet that objective. The Developers have issues understanding some of the new Product Backlog Items and could not forecast the upcoming Sprint.

What should the Scrum Team do?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The core issue is that the new Product Backlog Items at the top of the Product Backlog are not clear.  Scrum Teams always hold a Sprint Retrospective to find ways to get better.

Any solution must remain within the Scrum rules.

While not perfect, the Scrum Team needs to continue the meeting and try to make the forecast with what is known. The Developers and the Product Owner can collaborate throughout the Sprint to clarify details and focus on reaching the Sprint Goal.

This scenario cannot lead to canceling the Sprint. The Sprint Planning meeting is never suspended or held twice. It is also not allowed to go over the time-box.

Pergunta 32: Ignorado

The Product Owner makes sure that each Product Increment is released to production at least once by the end of each Sprint.

True or False?

Explicação

While each Sprint should create a Product Increment, it is up to the Product Owner if the Increment will be released.

Even if the Increment is not released, it is still a valuable artifact and part of the process. Feedback will always be gathered (for example, from the Stakeholders) and integrated into the upcoming Increments.

Pergunta 33: Ignorado

Transparency is one of the three pillars of Scrum. How transparent should the process be?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The entire process doesn't have to be transparent, as its full content may not be relevant for everyone. The Scrum Guide v2017 explains in the Scrum Theory that only "significant aspects" of the process must be visible to those responsible for the outcome.

Pergunta 34: Ignorado

The Product Owner must write precise and exact requirements in the Product Backlog Items before giving them over to the Developers.

True or False?

Explicação

This question offers little context. The Product Owner will collaborate with the Developers to refine the items. There is no "hand-off" between the Product Owner and the Developers. The Product Backlog Items are not a contract or a requirements document.

Pergunta 35: Ignorado

The Developers have advised the Product Owner to reorder items in the Product Backlog because of an external technical dependency not delivered yet. The Product Owner is unsure how to proceed and has asked the Scrum Master for guidance. What should the Scrum Master do?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

While this situation could influence the Product Owner on how the Product Backlog is ordered, their primary focus is still maximizing the value of the Product.

Pergunta 36: Ignorado

A development organization has multiple Scrum Teams working on the same Product. Which of the following are not roles in a Scrum Team?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

This question is tricky. First, you need to identify the "not" in the question.

Second, you must know which the Scrum roles/accountabilities are: Scrum Master, Product Owner, and Developers.

Last, it does not play a role in how many Scrum Teams are working on a Product.

Pergunta 37: Ignorado

Who should update the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Make sure you never confuse the Sprint Backlog with the Product Backlog!

Only the Developers will update the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint.

Pergunta 38: Ignorado

What is the best measurement of success for an organization which adopted Scrum for creating Products?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

A successful Scrum adoption can be measured by looking at the Current Value (CV). One of the metrics is customer satisfaction, which is an indicator of business value. Remember, Scrum is all about optimizing the value that the Product generates. It is important to have happy customers and users and to understand their needs.

Pergunta 39: Ignorado

During the last Product Backlog Refinement activity, the Developers have informed the Product Owner that one of the Product Backlog Items has a software dependency. This information could influence how the Product Owner orders the Product Backlog.

True or False?

Explicação

Trick question. Notice the “could” in the question. Ordering the Product Backlog Items is the Product Owner's decision, and such dependencies could be a factor.

Pergunta 40: Ignorado

How should Product Backlog Items be selected when multiple Scrum Teams work on the same Product?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Team will always select the Product Backlog Items after discussing what makes sense with the Product Owner.

Work is never assigned.

For one Product, there is always a single Product Owner and a single Product Backlog.

Pergunta 41: Ignorado

What should the Product Owner consider when ordering the Product Backlog?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The Product Owner will order the Items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions. The Scrum Guide is not explicit, which criteria the Product Owner should follow as this depends on the Product and context.

The following may influence the decision of the Product Owner:

- The value of the Product Backlog Items

- Risk

- Dependencies between the Product Backlog Items

- Dependencies to other products

The above-mentioned criteria are used to order to Product Backlog, so the ProductProduct's value resulting from the work the Developers perform is optimized.

Pergunta 42: Ignorado

If a Product Backlog Item does not meet the Definition of Done by the end of the Sprint, it will be completed in the next Sprint.

True or False?

Explicação

If a Product Backlog Item is not completed during the Sprint, it will not automatically end up in the next Sprint. Incomplete work does not meet the Definition of Done and is not part of the Increment.

The Product Owner, Stakeholders, and the rest of the Scrum Team collaborate in the Sprint Review meeting and discuss what to do next.

Ultimately, the Product Owner will decide what should happen with incomplete Backlog Items.

Pergunta 43: Ignorado

Which Scrum Values are manifested by the Product Owner by NOT building low-value Product Backlog Items requested by a Stakeholder?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

The Product Owner shows courage for saying no to less important Stakeholders and focusing on items that produce the maximum amount of value.

Selecting the correct answers can be deducted by knowing the Scrum Values: commitment, courage, focus, openness, and respect.

Pergunta 44: Ignorado

During the Sprint, the Developers realize that they cannot complete the work in the Sprint Backlog by the end of the Sprint. What is a valid solution?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Developers can change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint. Any changes made should not endanger the Sprint Goal. During the Sprint, quality goals do not decrease.

Pergunta 45: Ignorado

After the Sprint has ended, how much time should the Product Owner allocate for preparing the next Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

There are no gaps between Sprints or other activities. The Product Owner will constantly keep the Product Backlog updated throughout the Sprint.

Pergunta 46: Ignorado

How can the Product Owner ensure that the Product Backlog is transparent toward the Stakeholders?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

The Product Backlog needs to be ordered, visible, transparent, and clear to all.

The Scrum Guide does not mention the MoSCoW method.

While the Product Backlog is often managed using various software tools, this is not imposed, so it cannot be the best answer.

Pergunta 47: Ignorado

Two Scrum Teams work on the same Product. Team 1 is averaging a velocity of 50 per Sprint, while Team 2 is averaging a velocity of 40. Which of the two teams is delivering more value in a Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

As the Scrum Glossary explains, velocity indicates the amount of Product Backlog turned into an Increment of Product during a Sprint by a Scrum Team. There is no correlation between the number of Backlog Items completed and the value generated. There is no rule saying that more output generates more value.

The Product Owner needs to measure the value generated once the Product Increment is on the market, but this is not known in advance and still needs to be measured.

Pergunta 48: Ignorado

Which size should the Scrum Team have if the Scrum Master is also doing development work?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Even if the Scrum Master is executing the work of the Sprint Backlog, the recommendation remains 10 people or less.

Pergunta 49: Ignorado

How much work should the Developers invest in completing a Product Backlog Item selected for the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Developers will do all the work required to complete the work as described in the Definition of Done. Testing is not optional.

Pergunta 50: Ignorado

The Product Owner decides how to order the Product Backlog to achieve goals and missions. Which of the following is not a valid reason when ordering the Product Backlog?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

While dependencies on other items or external components can be a factor, which tools the Developers use should not play a role in the Product Backlog order.

Pergunta 51: Ignorado

Three Scrum Teams work on the same Product, but each works on a separate layer (front-end, back-end, external interfaces/databases). The Scrum Masters want to help the teams move away from the component teams model to the feature team model. Which of the following are true?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

Having cross-component teams is preferred as the communication overhead is reduced, and the focus is on customer-centric features that produce value. The Scrum Guide does not mention "feature teams," so they cannot be mandatory.

If such a change is done, there will be a reduction in productivity, as now the teams are expected to work through all the layers, and they need to improve their know-how.

Because of the reduction in productivity, fewer features will be created, and the Stakeholders (and others affected) should be aware of the implications.

Calculating the team velocity is of no concern. Comparing teams based on their velocity is not encouraged in Scrum.

Pergunta 52: Ignorado

Which of the following is the responsibility of the Scrum Master?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The Scrum Master does not need to manage or resolve conflicts within the Scrum Team, as the team is self-managing.

The Product Owner does not attend the Daily Scrum, and the Product Owner invites the Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting.

Pergunta 53: Ignorado

A Scrum Team measures their velocity, but the Stakeholders cannot see the data. Is this acceptable in Scrum?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

According to the Scrum Glossary, the velocity is a metric used internally by the Scrum Team.

The velocity is not an artifact.

Pergunta 54: Ignorado

Feedback gathered during the Sprint Review event will not impact the next Sprint.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Team and Stakeholders collaborate on what to do next. The Sprint Review meeting provides valuable input to the following Sprint Planning.

Pergunta 55: Ignorado

Scrum mandates there should be only a Product Owner per Product, even if multiple teams are working on the same Product. What are the most important reasons behind this decision?

Select the best four answers.

Explicação

It all related to accountability and effective work. Having multiple persons with the same responsibility makes it hard to know who is doing what and who should make the final decision if there are different opinions.

Pergunta 56: Ignorado

The results of a Product Owner can be evaluated by measuring the Scrum Team's velocity.

True or False?

Explicação

An increase in the Scrum Team’s velocity only indicates that the team became more mature and can do more in a Sprint.

There is no direct implication that the value that the Product offers has also increased. More output does not always equal more value.

Pergunta 57: Ignorado

On which aspects should the Product Owner concentrate?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

While the Product Owner should be available for the Developers to answer questions regarding the Product Backlog Items, the main focus is making sure the Product generates value and managing the Product Backlog. The Product Owner does not need to be all the time with the Developers.

The Product Owner should communicate with the Stakeholders and Customers to announce the most likely release dates, gather feedback, and put it back in the Product Backlog.

Scrum does not mandate the use of User Stories. Answers containing optional practices are rarely the "best answer."

Delegating work should also not be in focus.

Pergunta 58: Ignorado

Some Scrum Teams can have a Project Manager role.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Guide defines only three roles within the Scrum Team, and "Project Manager" is not one of them.

The Scrum Teams cannot add new roles within Scrum.

Pergunta 59: Ignorado

How often should the Project Plan be updated with new information?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Scrum mentions no Project Plan, so it cannot forbid it. The best answer is the one involving the Product Backlog as a single source of requirements.

Pergunta 60: Ignorado

One desired outcome of using Scrum is lowering the risk while creating a Product.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and to control risk.”

Pergunta 61: Ignorado

The Sprint Review is the only opportunity for the Stakeholders to reorder the Product Backlog.

True or False?

Explicação

Only the Product Owner can order the Product Backlog, but the Stakeholders might influence them.

The Stakeholders alone will never reorder the Product Backlog.

Pergunta 62: Ignorado

The Developers have decided that some Product Backlog Items do not need to adhere to the Definition of Done. Why should this situation concern the Product Owner?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

If the Definition of Done is not respected, there is no transparency regarding the work performed.

Not following the quality standards defined in the Definition of Done is only a short gain but may increase the total cost of ownership (TCO).

Pergunta 63: Ignorado

Tracking velocity is mandatory in Scrum.

True or False?

Explicação

While it is a common practice in Scrum, tracking the velocity of the Scrum Team remains optional.

Pergunta 64: Ignorado

The CEO of the company comes with a very urgent feature and asks the Developers to implement it. How should the Developers respond?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Nobody, not even the CEO, can ask the Developers to switch their focus from the Sprint Goal and the Sprint Backlog and work on different requirements.

Due to the short iterations, such situations should rarely occur. While the Developers could create a Product Backlog Item and discuss it with the Product Owner, the best answer is to have the CEO collaborate with the Product Owner.

Pergunta 65: Ignorado

As the Scrum Team matures, which of the following are good examples of self-management?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

This is a hard question. The first approach is to eliminate the answers clearly against the Scrum Guide: roles and meetings cannot be removed or the frequency reduced. The Daily Scrum is only for the Developers.

No one can tell the Developers how to turn the Product Backlog into Product Increments. Telling or explaining how to do something is not the same as giving advice.

The Developers do not have titles or defined roles.

The only partially correct answer is the one regarding the skills to build the Increment. This is closely related to cross-functionality rather than self-management.

Pergunta 66: Ignorado

Which of the following are the three pillars of Scrum?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

Scrum is based on empiricism and is founded on the three pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation.

Pergunta 67: Ignorado

The Product Owner is not experienced with Scrum and is unsure what to do with requirements like performance, documentation, or bug fixes. Do they belong to the Product Backlog as well?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Guide explains that the Product Backlog is the single source of requirements for any changes to the Product.

The Product Owner handles the Product Backlog, not the Definition of Done. Both functional and non-functional go into the Product Backlog.

Non-functional requirements that apply to the entire Increment are typically added to the Definition of Done. Most of the time, they are first added to the Product Backlog, addressed in a Sprint, and added to the Definition of Done to ensure that any future Increments will also have the same standard of quality.

Pergunta 68: Ignorado

Who needs to ensure that the Developers are focused and work on the Product Increment?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The Developers self-manage and ensure that everyone works on reaching the Sprint Goal and creating the Product Increment.

Nobody needs to verify or manage the Developers.

Pergunta 69: Ignorado

Who creates the most valuable Product possible?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

Don't get confused by this trick question!

Whenever we talk about maximizing value or accountability regarding the Product, we're talking about the Product Owner. Remember that it's the Product Owner's job to ensure that the Scrum Team develops what is most valuable.

Pergunta 70: Ignorado

The Product Owner wants to respond to new market trends in a more timely way. Which of these measures will not help them understand how to improve the time-to-market of the Product?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Product Owner is the value optimizer in the organization. The only metric that will not improve the time to market is the total revenue per employee, as it is not directly related. All other factors play a role, and the Product Owner needs to know them.

Pergunta 71: Ignorado

The Product Backlog is only visible to the Product Owner and key Stakeholders.

True or False?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a Scrum artifact visible to everyone involved, not only to the Product Owner or the Stakeholders.

Pergunta 72: Ignorado

How does Scrum encourage the Scrum Team in self-management?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

Documentation is not prohibited. Following the Agile principles, working products are preferred over comprehensive documentation, but that does not mean there should be no documentation.

The Product Owner will not tell the Developers how to build the Increment. This will not promote self-management.

The CEO and Stakeholders may interact with the Developers. The Scrum Master will coach them in which interactions are useful and which aren't.

Being a lightweight framework, Scrum ensures it is not too prescriptive and that there is enough room for the Scrum Team to decide the best way to organize their work, which tools or additional practices to use.

Pergunta 73: Ignorado

During typical Sprint, a Scrum Team must use the following Scrum artifacts:

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

From the presented list, only the Sprint Backlog and the Product Backlog are Scrum artifacts.

The Increment is also an artifact, but that one is not present among the available options.

Pergunta 74: Ignorado

Who estimates Product Backlog Items?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Developers will make the final estimate, but the process is a collaboration between them and the Product Owner.

Pergunta 75: Ignorado

When multiple Scrum Teams are working on the same Product, which approach is preferred?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Scrum Teams are cross-functional and should have all the expertise needed to build the Product. Scrum prefers teams that can work through all the layers or components of the Product to build a feature. This approach reduces the dependency on other teams.

Pergunta 76: Ignorado

Which result of the Sprint Planning meeting gives the Developers a meaningful direction during the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Spring Goal is the only output from the Sprint Planning meeting that guides the Developers while building the Increment.

Pergunta 77: Ignorado

When does Product Backlog Refinement take place?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Product Backlog Refinement is not a prescribed Scrum event. The Scrum Team decides if, when, and how to organize this activity.

Pergunta 78: Ignorado

The Product Owner is the sole accountable for the business results and achieving the Product Goal. Thus, the Product Owner needs to have the final saying on the contents of the Definition of Done.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Team creates the Definition of Done, and the Product Owner has no special role in this process.

Pergunta 79: Ignorado

Why should the Product Owner create a Product Goal?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

While the Sprint Goal provides guidance during the Sprint, the Product Goal guides the Scrum Team during multiple Sprints.

At the end of the Sprint, the Product Owner can track the remaining work toward reaching the Product Goal.

Pergunta 80: Ignorado

What is the scope of the Sprint Review meeting?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations.”

Teste 8 - Curso Deki

Pergunta 1: Incorreto

To keep the Daily Scrum meeting in the 15-minute time-box, everyone must be standing. This is why this event is also called the Daily Standup.

True or False?

Explicação

The Daily Scrum is sometimes called the "Daily Standup." This is not the name used in the Scrum Guide.

While it is common for the Developers to stand during this meeting, it is NOT required.

Pergunta 2: Incorreto

The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, with a duration of one month or less during which a useable and potentially releasable Product Increment is created. Which of the following best describes the length of the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Scrum is all about creating consistency and routines. Ideally, the Sprint length should remain consistent and not change too often.

Pergunta 3: Correto

How is the Scrum Master involved in the Sprint Retrospective?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Sprint Retrospective is an internal Scrum Team meeting.

The Product Owner and the Scrum Master participate as peer team members in the meeting, sharing accountability for the Scrum process.

Pergunta 4: Incorreto

When is the Sprint Backlog updated?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is created during the Sprint Planning meeting but can be updated anytime during the Sprint, including during the Daily Scrum meeting.

Pergunta 5: Incorreto

The participation of the Product Owner during the Sprint impacts the Sprint outcome.

True or False?

Explicação

The Product Owner needs to dedicate enough time to the Scrum Team. The Developers and the Product Owner need to collaborate through the Sprint.

Typically, the Product Backlog items are not clear enough, and if the Product Owner is absent, they cannot answer questions that the Developers might have.

Pergunta 6: Incorreto

Which of the following are characteristics of the Daily Scrum?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

Only the Scrum Master facilitates meetings. There is no Lead Developer in Scrum.

The Developers identity impediments during the Daily Scrum and can communicate them to the Scrum Master after the meeting. The Scrum Master does not need to be present.

While it is common to have the Daily Scrum in the morning, the Scrum Guide does not mention the time of the day when the Daily Scrum should be held.

The Daily Scrum can be discussion-based. The meeting can be conducted in different ways, as long as it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Since the Scrum Guide does not say that it must be discussion-based, this is not the best answer.

Pergunta 7: Incorreto

How can the Product Owner reduce waste while managing the Product Backlog?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

Higher ordered Product Backlog Items are usually more precise and more detailed than lower ordered ones; the lower the order, the less detail.

Adding many details to Product Backlog items at the lower part of the Product Backlog is a way to increase waste, as those items may never be implemented.

Ambiguity in the Product Backlog Items can also generate waste. Ambiguous content is unclear, which may lead to confusion. Additional discussions may be needed just to add a basic level of clarity to the items.

It is unclear how letting the Developers manage the Product Backlog can lead to less waste.

"Always write the test description using the Behavior-Driven Development (BDD) approach or in a programming language as unit tests." - Notice the "always," which invalidates this option. Complementary practices are rarely the best answer.

“Limit the number of items in the Product Backlog.” - This won't reduce waste. The Product Backlog is not limited and contains everything that is needed in the Product.

Pergunta 8: Ignorado

The CEO of the company wants a small but critical new feature in the next release. Who has the authority to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Only the Developers can modify the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint.

Pergunta 9: Ignorado

Which of the following are characteristics of a Product Backlog Item deemed "ready"?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

A Product Backlog Item that can reasonably be completed within the Sprint time-box is deemed "ready" for selection in a Sprint Planning meeting by the Scrum Team.

Typically, higher-ordered Product Backlog items are clearer and more detailed than lower ordered ones. They tend to be smaller in size, and the estimation is more accurate.

Pergunta 10: Ignorado

A senior Project Manager unhappy that a particular feature has not been released yet and demands immediate action. How should the Scrum Master react?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

It is the duty of the Scrum Master to help people external to the Scrum Team understand and enact Scrum and empirical product development.

Scrum does not mention any reporting duties.

Only work that is related to the Product should be placed in the Product Backlog.

Pergunta 11: Ignorado

Why is having a Sprint Goal a requirement in Scrum?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Every Sprint must have a Sprint Goal. The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint.

It guides the Scrum Team on WHY they are building the Increment. The Sprint Goal causes the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives.

Pergunta 12: Ignorado

The Product Owner and the Developers have decided to skip the weekly Product Backlog refinement activity. How should the Scrum Master react?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is not a mandatory Scrum event. The Scrum Team decides when to have this activity.

Pergunta 13: Ignorado

Which of the following are characteristics of the Definition of Done?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

The Definition is not created by the Product Owner but by the entire Scrum Team.

A done Increment must include all the testing required and should be ready for release.

Do not confuse the concept of "done" with "ready."

Pergunta 14: Ignorado

When should the Scrum Team have a Sprint Retrospective?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

A Sprint Retrospective is held at the end of each Sprint, without exception.

Pergunta 15: Ignorado

Which of the following activities may the Product Owner do during the Sprint?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

Let's take a look at the wrong answers:

"Update the burn-down chart after each Daily Scrum."  This is not something mentioned in the Scrum Guide. Software tools do this automatically, based on the available data.

"Order the Sprint Backlog." Don't confuse the Sprint Backlog with the Product Backlog. There is nothing that needs ordering in the Sprint Backlog. It is already ordered, and the Product Owner cannot modify the Sprint Backlog. The Developers manage the Sprint Backlog.

"Conduct the Daily Scrum." The Daily Scrum is an internal event for the Developers and managed by them. The Product Owner does not attend.

“Ensure the Scrum board is transparent to everyone.” - using a Scrum board is a complementary practice in Scrum and not mandatory.

Now let's take a look at the correct answers:

"Clarify any Items in the Sprint Backlog." This falls under the collaboration with the Developers during the Sprint to answer any questions regarding the Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint.

“Collaborate with the Stakeholders." The Product Owner will work with the stakeholders to learn more about what is needed in the Product and update the Product Backlog with new information.

Pergunta 16: Ignorado

The marketing department at Mobi5G wishes to adopt Scrum for one of their marketing campaigns. They ask a Scrum Master within the organization for guidance. Which advice should the Scrum Master give?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Scrum can also be used for less tangible products. The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “A product is a vehicle to deliver value. It has a clear boundary, known stakeholders, well-defined users or customers. A product could be a service, a physical product, or something more abstract.”

User stories are not mandatory in Scrum and it is possible to use Scrum for just a single Sprint to validate an assumption.

Pergunta 17: Ignorado

The Product Owner should order the Product Backlog in a way that the most valuable Product Backlog Items are done first.

True or False?

Explicação

The Product Owner won't only consider the value of the items themselves but also other factors (risk, dependencies, complexity, etc.). The focus should be on identifying the most important items and understanding how they map to the Product Goal. The Scrum Team will define a valuable Scrum Goal and identify the items that help reach that goal.

Pergunta 18: Ignorado

A company wants to develop a new and complex Product, and the Developers have formed five teams. Which of the following are serving the Scrum rules?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

Let's revisit the Scrum rules:

1 Product = 1 Product Backlog= 1 Product Owner

So there will never be a case when multiple Product Owners work on the same Product.

Pergunta 19: Ignorado

The Product Owner is accountable for the success of the Product.

True or False?

Pergunta 20: Ignorado

When more than three Scrum Teams work on the same Product, the organization may hire a Chief Product Owner.

True or False?

Explicação

Let's go back to the basics: 1 Product = 1 Backlog = 1 Product Owner.

Multiple Scrum Teams working on the same Product will have a SINGLE Product Owner. There cannot be multiple Product Owners for the same Product. There is no such role as Chief Product Owner in Scrum. Whenever you see such an option, it cannot be correct.

A Chief Product Owner is a Scrum anti-pattern that, unfortunately, many organizations choose to deploy.

Pergunta 21: Ignorado

The Scrum Master could cancel the Sprint Planning meeting if the Product Owner did not ensure the Product Backlog Items are clear and understood by the Developers.

True or False?

Explicação

Scrum events cannot be canceled, postponed, or go beyond the time-box.  Even if the Product Backlog Items are not clear enough, the Scrum Team should try to define a Sprint Goal, and the Developers should still try to make a forecast.

Pergunta 22: Ignorado

Which of the following should be a concern for the Product Owner?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

The focus of the Product Owner is how the Product is being used. See the EBM Guide for KVMs examples when measuring the Current Value (CV) and Unrealized Value (UV).

Technical aspects are less relevant or irrelevant to the Product Owner.

Pergunta 23: Ignorado

Complete the following sentence:

A self-managing Scrum Team can _____

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.”

The length of the Sprint should remain constant and not change with every Sprint.

Choosing when to release the Product to end-users and inviting Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting is the responsibility of the Product Owner.

Pergunta 24: Ignorado

Which of the following are characteristics of the Sprint Backlog?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is managed by the Developers and consists of a set of Product Backlog Items selected for the Sprint, a plan for delivering the Product Increment, and the Sprint Goal.

A single Developer will never own a Product Backlog Item. The responsibility belongs to all Developers.

There is no requirement to estimate tasks in hours. The Developers will break down any work, often to units of one day or less, but they don't need to estimate each task.

The Sprint Backlog is not complete. As new work emerges, the Developers will modify the Sprint Backlog as needed.

Pergunta 25: Ignorado

The Product Owner is known as a value maximizer. Which of the following aspects should concern the Product Owner?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

All the aspects mentioned should be relevant to the Product Owner.

Pergunta 26: Ignorado

The Scrum Team has identified several process improvements during the Sprint Retrospective. What should happen next?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The best answer is related to what is already clearly explained in the Scrum Guide v2020:

"The Scrum Team identifies the most helpful changes to improve its effectiveness. The most impactful improvements are addressed as soon as possible. They may even be added to the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint."

As the Scrum Team has identified the improvements, they as a group decide which has the highest priority.

Please note that the Scrum Guide v2020 does not require the Scrum Team to add any improvements to the Sprint Backlog. However, without implementing change, the Sprint Retrospective is less effective.

Pergunta 27: Ignorado

In Scrum, the traditional Project Manager role was replaced with the Scrum Master.

True or False?

Explicação

A Project Manager is not the same as a Scrum Master.

Pergunta 28: Ignorado

The Product Owner should attend all Scrum Team events (apart from the Daily Scrum).

True or False?

Pergunta 29: Ignorado

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the Product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. The velocity of the Scrum Team is often used to measure the success of the Product Owner.

True or False?

Explicação

The Product Owner should focus on maximizing the value that the Product offers. The velocity of the Scrum Team is not directly related to value.

Pergunta 30: Ignorado

During the Sprint Planning meeting, the Product Owner discusses how to improve the Product's value and the Product Backlog Items, contributing to achieving the objective if completed in the Sprint. In which state should these Product Backlog Items be?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

As there is no reference to user stories in the Scrum Guide, any answer with user stories cannot be the best answer.

Pergunta 31: Ignorado

The Product Owner must release the Product Increment at the end of each Sprint.

True or False?

Explicação

Notice the word "must" in the question. The Product Owner "can" release the Increment at the end of each Sprint or anytime during the Sprint if an Increment is available.

The Product Owner releases the Increment in consultation with the Scrum Team, never alone.

Pergunta 32: Ignorado

The only time the Product Owner can inspect the Sprint progress and talk to the Developers is during the Daily Scrum meeting.

True or False?

Explicação

The Product Owner does not attend the Daily Scrum.

The Scrum Team collaborates anytime during the Sprint, and they don't need a specific Scrum event to do so.

Pergunta 33: Ignorado

User stories explain why a feature is valuable and the Scrum Master should make sure the Product Owner knows how to use them correctly.

True or False?

Explicação

User stories are not mandatory in Scrum. The Scrum Guide does not make any references to user stories. Answers containing references to additional practices are rarely the best answers.

Pergunta 34: Ignorado

The first Sprint can begin as soon as the Product Owner has set a Product Goal, has a few ideas for the Product, the Developers ready to implement them, and the Scrum Team has a Scrum Master who can help everyone understand Scrum.

True or False?

Explicação

There are no Scrum rules that are broken in the way the question is asked. Scrum does not set a high bar in terms of starting the first Sprint.

The ideas and the Product Goal will represent the initial Product Backlog. Another requirement is to have a Scrum Team with a Product Owner, a Scrum Master, and Developers.

While not mentioned, the Scrum Team should also define a Definition of Done, but this can even happen in the Sprint Planning meeting. So there is no reason not to start the first Sprint.

Pergunta 35: Ignorado

During Sprint Planning, the Developers tell the Product Owner that they cannot understand how a specific functionality should look like. What should happen next?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Sprint Planning meeting needs to proceed with what is know at the point. The Scrum Team can clarify details during the Sprint.

Pergunta 36: Ignorado

The Daily Scrum is held every day of the Sprint and optimizes team collaboration by inspecting the work. Who leads the inspection during this event?

Explicação

As this is an internal event for the Developers, only they can inspect the work and decide what needs to be done next by adapting the Sprint Backlog.

Pergunta 37: Ignorado

The Scrum Team with four Developers has an average velocity of 40 points. A new Developer has joined the team. The Product Owner expects the velocity in the upcoming Sprint to increase to 50 points. Is this realistic?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

If a new Developer joins or leaves the Scrum Team, this typically harms the productivity of the Scrum Team.

When a Developer starts working on the same Product, it is typically expected that that team will need to explain the current architecture, development approach, known issues, limitations, etc. It is improbable that the new Developer will jump in and start building new features without understanding what has happened so far. For this reason, their short-term velocity may even be lower than their previous velocity.

Pergunta 38: Ignorado

What stops the Developers from talking with the Stakeholders directly?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Nothing prevents the Developers from collaborating with the Stakeholders. The entire Scrum Team is responsible for Stakeholder collaboration.

Pergunta 39: Ignorado

Considering that the Daily Scrum is a very short meeting, who should ensure that every Developer has the chance to participate with ideas?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Every change to the Scrum Team will cause a temporary reduction in productivity. Changes occur when it makes sense or is needed.

Pergunta 40: Ignorado

A Scrum Team must have a Scrum Master and a Product Owner. True or False?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 is very clear on this aspect: "The Scrum Team consists of one Scrum Master, one Product Owner, and Developers."

There is no mention that the Scrum Master and Product Owner should be 100% dedicated to the Scrum Team.

When multiple teams work on the same Product, the Product Owner will be part of multiple Scrum Teams. Nevertheless, the Product Owner and the Scrum Master need to dedicate sufficient time to the Scrum Team.

Pergunta 41: Ignorado

The Scrum Master needs to attend the Daily Scrum to ensure the Developers have the meeting and keep it within the 15-minute time-box.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Master ensures that the Developers have the meeting and that it is kept within the time-box. The Scrum Master does not need to be present to do this. They can coach the Developers outside of this event.

Pergunta 42: Ignorado

To ensure everyone is focused, Scrum does not allow any other meetings apart from the Scrum meetings.

True or False?

Explicação

Scrum allows the Scrum Team to have other meetings. The idea behind the Scrum events is to have a specific structure and time-boxes and reduce the need for additional meetings, not to forbid other meetings.

Pergunta 43: Ignorado

When should the Scrum Team refine the Product Backlog?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 is not specific about this and says that Refinement “is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size.”

The Scrum Guide v2017 brings more clarity to this: "The Scrum Team decides how and when refinement is done." Since this is not a prescribed Scrum event, there is no given time when this activity needs to happen.

Pergunta 44: Ignorado

The Developers use the Definition of Done to track the remaining work in the Sprint Backlog.

True or False?

Explicação

The Definition of Done can be used to identify work, not to track work.

Pergunta 45: Ignorado

Each Product Backlog Item must have the attributes of description, size, and test cases before it can be pulled into the Sprint Backlog.

True or False?

Explicação

Please notice the "must" in the question. The Scrum Guide clearly indicates that attributes depend on the Product, so they cannot be mandatory.

Pergunta 46: Ignorado

One of the Developers has noticed that the Sprint plan does not contain any tasks regarding documentation. The Developer thinks it is best to create this task right away in the Sprint Backlog. Is this the best approach?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog also contains the plan for the Sprint. Anytime new work is identified, it is added to Sprint Backlog as soon as possible to ensure the plan is accurate and transparent. There is no need to wait for the Daily Scrum to do this.

Pergunta 47: Ignorado

Multiple Scrum Teams work on the same Product, but every team is located somewhere else, in different time-zones. The Product Owner should keep a separate Product Backlog for each Scrum Team to minimize dependencies.

True or False?

Explicação

Remember the rule:

1 Product = 1 Product Owner = 1 Product Backlog

The Product Owner cannot create multiple Product Backlogs for the same Product.

Pergunta 48: Ignorado

When should the Product Backlog refinement activity take place?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

The Product Owner is the only one responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

There is no "between the Sprints" phase. The next Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

The refinement activity is the regular, ongoing process of refining the Backlog and preparing it for the next Sprints. Ideally, the higher-ordered Product Backlog Items (the items at the top of the backlog) are usually clearer, more detailed, and "ready" for selection.

If some or all of the items at the top of the backlog are not "Ready," the Product Owner and the Developers can refine them during the Sprint Planning meeting, which is still part of the Sprint.

Pergunta 49: Ignorado

Which of the following statements are correct about the Definition of Done?

Explicação

The Definition of Done exists to make transparent for everyone what "done" or “completed” work means and is created by the Scrum Team.

The Definition of Done also helps the Developers know how many Product Backlog Items to select during the Sprint Planning meeting. This is explained in the Scrum Guide v2020: “Selecting how much can be completed within a Sprint may be challenging. However, the more the Developers know about their past performance, their upcoming capacity, and their Definition of Done, the more confident they will be in their Sprint forecasts.”

If a Product Backlog item does not meet the Definition of Done, it will not be included in the Increment, but the Sprint will still end when the time-box expires.

Pergunta 50: Ignorado

The forecast made by the Developers is no longer realistic, and the Sprint Goal is in danger. How should the Product Owner react?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The best approach is to adapt the Sprint Backlog. The Sprint Goal must remain intact.

The Developers do not commit to completing the work planned during a Sprint Planning meeting. They just make a forecast. Additionally, working overtime is not acceptable as the development effort needs to be sustainable.

This situation does not represent a reason for canceling the Sprint.

Pergunta 51: Ignorado

What is a Release Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Release Sprints are against the Scrum rules as they imply that previous Sprints did not create releasable Increments.

Pergunta 52: Ignorado

The Developers are required to report the Sprint progress to the Product Owner.

True or False?

Explicação

The Product Owner and the Developers are part of the Scrum Team and collaborate toward reaching the Sprint Goal.

Scrum does not require any reporting. The Scrum artifacts ensure transparency by allowing others to understand what the Scrum Team is currently doing, what has been built, and what will be built next.

Pergunta 53: Ignorado

The Sprint Review meeting represents an opportunity to analyze customer feedback and new marketplace opportunities.

True or False?

Explicação

The Sprint Review meeting is designed for interacting with the Stakeholders and getting feedback. Some customers are Stakeholders, but not all customers are also Stakeholders. There is a subtle but essential difference.

The most valuable thing about the Sprint Review meeting is precisely the feedback from Stakeholders.

A Stakeholder is a person or group external to the Scrum Team with interest in the Product. Stakeholders can be external customers, internal customers (managers, investors, sponsors), users, etc.

So we can say that the Sprint Review meeting is designed for capturing Stakeholder feedback but not so much for capturing customer feedback. Customer feedback is gathered throughout the Sprint.

Getting customer feedback happens in many ways, but not necessarily during the Sprint Review. Still, any feedback gathered before the Sprint Review meeting can be discussed in the meeting.

Pergunta 54: Ignorado

All the requirements for the work that the Scrum Team does on the Product must come from the Product Backlog.

True or False?

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 clearly explains this requirement: "The Product Backlog is an emergent, ordered list of what is needed to improve the Product. It is the single source of work undertaken by the Scrum Team."

Pergunta 55: Ignorado

Why is it mandatory in Scrum to have only one Product Owner per Product?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

There is no Chief Product Owner or Proxy Product Owner in Scrum. There should be only one Product Owner.

While the Product Owner might delegate specific responsibilities, the Scrum Master cannot replace the Product Owner.

Pergunta 56: Ignorado

Who manages the Sprint Backlog?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Do not confuse the Sprint Backlog with the Product Backlog!

The Developers manage the Sprint Backlog.

Pergunta 57: Ignorado

Which of the following are TRUE about Scrum?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

Let's use a process of elimination and take a look at the wrong answers:

“Scrum is founded on verifying the work of others.” - Scrum is never about verifying or checking what others do. It is about trust.

“Scrum has replaced the traditional Project Manager with the Product Owner.” - Scrum works differently than traditional project management, and the Product Owner is by no means similar to the Project Manager.

“Scrum is flexible and allows each organization to select the parts of it that work best.” - Scrum is a framework, but all the roles, events, artifacts, and rules are important and cannot be replaced. The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “The Scrum framework, as outlined herein, is immutable. While implementing only parts of Scrum is possible, the result is not Scrum. Scrum exists only in its entirety and functions well as a container for other techniques, methodologies, and practices.”

Pergunta 58: Ignorado

The Project Manager thinks the project is not providing a good ROI for the organization and would like to stop the funding. How should the Product Owner react?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

Scrum does not mention Project Managers, but they might still be part of the organization. We need to treat anyone with interest in the Product as a Stakeholder.

What the Product Owner can do is treat the Project Manager like a Stakeholder. From this perspective, it becomes easier to understand that a transparent Product Backlog and an understanding of how things are going can help deal with the concern raised.

Pergunta 59: Ignorado

A very important Customer suggests the Product Owner a new feature. What should the Product Owner do?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

Any new features, ideas, etc., should end up in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner cannot modify the Sprint Backlog.

The Product Owner is supposed to collect feedback anytime, not only during the Sprint Review meeting.

Pergunta 60: Ignorado

A mature Scrum Team often handles multiple Sprint Goals during the Sprint.

True or False?

Explicação

During the Sprint there can only be one Sprint Goal, not multiple.

Pergunta 61: Ignorado

The Product Owner's main responsibility is to write clear and detailed user stories so that the Developers don't ask so many questions during the Sprint.

True or False?

Explicação

Scrum does not require user stories. The collaboration between the Product Owner and the Developers during the Sprint is key to reaching the Sprint Goal.

A Product Backlog Item is just a reminder for the work that needs to be done. It is not a complete specification.

Pergunta 62: Ignorado

Which of the following are characteristics of the Product Backlog?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

The Product Backlog represents an ordered list of all features, functions, requirements, enhancements, and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the Product.

The Product Backlog is never complete and can be modified at any time, not only during a meeting.

The Product Backlog should be transparent to all responsible for the outcome, including the Scrum Team.

Pergunta 63: Ignorado

Who should decide how work is performed during the Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Only the people doing the development work decide how work is performed during the Sprint.

Pergunta 64: Ignorado

The Developers of a Scrum Team are distributed on four different time-zones on three separate continents. At what time should be the Daily Scrum be held?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

Instead of thinking in practical terms, think about the Scrum Guide. The Scrum Master should not tell the Developers what to do.

Pergunta 65: Ignorado

The Product Owner and the Stakeholders are unsure if the Product is delivering value. Which of the following metrics could they consider?

Select the best two answers.

Explicação

If we look inside the EBM guide, we will find Revenue per employee (a Key Value Measure) and Release Frequency (a Key Value Measure). See the Appendix – Example Key Value Measures.

Cost or velocity don’t have a direct relationship to value.

Pergunta 66: Ignorado

The Scrum Master is responsible for creating the most valuable Product.

True or False?

Explicação

This is the responsibility of the Product Owner. The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team.”

Pergunta 67: Ignorado

What should the Developers do during the Daily Scrum?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Daily Scrum use used to plan the day and identify impediments.

The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “Daily Scrums improve communications, identify impediments, promote quick decision-making, and consequently eliminate the need for other meetings.”

Pergunta 68: Ignorado

Scrum Teams are self-managing and can decide to skip, postpone or cancel any Scrum events.

True or False?

Explicação

Self-management does not play a role when we are talking about respecting core Scrum rules. The Scrum Team cannot decide to skip or reduce the frequency of any Scrum events.

Pergunta 69: Ignorado

Complete the following sentence:

The Scrum Team is self-managing, cross-functional, and should have all the skills needed to _____

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Scrum Guide v2020 explains: “Scrum Teams are cross-functional, meaning the members have all the skills necessary to create value each Sprint. They are also self-managing, meaning they internally decide who does what, when, and how.”

Don’t confuse the Sprint Goal with the Product Goal.

Pergunta 70: Ignorado

When is it appropriate to change the Definition of Done?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

During the Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team can plan changes to the Definition of Done. Modifying the Definition of Done during the Sprint impacts the forecast and items that have already been completed.

Pergunta 71: Ignorado

Which of the following are NOT Scrum Values?

Select the best two answers.

Pergunta 72: Ignorado

How can a large number of developers be grouped into multiple Scrum Teams?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

This scenario aligns with the Scrum idea of letting people self-manage.

Pergunta 73: Ignorado

To ensure transparency, when multiple Scrum Teams work on the same Product, the Product Owner should create a separate Product Backlog for each team.

True or False.

Explicação

It has nothing to do with transparency. The Scrum rules are very clear, even if multiple teams work on the same Product.

1 Product = 1 Product Backlog = 1 Product Owner.

So there cannot be multiple Product Backlogs.

Unfortunately, this practice is sometimes used, but it is against the Scrum rules.

Pergunta 74: Ignorado

Which of the following could be topics of discussion during the Sprint Retrospective event?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

New Product insights from the marketplace - This is related to the Sprint Review meeting.

Who should be responsible for testing. - Testing is part of the development work, and all Developers are accountable.

Pergunta 75: Ignorado

Which of the following Scrum events are time-boxed?

Select all answers that apply.

Explicação

This is a trick question. All Scrum events are time-boxed.

The Daily Standup is an informal name of the Daily Scrum. The Scrum Guide does not mention an event called  Daily Standup.

Apart from the obviously incorrect options, you might be tempted to select the "Product Backlog refinement" as well. This is not one of the five prescribed Scrum events.

Pergunta 76: Ignorado

The Product Owner needs to ensure that the Product delivers value to the customers. Which of the following should be areas of focus for the Product Owner when building a software product?

Select the best three answers.

Explicação

Understanding the users and how they are using the Product and getting feedback on the Product are extremely valuable to the Product Owner. This concept is related directly to the Key Value Areas described in the EBM Guide.

Pergunta 77: Ignorado

Scrum mandates the Product Owner should be dedicated to a single Scrum Team.

True or False?

Explicação

There is no hard rule in Scrum regarding how much time the Product Owner needs to dedicate to the Scrum Team. The Product Owner may even manage multiple Products.

When multiple Scrum Teams work on the same Product, the Product Owner will be part of multiple Scrum Teams.

The main idea is that the Product Owner should work with the Developers during the Sprint. This may include clarifying Product Backlog Items, answering questions, reviewing complete work, or refining the Product Backlog.

If the Product Owner is not sufficiently available, the Product Increment may not be what the Product Owner expected.

Pergunta 78: Ignorado

Which of the following is a good reason to postpone the upcoming Sprint?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

There are no pauses between Sprints, regardless of the circumstance.

If the Product Owner has new insights, they may use the Sprint Planning meeting to discuss and refine the Product Backlog with the Developers.

In practice, the Product Owner continuously collaborates with the Stakeholders. The insights from the Sprint Review typically have a relatively small impact on the upcoming Sprint.

For a short timeframe, the Scrum Team can continue working without a Product Owner.

Pergunta 79: Ignorado

The users of the Product are also a Stakeholder that the Product Owner must take into account.

True or False?

Explicação

A Stakeholder is a party that has an interest in the Product. There can be many Stakeholders interested in different aspects of the Product. The users of the Product are also Stakeholders, as they are getting value from it.

If the users are dissatisfied and do not get enough value, how can the Product and the Product Owner be successful?

Pergunta 80: Ignorado

How is the Product Owner involved in creating the Sprint Goal?

Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Sprint Goal is created by the Scrum Team and not by the Product Owner alone or by anyone else external to the Scrum Team.

Teste 9 deki@gmail - Product Owner exam simulator (SG v.2020)

Pergunta 1: Correto
Although user stories are not mandatory in Scrum many Scrum Teams use this format of requirements in the Product Backlog. What is the explanation of user stories?

Explicação

User stories describe how a customer or user employs the product. Stories consist of a name a brief narrative (the story) and a set of acceptance criteria. The latter formulate conditions that must hold true thereby making the story more precise
Pergunta 2: Correto
How much refinement is required for a Product Backlog item? select all correct answers

Explicação

Higher ordered Product Backlog items are usually clearer and more detailed than lower ordered ones. More precise estimates are made based on the greater clarity and increased detail; the lower the order the less the detail. Product Backlog items that will occupy Developers for the upcoming Sprint are refined so that any one item can reasonably be Done within the Sprint time-box. Product Backlog items that can be Done by Developers within one Sprint are deemed Ready for selection in the Sprint Planning. Product Backlog items usually acquire this degree of transparency through the above described refining activities.
Pergunta 3: Correto
Select answers that apply. The key stakeholders are allowed to participate in …...

Explicação

The Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if required. During the Sprint Review the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate in order to determine what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done in order to optimize value. This is an informal meeting not a status meeting and the presentation of the Increment is intended to elicit feedback and foster collaboration.
Pergunta 4: Incorreto
What is the best description of the job of a Product Owner according to the Scrum Guide?

Explicação

All items are less or more applicable but remember that the main responsibility of the Product Owner is to maximize value and “working with stakeholders in order to identify the most important requirements” is the closest answer to “increasing value”.
Pergunta 5: Correto
How can the Product Owner deliver his product vision to life? (select all answers that apply)

Explicação

There are three methods here:- Utilizing the underlying empirical product planning features of Scrum- Via the Product Backlog and iterating towards that vision every Sprint- Articulating the product vision to the Scrum Team and the Key Stakeholders early and often
Pergunta 6: Correto
What is the main difference between the Product Owner and the Project Manager

Explicação

As the Product Owner you have the absolute right to make all product decisions. This is in contrast to a traditional project manager who is responsible for making sure that the project stays within scope schedule and budget. Whether the product is the right product and whether the product creates value for the users and customers are likely not a project manager’s top concerns. As a Product Owner this is your purpose. You are the value maximizer for the product.
Pergunta 7: Incorreto
What is the Monte Carlo simulation?

Explicação

Monte Carlo simulation is a risk mitigation technique for problems that require a numerical answer but are too complex to solve analytically. It instead applies random numbers and probability statistics to explore the likelihood of every possible outcome of a decision from one extreme to the other.
Pergunta 8: Correto
Who monitors the remaining work of the Product Backlog?

Explicação

​At any point in time the total work remaining to reach a goal can be summed. The Product Owner tracks this total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.​
Pergunta 9: Correto
The Product Owner should use burn-down charts to track progress.

Explicação

​Burn-down charts are very common for tracking and representing progress but they are not mandatory and the Product Owner can use other tools/techniques as well.
Pergunta 10: Correto
This member of the Scrum Team is responsible for determining when a release can occur

Explicação

​The increment must be in useable condition regardless of whether the Product Owner decides to release it.​
Pergunta 11: Correto
One of the senior manager wants Developers to take in a highly critical feature in the current Sprint. What is the right response to this for Developers?

Explicação

As we know from the Scrum Guide for the Product Owner to succeed the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force Developers to work from a different set of requirements.
Pergunta 12: Correto

The size of Developers in Scrum Team is 8 person. One of the Developers expressed concerns to the Scrum Master about system performance issues of certain backlog items. What should the Scrum Master do?

Explicação

No one (not even the Scrum Master) tells Developers how to turn Product Backlog into Increments of potentially releasable functionality; The issue has to be resolved within Developers. The Scrum Master may:- Coaching the team members in self-management and cross-functionality;- Helping the Scrum Team focus on creating high-value Increments that meet the Definition of Done;- Causing the removal of impediments to the Scrum Team’s progress; and- Ensuring that all Scrum events take place and are positive productive and kept within the timebox.
Pergunta 13: Correto
Who assigns tasks to Developers?

Explicação

Developers have the following characteristic: They are self-organizing. No one (not even the Scrum Master) tells Developers how to turn Product Backlog into Increments of potentially releasable functionality;
Pergunta 14: Correto
Which statement is correct when Developers are working in the middle of the Sprint?

Explicação

During the Sprint as more is learned the scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Developers. This is mainly focused on the interpretation of the Product Backlog items and the tasks created by decomposing them.
Pergunta 15: Correto

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal during Sprint Planning?

Explicação

​Entire Scrum Team is responsible for crafting Sprint Goal
Pergunta 16: Incorreto
Which of the following includes the attributes of a good User Story?

Explicação

INVEST good user story should be: - Independent (of all others)- Negotiable (not a specific contract for features)- Valuable (or vertical)- Estimable (to a good approximation)- Small (so as to fit within an iteration)- Testable (in principle even if there isn't a test for it yet)
Pergunta 17: Correto
The Product Owner ensures enough items are selected from the Product Backlog in the Sprint Planning meeting to satisfy the stakeholders.

Explicação

​It’s only up to the developers to decide how many items they will select from the top of the Product Backlog. The Product Owner only orders the items.
Pergunta 18: Correto
The Product Owner does not have to be one person and the role can be played by a committee.

Explicação

It’s possible to have a committee responsible for Product Ownership but only a representative of that committee would be called the Product Owner. There’s always one Product Owner for a product even if there are multiple teams.
Pergunta 19: Incorreto
Whisch of the following should be measured to​ verify the success of a product? (choose two answers)

Explicação

Just delivered planned scope may not indicate a product success unless it impacts the real value measures
Pergunta 20: Correto
How complete should the Sprint Backlog be at the end of the Sprint Planning meeting?

Explicação

​Not all tasks are identified in the Sprint Planning; just enough to show what Developers are going to do in the next few days. The rest of the tasks will be created during the Sprint.
Pergunta 21: Correto
What is the number of Product Owners required for three teams if there is one product for all teams?

Explicação

One project for one product has only one Product Backlog and one Product Owner. Otherwise prioritization and accountability would be too difficult.
Pergunta 22: Correto
It is ok for the Product Owner to be at Daily Scrum event

Explicação

The purpose of the Daily Scrum is to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and adapt the Sprint Backlog as necessary adjusting the upcoming planned work.The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute event for the Developers of the Scrum Team. To reduce complexity it is held at the same time and place every working day of the Sprint. If the Product Owner or Scrum Master are actively working on items in the Sprint Backlog they participate as Developers.
Pergunta 23: Correto
The main goal why the Scrum Master ensures that the Scrum Team and those interacting with this team from the outside adhere to the Scrum rules is

Explicação

The primary objective behind why a Scrum Master ensures that the Scrum Team and those interacting with the Team from the outside adhere to the Scrum rules to maximize the value created by the Scrum Team
Pergunta 24: Incorreto
Identify the wrong implementations of the Product Owner accountability in Scrum (select all correct answers)

Explicação

Some implementations such as Proxy Product Owner Remote Product Owner Product Owner Committee etc. increase miscommunication slow-down in decision making etc. A co-located Product Owner along with Developers is preferable
Pergunta 25: Correto
Which of the following might be discussed in a Sprint Retrospective?

Explicação

​Sprint Retrospective is used for planning for improvements. The Scrum Team inspects how the last Sprint went with regards to individuals interactions processes tools and their Definition of Done. Inspected elements often vary with the domain of work. Assumptions that led them astray are identified and their origins explored. The Scrum Team discusses what went well during the Sprint what problems it encountered and how those problems were (or were not) solved.
Pergunta 26: Correto
Select one or more correct answers. The key stakeholders invited to the Sprint Review to …

Explicação

In Sprint Review presentation of the Increment is intended to elicit feedback and foster collaboration The key stakeholders and the Scrum Team collaborate on what to do next. They review how the marketplace or potential use of the product might have changed and what is the most valuable thing to do next. They also review timeline budget potential capabilities and marketplace for the next anticipated release of the product.
Pergunta 27: Correto
How are stakeholders external to the Scrum team involved in the Daily Scrum?

Explicação

​The Daily Scrum is only for Developers. Others can attend but they won’t participate.
Pergunta 28: Correto
Who make(s) sure that all developers are doing their tasks during the Sprint?

Explicação

Developers take responsibility for doing the tasks (assignment) themselves and Developers ensures that all tasks are done properly. Remember that they are self-organized. When items are “Done” the Product Owner checks them but this is focused on the item rather than individuals; all developers are accountable for their outputs
Pergunta 29: Correto
How can the Product Owner count PCR (Product Cost Ratio)?

Explicação

PCR is a total expenses and costs for the product(s)/system(s) being measured including operational costs compared to revenue.
Pergunta 30: Correto
Developers are waiting for a specific software component that they need to integrate and use.The component should be ready in a month.The Backlog Items with highest priorities depend on this specific component.What should the Product Owner do?

Explicação

The Product Backlog should make the dependency visible to all the interested parties. Usually Items with external dependencies are not considered “Ready” for selection at the Sprint Planning.Developers should deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint.
Pergunta 31: Correto
Select all Product Backlog features from the following answers

Explicação

​The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate competitive and useful. If a product exists its Product Backlog also exists. The Product Backlog lists all features functions requirements enhancements and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases. Product Backlog items have the attributes of a description order estimate and value. Product Backlog items often include test descriptions that will prove its completeness when Done.
Pergunta 32: Correto
What happens to the Product Backlog when the customer environment and requirements change in the middle of the project?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a dynamic concept that is not completely composed at the beginning of the project (or any other time) and is never made static by baselining.The Product Backlog always changes to reflect the feedback from the customer end users market and their environment.It’s fair to say that the whole framework is designed in a way that enables such a responsive Product Backlog.
Pergunta 33: Correto
The Product Backlog Refinement is not a mandatory event in Scrum. However if the Scrum Team is holding this event all Scrum Team members must participate

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is certainly an essential part of the Scrum Framework. But more often than not it takes the form of a team passively sitting around a meeting table while a subset of the team discusses upcoming items in excruciating detail. Things are not helped by having to wait for that one member with the keyboard to enter everything in JIRA. When doing Product Backlog refinement like this it is understandable that teams try to spend as little time on it as possible — which is one of the key reasons holding Scrum Teams back from becoming truly awesome. It is a good practice for all Scrum Team to present at this event however it is not strongly required
Pergunta 34: Correto
… lists all features functions requirements enhancements and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases

Explicação

The Product Backlog lists all features functions requirements enhancements and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases
Pergunta 35: Incorreto
The Product Owner can transfer some of his/her accountability to Developers.

Explicação

The Product Owner can delegate his/her responsibilities to Developers but s/he remains accountable.
Pergunta 36: Correto
…...... identifies the key stakeholders for the product

Explicação

​The Product Owner identifies the key stakeholders for the product
Pergunta 37: Correto
What is the reason of why there should be only one Product Owner per product?

Explicação

​The Product Owner is one person not a committee. The Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog but those wanting to change a Product Backlog item’s priority must address the Product Owner. For the Product Owner to succeed the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force Developers to work from a different set of requirements and developers know who’s responsible for prioritisation​
Pergunta 38: Correto
Who’s responsible for ordering the Product Backlog?

Explicação

The Product Owner is accountable for effective Product Backlog management which includes:- Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal;- Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items;- Ordering Product Backlog items; and- Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent visible and understood.
Pergunta 39: Correto
The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

Explicação

The Product Owner is the sole responsible person and they even “own” the Product Backlog.Note: remember that the Sprint Backlog is owned by Developers.This is not however in contrast to the fact that the Product Backlog items are estimated by the developers; they provide this information to the Product Owner to be included in the Product Backlog.There are multiple implications by saying that the Product Owner “owns” the Product Backlog or is the sole responsible person only they can add items to the backlog or decompose them into smaller items; while this is done by input from the customers and developers and even the Product Owner can delegate this responsibility to the developers.Only they can decide on the order of the items on the Product Backlog while this is usually based on the input from customers and developers.
Pergunta 40: Incorreto
Choose Delivery Metrics from the following answers

Explicação

Here is the list of delivery metrics:- Defects- Code Coverage - Velocity- Number of tests- Coupling and Cohesion- Code Complexity- Build Failures- Process Adherence- Lines of Code
Pergunta 41: Correto
…......... determine(s) when it’s a time to update the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog includes the items selected from the Product Backlog and the tasks created by decomposing the items. Only the tasks are updated during the Sprint and it’s the responsibility of Developers
Pergunta 42: Correto
Who owns the Sprint Backlog?

Explicação

​The Sprint Backlog is a forecast by Developers about what functionality will be in the next Increment and the work needed to deliver that functionality into a Done Increment.​
Pergunta 43: Correto
Who creates the Sprint Goal?

Explicação

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. The Sprint Goal is the single objective for the Sprint. Although the Sprint Goal is a commitment by the Developers it provides flexibility in terms of the exact work needed to achieve it. The Sprint Goal also creates coherence and focus encouraging the Scrum Team to work together rather than on separate initiatives. It is created during the Sprint Planning meeting by the entire Scrum Team .
Pergunta 44: Correto
Which of the following is the guide for the Developers on why it is building the Increment?

Explicação

​The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Scrum Team on why it is building the Increment. It is created during the Sprint Planning meeting.​
Pergunta 45: Incorreto
The Product Owner may use these measures to track the true value being delivered

Explicação

EBMgt Guide says Over the past two decades many organizations have built software through the Scrum framework and the application of agile principles. Consequently management efforts in software organizations often focus directly on the practices used rather than the outcomes produced. Managers in software organizations often seek to answer questions such as: is build automation present? what is the quality of the code are developers integrating the code frequently etc. While the answers to these questions may be interesting unfortunately they are irrelevant to organizational value. Monitoring only the direct use of practices does not provide the best evidence of their effectiveness. For instance tracking Developers' velocity is irrelevant to a Product Owner who is responsible for maximizing the value of the product.
Pergunta 46: Correto
This Scrum event is for process improvement

Explicação

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.
Pergunta 47: Correto
The Product Owner must provide transparency into the project status by…

Explicação

The type of chart used is not important; they just have to measure the completed and remaining work.“Work” here refers to the cumulative size of the Product Backlog items.
Pergunta 48: Correto
Select all correct answers. The team are starting the first Sprint. What needs to be ensured before it?

Explicação

There are no pre-conditions to the first Sprint. Availability of a Scrum Team and list of business ideas for first Sprint are enough to start the Sprint
Pergunta 49: Correto
Who is the project manager in Scrum terminology?

Explicação

Traditional project manager responsibilities are distributed between the Scrum Master and the Product Owner and even Developers and due to this we don't need project manager in Scrum Team.
Pergunta 50: Correto
How does the Product Owner communicate his marketplace knowledge to the Scrum Team (select three)?

Explicação

To achieve the success of the Product the Product Owner must attend Sprint Reviews. It is also very useful and productive (sometimes it is necessary) to interact with the entire Scrum Team on a daily basis and hold Product Backlog Refinement sessions every Sprint.
Pergunta 51: Correto
The revenue generation is the primary factor in determining value.

Explicação

Value is the ratio of benefits and cost. The revenue is only related to the benefits and is not enough for determining the value.
Pergunta 52: Correto
When is the Scrum Team allowed to interact with the Key Stakeholders (select the most applicable option)?

Explicação

All members of the Scrum Team may interact with the Stakeholders anytime when it is required. However only the Product Owner may change any requirements if it is required.
Pergunta 53: Correto
The entire Scrum Team (the Product Owner the Scrum Master and Developers) must participate at these events (select all correct answers)

Explicação

All Sprint events except Daily Scrum. Daily Scrum is mandatory only for Developers members
Pergunta 54: Correto
Who is responsible to identify the stakeholders in Scrum?
Pergunta 55: Correto
Select 4 Ev. Based man-nt metrics that is capturing organisational value

Explicação

Scrum.org has provided a framework to measure the value of software. It is called as Evidence Based Management or EbMgt. EBMgt measure four Key Value Areas (KVA) to measure the value of software:Current Value -Time to Market -Ability to Innovate -Unrealized Value
Pergunta 56: Correto
What is unrealized value in Scrum?

Explicação

The potential future value that could be realized if the organization met the needs of all potential customers or users. Looking at Unrealized Value helps an organization to maximize the value that it realizes from a product or service over time. When customers users or clients experience a gap between their current experience and the experience that they would like to have the difference between the two represents an opportunity; this opportunity is measured by Unrealized Value.
Pergunta 57: Correto
Who can set the definition of “Done” according to the Scrum Guide?

Explicação

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.
Pergunta 58: Correto
If there are 75 developers for a Scrum project how should they be divided into teams?

Explicação

The optimal number of developer in each Scrum Team is 8-9 staffs. When more developers are required multiple teams can work on the same product and it will be called Scaled Scrum. Developers decide how to form the teams.
Pergunta 59: Correto
Which of the following is the single source of requirements for all changes to the product?

Explicação

Everything we might want to apply to the product including changes are reflected in the Product Backlog. It’s high-level but contains everything
Pergunta 60: Correto

After the beginning of Sprint Planning, the team understand that the Product Backlog is not clear enough. What happens next?

Explicação

Of course it is not a good case however the team should begin Sprint Planning and continue to refine the Product Backlog
Pergunta 61: Incorreto
Teams 1 and 2 work on two different projects. Team 1 has 5 members and a velocity of 450. Team B has 9 members and a velocity of 700. Which team has a higher performance?

Explicação

It does not depend on velocity only. There are many factors and it is very difficult to compare the efficiency
Pergunta 62: Correto
Who is (are) the owner(s) of the each Sprint Backlog item?

Explicação

Items and tasks in the Sprint Backlog are not owned by any specific person; ownership and accountability is shared.Task is assigned to one developer or a pair of developers but they don’t own the task; they are just responsible for doing the task and everyone stays accountable (owner). The Sprint Backlog items are not even assigned to people because each item requires multiple expertise and usually done with the help of multiple people in the team.
Pergunta 63: Correto
The perfomance of the project measured by this member of the Scrum Team

Explicação

Measuring the release or project performance is the Product Owner’s responsibility. Measuring the Sprint performance is Developers’s responsibility.
Pergunta 64: Incorreto
Which of the following are factors that should be considered by the Product Owner in the release decision (select all applicable)?

Explicação

One of the most important factors to decide about the release are:-The costs and benefits of the upgrade -The risk that the product’s value can get out of line with the marketplace- The customers that will be constrained by the new release
Pergunta 65: Correto
Who is the chief product visionary?

Explicação

One of the Product Owner's responsibilities is to have a vision of what he or she wishes to build and convey that vision to the scrum team. This is key to successfully starting any agile software development
Pergunta 66: Correto
…....... decides whether to release the latest increment of the product in Scrum

Explicação

Only the Product Owner can decide whether to release increment
Pergunta 67: Correto
The Product Backlog is baselined at the beginning of the project or at the end of the project

Explicação

Product Backlog cannot be baselined in Scrum
Pergunta 68: Correto

There are 13 members in the Scrum Team. Due to this it is required (mandatory) to divide the Team

Explicação

The Scrum Team is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint typically 10 or fewer people. In general smaller teams communicate better and are more productive. If Scrum Teams become too large they should consider reorganizing into multiple cohesive Scrum Teams each focused on the same product. However there is no direct restriction of number of Scrum Team members in the Scrum Guide. If there are 13 professionals and it is convenient for the team then no problem
Pergunta 69: Correto
Which of the following are the artifacts in Scrum? Select all applicable items.

Explicação

Scrum’s artefacts represent work or value to provide transparency and opportunities for inspection and adaptation. Artefacts defined by Scrum are specifically designed to maximize transparency of key information so that everybody has the same understanding of the artefact.There are three artefacts in Sprint:- Product Backlog- Sprint Backlog- Increment
Pergunta 70: Correto
The vertical axis in standard burn-down chart usually means …....

Explicação

The horizontal axis is time the vertical axis is the remaining amount of work and the trend line shows the forecasted finish date if the Product Backlog and the team capacity remain the same.
Pergunta 71: Correto
If stakeholders have different interests in the product and varied viewpoints what is the best strategy for the Product Owner?

Explicação

The Product Owner’s responsibility is to maximize the value of the product as a whole and this will involve an intelligent balancing of interests. While the PO is the lead facilitator of stakeholder involvement the PO need not and probably should not become a controlling gatekeeper or bottleneck between the Scrum Team and stakeholders. They simply act as a “lead facilitator.” Most frequently the PO will connect key stakeholders with Developers to refine the backlog or gain product feedback. Just be sure to have a way to loop the results of those collaborations back to the PO so as to keep them informed.
Pergunta 72: Correto
The Scrum Master as a true leader is in service to which of the following?

Explicação

The Scrum Master as a true leader is in service to entire organization and Scrum Team
Pergunta 73: Correto
What Scrum event or artefact supports every day inspection and adaptation?

Explicação

There is only one daily activity in Scrum: Daily Scrum
Pergunta 74: Correto
Which of the following is the shortest timebox in a two-week Sprint?

Explicação

This is at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints. For shorter Sprints the event is usually shorter. Sprint Review and Sprint Planning are longer meetings than Sprint Retrospective
Pergunta 75: Incorreto
Which measures will help the Product Owner to check if the product delivers value? (select all correct answers)

Explicação

The total cost of ownership (TCO) installed version index usage index (amount of functionality being used ) customer feedback are the direct measures of product value
Pergunta 76: Correto
What is the benefit of using value points in ordering the Product Backlog?

Explicação

Value points are relative units for the value assigned to the Product Backlog items. It increases transparency (everyone understands why) when applied correctly.
Pergunta 77: Correto
Select all answers where the statement is true
Pergunta 78: Correto
….....is (are) responsible for the system architecture of a product being developed using Scrum

Explicação

Developers are responsible for the system architecture of a product being developed using Scrum
Pergunta 79: Correto
The Product Owner has to think about the Total Cost of Ownership or TCO to avoid potential costs of the product. What costs will a Product Owner have to consider to avoid the loss of the value?

Explicação

The Product Owner is not only accountable for the development and release of a product but also the cost of maintaining and operating the product.
Pergunta 80: Correto
As a Product Owner you are responsible for stakeholder management. From the following answers choose correct statement about the relationship between PO and the stakeholder

Explicação

The Product Owner is the bridge between the team and the stakeholders. The Product Owner actively asks for stakeholder expectations to process into the Product Backlog.

Teste 10 deki@gmail - Scrum Product Owner Certification PSPO I | Exam Prep 2021

Pergunta 1: Correto
Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, realtime picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.
Pergunta 2: Correto
Why would technical debt be important for Product Owners?

Explicação

Technical debt is shortcomings in the code that makes it less than "good enough" and therefore creates risks in the future. It usually decreases velocity in the future (because the team has to fix the shortcomings) and as some of the debt might remain in the file product, the maintenance cost will increase as well. Total cost of ownership is a combination of the project cost and maintenance cost.
Pergunta 3: Correto
The Sprint Review is:

Explicação

The Sprint Review is focused on inspecting and adapting the product.
Pergunta 4: Incorreto
Flexibility in Scrum is NOT achieved through which of the following? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Scrum is a framework within which people can address complex adaptive problems, while productively and creatively delivering products of the highest possible value. Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk. The focus is shifted towards the outcome rather than the process that produces the output. Having a high velocity does not always translate into business value.
Pergunta 5: Correto
Who determines when it's time to update the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog includes the items selected from the Product Backlog and the tasks created by decomposing the items. Only the tasks are updated during the Sprint and it's the Development Team's responsibility to do so.
Pergunta 6: Correto
Which of the following is a valid reason for the Product Owner to pay attention to technical debt?

Explicação

Technical debt is any shortcoming in the solution that makes it less than "good enough" and might create problems in the future. When there's a lot of technical debt, the velocity might decrease in the future because developers have to deal with the shortcomings. On the other hand, this debt might even remain in the final product and make it harder and more expensive to maintain the product. "Total cost of ownership" is the combination of production and maintenance costs of a product.
Pergunta 7: Correto
If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled and a new Sprint is created with a more realistic scope.

Explicação

The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete. If some work could not be done, the Sprint Backlog should be renegotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team.
Pergunta 8: Correto
What would likely happen if management only changed the organization's current terminology to fit Scrum without the proper understanding and support of Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The defined terminology in Scrum was selected, designed, and defined specifically for supporting the Scrum Framework. Understanding the differences between traditional methods and the Scrum Framework will help move teams in the right direction in Scrum adoption.
Pergunta 9: Correto
What technique should be used to create a Product Backlog item? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

User stories are a fairly common technique for representing Product Backlog Items, but other techniques can be used instead. For instance, a team can use scenarios, use cases, acceptance tests, etc. The Product Backlog might even contain a heterogeneous mix of the above. The Product Owner should work with the rest of the Scrum Team on choosing and optimizing the techniques used to represent Product Backlog Items.
Pergunta 10: Correto
Who manages the Sprint Backlog?
Pergunta 11: Correto
The Product Owner may choose to delegate the responsibility of estimating to the Development Team.

Explicação

Estimating is the responsibility of the Development Team by default. The Product Owner doesn't have such authority in the first place to delegate it.
Pergunta 12: Correto
What is management's role in Scrum?

Explicação

Getting the support from the business side helps facilitates the changes that fosters empiricism, self-organization, bottom-up intelligence, and intelligent release of software.
Pergunta 13: Correto
What does the Cone of Uncertainty show? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.
Pergunta 14: Correto
Product Backlog refinement is
Pergunta 15: Correto
Revenue generation is the primary factor in determining value.

Explicação

Value is the ratio of benefits and cost. The revenue is only related to the benefits and is not enough for determining the value.
Pergunta 16: Correto
When does the Sprint end?

Explicação

Sprints have consistent durations throughout a development effort. A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.
Pergunta 17: Correto
Who participates in the Sprint Planning? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.
Pergunta 18: Correto
Which of the following is not allowed by Scrum?
Pergunta 19: Correto
More features always bring more value.

Explicação

It depends on the features and the quality of delivery. Having a lot of features doesn't guarantee that they include the most important ones. More importantly, having more features may increase the maintenance cost which decreases the overall value. One of the Agile principles is simplicity: the art of maximizing the amount of work not done.
Pergunta 20: Correto
How long can a Sprint be if a team takes four-hours in Sprint Planning?

Explicação

Sprint Planning has a maximum time-box of 8 hours for one-month Sprints and usually shorter for shorter Sprints. The keyword here is usually. A common practice in some teams is to proportionally shorten the Sprint Planning according to the length of the Sprint time-box. ie 4 hour Sprint Planning for 2 week Sprints; 2 hour Sprint Planning for a 1 week Sprint; etc. This is a localized practice rather than a rule as each team's situation will differ. Thus, the time-box for Sprint Planning is limited to 8 hours regardless of the length of the Sprint. Each team is responsible for maximize the value of the team's time and effort spent within Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 21: Correto
Which are considered Scrum Values. (choose all that apply)

Explicação

The Scrum Guide recognizes the following Scrum Values: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect.
Pergunta 22: Correto
A company has two products. Which of the following is an acceptable way of forming Scrum teams?
Pergunta 23: Correto
A key measure of success for the Product Owner is velocity.

Explicação

Velocity only measures the team's average speed and does not reflect how much value is being delivered to the customers. Even when it's considered inside the project, while it's important, it's not the key measure of success. The Product Owner should be focused on how much value is delivered to the customers.
Pergunta 24: Correto
Every Sprint cycle begins with a _____________ meeting. (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 25: Incorreto
How could the success of the project be evaluated? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Customer and end user satisfaction is important. It's not an abstract measure like lines of code or velocity. There can be some KPIs for measuring the value of the releases and when improved will show our success. Increased velocity is desired but it's not directly connected to value and can be misleading. That's the same with production cost. It's mandatory to deliver an Increment every Sprint.
Pergunta 26: Correto
How can a Product Owner to validate the results of his/her assumptions made for the Product? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Your can measure value in many different ways, but what's most important is that you actually measure and steer on value. Start validating value, by releasing to your customers and users early and often. There is no way you can 'determine' the value of a Product Backlog Item upfront. You could make an estimate, you can take a guess, but you can't 'determine' the value. Something is valuable, when you've released a Done Product Increment to customers/users, and they've told you that the stuff you've delivered is valuable, or if you can measure changes in your automated Key Value Indicators (such as DAM/DAU/Usage/etc). Learning turns into 'validated learning' when assumptions and goals can be validated through the outcomes of the releases.
Pergunta 27: Correto
Ordering the Product Backlog is part of Product Backlog Refinement

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is defined in the Scrum Guide as the act of adding detail, estimates and order to the Product Backlog items. Remember that the Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing activity and is not timeboxed. The rule is that it shouldn't take more than 10% of the developers' time.
Pergunta 28: Incorreto
Which role is responsible for understanding the requirements of the project and creating the deliverables? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Development Team consists of professionals who do the work of delivering a potentially releasable Increment of "Done" product at the end of each Sprint. Development Teams are structured and empowered by the organization to organize and manage their own work. Only members of the Development Team create the Increment therefore must understand the requirements.
Pergunta 29: Correto
In order for a Product Owner to maximize value, he/she must have awareness of which of the following? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The product vision (while is not mandatory in Scrum) describes the purpose of the solution. How features serve the purpose affects their value. The customer and end user feedback is important for value as well. Velocity is not directly connected to value and the results of unit tests is a technical matter that developers need to pay attention to.
Pergunta 30: Correto
Which practice must be used by a Product Owner to manage the Product Backlog and share the Product Backlog progress? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering. Various projective practices upon trending have been used to forecast progress, like burn-downs, burn-ups, or cumulative flows but it's up to the Product Owner to know which practices provides the most value in his/her situation. The Scrum Master can help the PO find different techniques for effective Product Backlog management as specific practices and how this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individual.
Pergunta 31: Correto
The Product Backlog is reordered following input from Stakeholders at the Sprint Review
Pergunta 32: Correto
Which of the following events has the shortest time-box in a four-week Sprint?

Explicação

These are the durations in a four-week Sprint: Sprint Planning: 8 hours Sprint Review: 4 hours Sprint Retrospective: 3 hours For shorter Sprints, these events are typically shorter. There is no set rule on how short they should be. This all depends on the team. Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing and continuous activity. The Scrum Team decides how and when refinement is done. Refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team. However, Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.
Pergunta 33: Correto
In which cases is an Increment valuable? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The customer satisfaction is valuable and important for us. Reducing the operational costs, which consequently decreases the total cost of ownership is also a way of bringing value. All Increments are delivered on time because the Sprints are timeboxed. There's no need to have all the Sprint Backlog items completed before the end of the Sprint. At least, this is not the most important thing when we are dealing with value.
Pergunta 34: Correto
What best describes the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product at that moment in time. As the team is working through the Product Backlog, unknowns will emerge and the Product Backlog will adapt accordingly. This process harnesses change for the customer's competitive advantage.
Pergunta 35: Correto
The Product Backlog is the single source of all planned work that is to be done by the Development Team.

Explicação

All work to be done by the Development Team must ultimately come from the Product Backlog as it is the single source of truth for any changes to be made to the product. How the work is done can change, evolve, and emerge as the work is being done.
Pergunta 36: Correto
How much time should be spent refining the Product Backlog?

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Development Team collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items. The Scrum Team decides how and when refinement is done. Refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team. However, Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.
Pergunta 37: Correto
Product Backlog management includes: (choose all that apply)
Pergunta 38: Correto
Which is a valid description for the order of the items in the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for having the most valuable items towards the top of the Product Backlog and ensuring that they are as close to 'ready' as possible.
Pergunta 39: Correto
The Product Owner must attend the Sprint Retrospective
Pergunta 40: Incorreto
When multiple Development Teams are working on the same product, how should the Definition of Done be created?

Explicação

Regardless of whether there is a single Definition of Done for multiple teams or unique Definition of Done for each team, the importance is the teams' ability to produce shippable Increments and having transparency on what 'done' means.
Pergunta 41: Correto
What does Product Backlog management include? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Product Backlog management includes: Clearly expressing Product Backlog items; Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions; Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs; Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and, Ensuring the Development Team understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.
Pergunta 42: Correto
SCRUM stands for
Pergunta 43: Correto
The practice of Product Backlog refinement focuses on items for upcoming Sprints, not the current Sprint in progress.

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is the act of adding detail, estimates, and order to items in the Product Backlog. The Items in the current Sprint are no longer on the Product Backlog, because they are now on the Sprint Backlog. However, it is certainly fine for the Product Owner to add detail and clarification to the current Sprint’s work as well.
Pergunta 44: Correto
Which concept is the basis of the business justification aspect in Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product resulting from work of the Development Team. He/she must manage the Product Backlog in order to best achieve goals and missions, optimize the value of the work the Development Team performs, and show what the Scrum Team will work on next
Pergunta 45: Incorreto
Product Backlog refinement ... (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is the act of adding detail, estimates, and order to items in the Product Backlog. This is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Development Team collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items. It takes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team.
Pergunta 46: Incorreto
What is the benefit of using value points in ordering the Product Backlog?

Explicação

Value points are relative units for value assigned to the Product Backlog items. It increases transparency (everyone understand the why) when applied correctly.
Pergunta 47: Correto
The Product Owner shouldn't allow the Development Team to start developing without having the tasks identified and assigned.

Explicação

There are two problems in this statement: The Product Owner doesn't manage the team and cannot forbid team members from doing something and cannot order them to do certain things. The Development Team identify the tasks and assign them gradually throughout the Sprint. We don't do it upfront in the beginning of the Sprint.
Pergunta 48: Correto
What is the purpose of the Sprint Review? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

A Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed.
Pergunta 49: Correto
What are the characteristics of a Product Backlog Item that is “Ready” for selection in a Sprint Planning? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Higher ordered Product Backlog items are usually clearer and more detailed than lower ordered ones. More precise estimates are made based on the greater clarity and increased detail; the lower the order, the less detail. Product Backlog items that will occupy the Development Team for the upcoming Sprint are refined so that any one item can reasonably be 'Done' within the Sprint time­-box. Product Backlog items that can be 'Done' by the Development Team within one Sprint are deemed 'Ready' for selection in a Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 50: Correto
The Product Owner manages
Pergunta 51: Correto
The items selected from the Product Backlog for the Sprint Backlog must be "ready".

Explicação

We prefer to have "ready" items at the top of the Product Backlog before Sprint Planning, which is done through Product Backlog refinement. However, nothing stops our flow of Sprints and we do not delay the Sprint because the items are not ready. In such cases, the "unready" items would be selected for the Sprint and refined during the Sprint. "Ready" items are those that are clear and small enough to fit into one Sprint.
Pergunta 52: Correto
The Agile Manifesto states that individuals and interactions are _____ processes and tools.

Explicação

We are uncovering better ways of developing software by doing it and helping others do it. Through this work we have come to value: Individuals and interactions over processes and tools; Working software over comprehensive documentation; Customer collaboration over contract negotiation; Responding to change over following a plan;
Pergunta 53: Correto
Which options are acceptable when the Product Owner wants to be informed of the progress in the middle of the Sprint? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Check the task board in the project room (if exists)
Pergunta 54: Correto
A Product Owner is
Pergunta 55: Correto
The Product Owner is accountable for the end result and therefore should have the final say over the definition of "Done".

Explicação

The development organization may have a definition of "Done" composed for all projects, in which case the team will use it as a minimum. Otherwise, the Development Team would be responsible for composing the definition of "Done". When multiple team are working on the same product, there can be more than one definition of "Done", as long as they all have the minimums required by the development organization and can create an integrated increment.
Pergunta 56: Correto
Which of the following statements best describes a Scrum Team? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Scrum Teams deliver products iteratively and incrementally, maximizing opportunities for feedback. The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master. Scrum Teams are self-organizing and cross-functional. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team. Cross-functional teams have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team.
Pergunta 57: Correto
What is typical work for a Product Owner between the end of the Sprint Planning and before the Sprint Review? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is continuous and can happen anytime. Besides that, the Product Owner is constantly in contact with the developers to make sure everything is clear. They are also in contact with the customer to understand their new requirements. Assignments and Sprint performance measurement is done by the developers and only the developers participate in the Daily Scrums. It's not common to have financial reports in Scrum.
Pergunta 58: Incorreto
The Product Owner should track the value delivered by the Development Team as a minimum
Pergunta 59: Ignorado
When a product grows, it is quite possible that the Product Owner will get help from other Product Managers and others in the organization who interact regarding the customer facing activities and knowledge of the product marketplace. Is it a good idea for the Product Owner to proxy or outsource some of their duties to these people (for example, Scrum Team facing duties)?

Explicação

When a product grows, it is quite possible that the Product Owner will get help from other Product Managers and others in the organization who interact regarding the customer facing activities and knowledge of the product marketplace. While it is fine for the Product Owner to be aided by the aforementioned people, it is NOT acceptable for him/her to attempt to proxy or outsource their Product Ownership duties, especially the Scrum Team facing duties.
Pergunta 60: Incorreto
Which of the following statements about the Scrum framework is TRUE?

Explicação

Scrum Teams are self-organizing and cross-functional. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team. Cross-functional teams have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team. The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity. The Scrum Team has proven itself to be increasingly effective for all the earlier stated uses, and any complex work.
Pergunta 61: Correto
Which KVAs (Key Value Areas) would the Product Owner consider when developing and delivering value to the marketplace? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

According to the Evidence Based Management, an Organization should focus on the following Key Value Areas (KVAs): Current Value Unrealized Value Time to Market Ability to Innovate
Pergunta 62: Correto
Who maximized the value of the Development Team's work?
Pergunta 63: Correto
The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

Explicação

The Product Owner is the sole responsible person and they even "own" the Product Backlog. Note: remember that the Sprint Backlog is owned by the Development Team. This is not however in contrast to the fact that the Product Backlog items are estimated by the developers; they provide this information to the Product Owner to be included in the Product Backlog. There are multiple implications by saying that the Product Owner "owns" the Product Backlog or is the sole responsible person, including: Only they can add items to the backlog or decompose them into smaller items; while this is done by input from the customers and developers, and even the Product Owner can delegate this responsibility to the developers. Only they can decide on the order of the items on the Product Backlog, while this is usually based on the input from customers and developers.
Pergunta 64: Correto
Which of the following is a valid service from the Scrum Master to the Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The following are the Scrum Master services to the Product Owner as described in the Scrum Guide: Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management; Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items; Understanding product planning in an empirical environment; Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value; Understanding and practicing agility; Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed. These are mainly focused on coaching/training, rather than getting involved and helping someone do a specific action. The help the Scrum Master is providing is coaching the PO to be able to manage the Product Backlog himself/herself (one of the core responsibilities of a PO). "Helping the Product Owner order the Product Backlog items..." , although not forbidden, is a short term temporary solution. The Scrum Master is not an assistant nor admin. If the Scrum Master is ordering the Product Backlog for the PO then the Scrum Master needs to evaluate why the PO is not able to do this work and seek out and solve the root cause of this issue.
Pergunta 65: Correto
How does the Definition of “Done” help to the Scrum Team? (Choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Definition of Done is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment. Guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning. Definition of Done ensures artifact transparency.
Pergunta 66: Correto
How are Product Backlog items are selected in scaled Scrum?

Explicação

The Development Teams are self-organized and it's their responsibility to select items from the Product Backlog. When there are multiple teams, all of them should do it together. They should also seek the acceptance of the Product Owner since he/she should be able to have a history of items.
Pergunta 67: Correto
The Product Owner is responsible for making the Product Backlog items clear to the developers. Therefore, when there are many Development Teams working on the same product, one person won't be enough and it might require having multiple Product Owners.

Explicação

When you have 1 project for creating 1 product, there would be only 1 Product Backlog and 1 Product Owner. Having more than one Product Backlog makes it hard to prioritize the items and having more than one Product Owner might create inconsistency in the system.
Pergunta 68: Correto
Which of the following is NOT an advantage of using Scrum to deliver projects? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Scrum is a framework for developing, delivering, and sustaining complex products. The complex domain represents the "unknown unknowns". Cause and effect can only be deduced in retrospect. We cannot determine what will cause a particular outcome but we can run some experiments to see if they move us in the right direction. This is the domain of emergent practice. Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism and employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk. Scrum makes clear the relative efficacy of your product management and work techniques so that you can continuously improve the product, the team, and the working environment.
Pergunta 69: Correto
What factors would the Product Owner take into consideration when making release decisions? (choose the best four answers)

Explicação

While Scrum doesn’t require a release to occur every Sprint, it should be noted that the more elapsed time that accumulates since the last release, the higher the risk that the product’s value will get out of line with the marketplace. Product Owners should keep this risk in the forefront of their mind. Another factor in the release decision is whether your customers can actually absorb your frequent releases. Most customers approach this upgrade decision using a common sense method of weighing the costs and benefits of the upgrade(new increment). This is all the more reason to make sure that your releases are of the utmost value, and offer relatively low absorption costs. Regardless of the benefits and costs, some customers will still be constrained, so this constraint should be a consideration when deciding how often or whether to release. The Product Owner is the one and only person who can decide whether to release the latest increment of the product. The Increment is “Done” by its definition.
Pergunta 70: Correto
What should the Product Owner do mid Sprint, when the Development Team realises they will not able to finish all of the forecasted Sprint Backlog items?
Pergunta 71: Correto
The Product Owner should use user stories for composing the Product Backlog items.

Explicação

It's a good idea to use user stories for describing the Product Backlog items but it's not required.
Pergunta 72: Correto
An eight-hour Sprint Planning is the maximum time-box for Sprints that can be ... long. (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Sprint Planning has a maximum time-box of 8 hours for one-month Sprints and usually shorter for shorter Sprints. The keyword here is usually. A common practice in some teams is to proportionally shorten the Sprint Planning according to the length of the Sprint time-box. ie 4 hour Sprint Planning for 2 week Sprints; 2 hour Sprint Planning for a 1 week Sprint; etc. This is a localized practice rather than a rule as each team's situation will differ. Thus, the time-box for Sprint Planning is limited to 8 hours regardless of the length of the Sprint. Each team is responsible for maximize the value of the team's time and effort spent within Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 73: Correto
What are the benefits of having a solid product vision? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Product vision is not explained in the Scrum Guide and is not a mandatory part of the framework. However, it's recommended to have one and use it to help align the decisions and development with the expected outcome of the project.
Pergunta 74: Correto
What are the limitations on the decisions of the Product Owner for the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering and is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog. For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions.
Pergunta 75: Correto
A Product Owner should handle all the responsibilities of a traditional project manager.

Explicação

Many of the project management responsibilities are not done by a Product Owner; e.g. estimations and process management.
Pergunta 76: Correto
Which of the following activities is NOT usually Time-boxed?

Explicação

The Scrum Team will decide how and when refinement is done. Refinement can include specific refinement events that usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team. However, Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.
Pergunta 77: Correto
How should a Product Backlog item be refined before its development begins? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Items at the top of the Product Backlog need to be small enough to fit into one Sprint. They also need to be clear and detailed enough but not too detailed (eg not with all the tasks identified), as it would be upfront planning. Tasks are created gradually during the Sprint. Product Backlog items require multiple expertise and usually done by multiple developers. Therefore, they are not assigned. Tasks, however, are assigned to the individual developers, while everyone stays accountable.
Pergunta 78: Correto
What is the typical sequence of Scrum events? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

A Sprint begins with Sprint Planning, then there are several Daily Scrums followed by a Sprint Review and then Sprint Retrospective. This ordering improves empiricism.
Pergunta 79: Correto
Development Teams should be set stretch goals by the Product Owner as part of Sprint Planning
Pergunta 80: Correto
What is the Scrum Master's role during the Daily Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Scrum Master is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. Scrum Masters do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory, practices, rules, and values. The Scrum Master ensures that the Development Team has the Daily Scrum, but the Development Team is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum. The Scrum Master teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

Teste 11 deki@gmail - Scrum Product Owner Certification PSPO I | Exam Prep 2021

Pergunta 1: Correto
Which of the following can be considered for ordering the Product Backlog? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

All of the items can be taken into consideration when ordering the Product Backlog items as they all have impact on the flow of value.
Pergunta 2: Incorreto
Who's responsible for change management in Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

There are many changes in Scrum projects and have to be managed. The management is much easier than in traditional projects because the development is not dependent on upfront planning and design. The Product Owner is responsible for collecting the feedback and applying it in the Product Backlog which is a type of change management.
Pergunta 3: Correto
The Scrum Master is accountable for releasing the most valuable product possible.

Explicação

The Product Owner is accountable for releasing the most valuable product possible. The Development Team is accountable for doing the work. The Scrum Master is accountable for ensuring Scrum is adopted and used properly.
Pergunta 4: Correto
Who defines the Definition of Done?

Explicação

The ones doing the work are the best ones to define the level of quality of the work and what it means to be done.
Pergunta 5: Correto
What can you take into consideration when ordering items in the Product Backlog? (Choose all that apply)

Explicação

When maximizing the flow of value, the Product Owner needs to consider the business value, user's unmet needs, effort to complete the item, availability of Development Team members and skills, dependencies within the product and outside of the product, etc. The Development tools and techniques and the availability of the Scrum Master has no direct impact on the flow of value.
Pergunta 6: Correto
A Product Backlog is never complete
Pergunta 7: Correto
Revenue generated is the primary measure of Product value.

Explicação

Defined measures of value will vary by organization. For example, the EBM looks at 4 Key Value Areas where all 4 areas contribute to an organization’s ability to deliver business value. Revenue is only a single measure of many that the Product Owner must take into consideration.
Pergunta 8: Correto
Which of the following pairs, related to Tuckman’s Model of Group Dynamics, is INCORRECTLY matched?

Explicação

The forming–storming–norming–performing model of group development was first proposed by Bruce Tuckman in 1965, who said that these phases are all necessary and inevitable in order for the team to grow, face up to challenges, tackle problems, find solutions, plan work, and deliver results.
Pergunta 9: Correto
What would a Product Owner typically do during a Sprint? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

The Product Owner works with the Development Team and internal/external stakeholders to diligently manage the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions of the Product and the business.
Pergunta 10: Correto
What best describes an Increment? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint plus the value of the increments of all previous Sprints. This creates the best overall view of the increment to be delivered.
Pergunta 11: Correto
As Scrum Teams mature, what is expected to happen?
Pergunta 12: Correto
During the Sprint, you receive a request from an influential stakeholder to add two new features needed for the product. As a Product Owner, what actions would be appropriate? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Part of the Product Owner's responsibility is to listen the the stakeholders for feedback and input. This process is ongoing as long as the product exists. The Product Owner is accountable optimizing the flow of value and the entire organization must respect his/her decisions. If he feels an item is highly critical and time sensitive, it's ok for him to ask the Development Team if they can add it to the active Sprint. But it's up to the Development Team to decide if they can do it and make aware the risks. The Product Owner cannot force the team to work on something they are not capable of doing. He/she also must be aware and accept risks associated with making this change.
Pergunta 13: Correto
The purpose of the Sprint Review is
Pergunta 14: Incorreto
The Development Team should be able to explain to how it intends to work as a self­-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.

Explicação

By the end of the Sprint Planning, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment. This is included into the Sprint Backlog as the Development Team's plan on how they will deliver the planned work.
Pergunta 15: Correto
Of the following activities, which is the best way to promote transparency of an Increment?
Pergunta 16: Incorreto
As a Product Owner, if you had access to the following individuals, what sources might you consult with when considering the value of a product?
Pergunta 17: Correto
An organization that is new to Scrum wants to know how the interactions should be between the Product Owner and the Stakeholders. Which statement best describes the relationship? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

There is a lot of knowledge, experience and there are many interesting perspectives from others you can learn from. So, estimate the value of Product Backlog Items together with your stakeholders and Scrum Team. Involve your customers, involve your users and don't forget your Development Team(s). They may have very interesting viewpoints to learn from, which could lead to you delivering much more value, with much less effort.
Pergunta 18: Correto
Stakeholders should hold their feedback until the Sprint Review occurs.

Explicação

Stakeholder feedback is taken into account at anytime. This increases the Scrum Team's opportunity to quickly adapt if needed.
Pergunta 19: Correto
Which is NOT a true statement about the Definition of Done?
Pergunta 20: Correto
What key value measures can a Product Owner use to improve the Current Value of the product? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

Evidence-Based Management (EBM) is an empirical approach that provides organizations with the ability to measure the value they deliver to customers and the means by which they deliver that value, and to use those measures to guide improvements in both.
Pergunta 21: Correto
You are a Product Owner of a Scrum Team. In the middle of the Sprint, you find out that the Development Team will not be able to finish the Sprint Backlog by the end of the Sprint. What is the most appropriate response? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

As a collaborator, the Product Owner, is responsible for engaging with and closely working together with the Development Team(s). He/she supports them in optimizing the work it performs in order to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.
Pergunta 22: Correto
All Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.

Explicação

Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams. Although having Sprints that are aligned can be helpful, it's more important that the teams are able to integrate their increments by the end of their Sprints. Two teams that have different Sprint dates and are able to integrate their increments will deliver value more effectively than two teams with aligned Sprint dates and cannot integrate their increments.
Pergunta 23: Correto
Which of the following is not a time-boxed Scrum event? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Daily Scrum is exclusively created for the Scrum Framework and has a clearly defined owner, time-box, and purpose. The Daily Standup can vary depending on the context that it is being used. When using Scrum, it is recommended that you use the term "Daily Scrum" for the event. This helps with alignment and understanding of the event and reduces confusing if the terminology is not changed. Using the term "Daily Standup" in Scrum may create conflict on the purpose of the event and how the event is run.
Pergunta 24: Correto
Why is it important for the Product Owner to have awareness of the Definition of 'Done'? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

When a Product Backlog item or an Increment is described as 'Done', everyone must understand what 'Done' means. Scrum Team members must have a shared understanding of what it means for work to be complete, to ensure transparency. This is the definition of 'Done' for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment. The 'done' Increment must be useable, so a Product Owner may choose to release it.
Pergunta 25: Correto
Who is primarily responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined by the Scrum Guide? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Scrum Master is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. Scrum Masters do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory, practices, rules, and values.
Pergunta 26: Correto
A team should NOT start the first Sprint until the Product Owner has detailed all of the Product Backlog items in the Product Backlog.

Explicação

The earliest development of the Product Backlog lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. It evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves and constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful.
Pergunta 27: Correto
When is the development of a Product Backlog item considered finished?
Pergunta 28: Correto
Which two attributes could be OPTIONAL for a Product Backlog Item? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Product Backlog items will have the attributes of a description, order, estimate, and value. Product Backlog items often include test descriptions that will prove its completeness when 'Done'. Not all Product Backlog items will have dependencies but they should be identified if known.
Pergunta 29: Correto
When can the Product Backlog be revised? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. There is no set period for when it can be changed. Changes are constant and immediate.
Pergunta 30: Correto
It is good practice to have at least two Product Owners on larger projects.

Explicação

When you have 1 project for creating 1 product, there would be only 1 Product Backlog and 1 Product Owner. Having more than one Product Backlog makes it hard to prioritize the items and having more than one Product Owner might create inconsistency in the system.
Pergunta 31: Correto
Why should the Product Owner care that the Development Team complies to its Definition of Done?

Explicação

The quality of the product can impact the cost of ownership and sustainability of the product.
Pergunta 32: Correto
What are two valid options if the Product Owner is not accessible? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the flow of value and the value the Development Team does. Without a Product Owner, the team would not be employing Scrum. Self-organized teams are empowered to make and rely on their own decisions when and if they feel they are at risk of being impeded.
Pergunta 33: Correto
How frequently should the Product Owner communicate and re­iterate his product vision to the Scrum Team and the product's Key Stakeholders? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner should communicate and reiterate his product vision to the Scrum Team and the Key Stakeholders early and often, reminding all involved of how that vision aims to maximize the value of the product and of the work the Scrum Team performs. This helps with alignment, motivation, and engagement.
Pergunta 34: Correto
It is good practice to have more than one Product Owners on large scale Product development efforts.

Explicação

The Product Owner is one person, not a committee, but the Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog. In order to reduce complexity, one Product Backlog will have one Product Owner regardless of the size. The Product Owner may delegate some of his/her work if needed, but still remains accountable.
Pergunta 35: Correto
At the end of a Sprint, one of the items that is in progress does not meet the Definition of Done. What should happen the item? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Product Backlog items are either 'done' or 'not done.' This the helps with transparency, reduces complexity and allows for improved empiricism.
Pergunta 36: Correto
Product Backlog items have the attributes of: (choose all that apply)
Pergunta 37: Correto
Who must ensure the Product Backlog is refined to a state that it is ready?
Pergunta 38: Incorreto
Every Product Backlog item should be created solely by the Product Owner. Only after, and at the Product Owner's discretion, can the Development Team add details.

Explicação

The Product Owner is solely responsible and accountable for the decisions in the Product Backlog. However, the legwork of managing the Product Backlog might be fully delegated to the Development Team, so it is quite possible that the Product Owner might not ever create or write a User Story or Product Backlog Item.
Pergunta 39: Correto
Under what circumstances would a Sprint be cancelled?

Explicação

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment. A Sprint would be cancelled if the Sprint Goal becomes obsolete. This might occur if the company changes direction or if market or technology conditions change. In general, a Sprint should be cancelled if it no longer makes sense given the circumstances.
Pergunta 40: Incorreto
What are the best ways for a Product Owner to manage value for the Product? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

As a Product Owner, releasing new features and/or functionalities every Sprint, maximizes value for your customers and users. You have to release a Product to customers/users, in order to find out if you have delivered value for them and to learn what they find valuable and feed the information into the Product Backlog.
Pergunta 41: Correto
A Product Owner is applying value estimations to Product Backlog items. Is this acceptable? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

As a Product Owner, find a Key Value Indicator (KVI) for your product, which can be measured early and often. Ensure that you deliver work that really has an impact on your KVI(s), so that you are consciously steering on value. There is no way you can 'determine' the value of a Product Backlog Item upfront. You could make an estimate, you can take a guess, but you can't 'determine' the value. Keep in mind that something is valuable, when you've released a Done Product Increment to customers/users, and they've told you that the work you've delivered is valuable.
Pergunta 42: Correto
The most suitable time to acquire customer feedback is at the Sprint Review.

Explicação

The most opportune time to collect feedback is when it's available. The sooner the better. Limiting the time to collect the feedback will also limit opportunities to adapt. Waiting until the Sprint Review to collect feedback can lead to missed opportunities. Especially, if Sprints are long (ie 4 weeks).
Pergunta 43: Correto
What is the Product Owner's role regarding the Definition of Done?
Pergunta 44: Correto
In what context can Scrum be applied? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

Scrum has been used to develop software, hardware, embedded software, networks of interacting function, autonomous vehicles, schools, government, marketing, managing the operation of organizations and almost everything we use in our daily lives, as individuals and societies. Scrum has been used extensively, worldwide, to: Research and identify viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities; Develop products and enhancements; Release products and enhancements, as frequently as many times per day; Develop and sustain Cloud (online, secure, ondemand) and other operational environments for product use; and, Sustain and renew products.
Pergunta 45: Correto
How can the Product Owner benefit from having time-boxed Sprints? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk. As a Product Owner, you have to release a Product to customers/users early and often, in order to find out if you have delivered value for them. This can be done at least every Sprint.
Pergunta 46: Correto
After the Product Owner formulates his Product Vision and the tactics to bring this vision to life, it should not be changed until after the upcoming Produce release.

Explicação

The Product Owner should never be afraid to change the vision or tactics based on marketplace changes. Being able to strategically re-pivot and capture value in new and different ways is one of the key benefits of an Agile approach.
Pergunta 47: Correto
Which of the following statements on Time-boxing is INCORRECT?

Explicação

Time-boxing is allotting a fixed, maximum unit of time for an activity. Time-boxes helps everyone focus on the same problem at the same time and encourages the people who are closest to the problem to create the best possible result in the time allotted, give the current context. During the Sprint Planning the Development Team works to forecast the functionality that will be developed during the Sprint and if completed in the Sprint, would achieve the Sprint Goal. During the Sprint, the Sprint Backlog will emerge as more is discovered and learned.
Pergunta 48: Correto
An organization that is new to Scrum wants to know how the interactions should be between the Product Owner and the Development Team. Which two statements best describes the relationship? (choose the two best answers)

Explicação

The Product Owner is a servant/leader to the Development Team to help them build on the right thing (ie the envisioned Increment). The Development Team is a servant/leader to the Product Owner to help him/her make sound decisions on what the right thing is (ie Product Backlog item) and when it should be done (ie ordering of the Product Backlog).
Pergunta 49: Correto
Who is best in deciding whether to release the latest Product increment to production? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is the best person to decide whether to release the latest increment of the product as he/she is accountable for maximizing the value that the product delivers to the users.
Pergunta 50: Correto
The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Development Team.

Explicação

The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog.
Pergunta 51: Correto
Which of the following is NOT a time-boxed Scrum event?

Explicação

There are 4 events defined in Scrum (Sprint Planning, Daily Scrum, Sprint Review, and Sprint Retrospective). The Product Backlog Refinement meeting (formally known as Grooming) is an optional event. The Scrum Team will decide if it is needed and when it is done. Refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team. However, Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.
Pergunta 52: Correto
What impact does technical debt have on the value that the Product Owner wants delivered by the Product? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Technical debt is a concept in programming that reflects the extra development and testing work that arises when “quick and dirty” solutions result in later remediation. It creates an undesirable impact on the delivery of value and an avoidable increase in waste and risk.
Pergunta 53: Correto
Who is ultimately responsible for estimating the effort needed to complete Product Backlog items? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

As a collective, the Development Team has a complete view of the work needed to transform Product Backlog items into potentially releasable product Increments.
Pergunta 54: Correto
The Product Backlog is reordered by the stakeholders at the Sprint Review.

Explicação

The Sprint Review is an opportunity for the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint and collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value. The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog and provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning. It is not the stakeholder's responsibility to reorder the Product Backlog.
Pergunta 55: Correto
What is the best description of a product Increment? (choose the best answer)
Pergunta 56: Correto
Scrum users must frequently inspect artifacts and progress toward the product's vision and goals. In what ways does a Product Owner take the lead on detecting desirable/undesirable variances? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The Sprint Review includes the Scrum Team and key stakeholders invited by the Product Owner. During the Sprint Review the Product Owner: Explains what Product Backlog items have been 'Done' and what has not been 'Done'; Discusses the Product Backlog as it stands and any projections to date;
Pergunta 57: Correto
How will an organization know the outcomes of a product that is currently in development? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

As a Product Owner, releasing new features and/or functionalities every Sprint, maximizes value for your customers and users. You have to release a Product to customers/users, in order to find out if you have delivered value for them and to learn what they find valuable.
Pergunta 58: Correto
All of the items on the Product Backlog must be written by the Product Owner before they are handed over to the Development Team.

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog. Who adds the items and how they are added to the Product Backlog vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.
Pergunta 59: Correto
What must be delivered, by the Development Team, at the end of any Sprint?

Explicação

Failure to produce an Increment results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt the product.
Pergunta 60: Correto
The Product Owner's role is multifaceted. Which of the following are valid Product Owner stances? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

The behaviors of the Product Owner role can be reflected in (but not limited to) the following stances: Product Value Maximizer Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement Product Marketplace Expert The Event Facilitator and Scrum evangelist would be considered stances of a Scrum Master.
Pergunta 61: Correto
Which of the following is TRUE about the Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is accountable for optimizing the flow of value that the Development Team creates and the value that the Product delivers to its users. This is done through effective Product Backlog management. The Product Owner does not manage the team and is entrusted to make the best decisions for the Product and business.
Pergunta 62: Correto
All work to be done by the Development Team must come from the Product Backlog.

Explicação

All work to be done by the Development Team must ultimately come from the Product Backlog as it is the single source of truth for any changes to be made to the product. How the work is done can change, evolve, and emerge as the work is being done.
Pergunta 63: Correto
When should the Product Owner release each Increment to the end users?

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product and the work done by the Development team thus will release the Increment based on when he/she thinks is best.
Pergunta 64: Correto
What are considered attributes of a Product Backlog? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it only lays out the initially known and best understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.
Pergunta 65: Correto
You are a Product Owner who is also responsible for monitoring the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership). What are the costs that can influence the TCO of the product being built? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is in charge of monitoring the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) and this entails contemplating all the investments (conception, development, operation and maintenance) to be made in the product. For example, quality impacts the TCO and life expectancy of a product. Getting software out of the door quickly with poor quality may achieve a short-term win but it incurs technical debt. The software becomes difficult to extend and maintain. This results in high cost and long lead times for new functionality. And software with poor quality often has to be replaced sooner rather then later resulting in a short life expectancy and a poor return on investment. A Product Owner is ultimately concerned with Maximizing Return On Investment (ROI), optimizing Total Cost of Ownership (TCO), and capitalizing on product Agility.
Pergunta 66: Correto
An increase of the Development Team's velocity and productivity is a positive sign of success as a Product Owner.

Explicação

Organizations adopting agile product delivery practices can easily lose sight of their real goal of improving the value they deliver, by focusing on improving activities and outputs instead of on business outcomes. Monitoring only the direct use of practices does not provide the best evidence of effectiveness; for example, tracking a Development Team's velocity says nothing about whether that team is actually delivering something that is useful to customers or users.
Pergunta 67: Correto
Which of the following is a benefit of the agile process promoting early and frequent feedback? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Having short feedback loops helps teams rapidly respond and adapt to changes.
Pergunta 68: Incorreto
Peter is new to the Product Owner role. He wants to know what sources can be used to gather information about product value. What can be a valid source? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

As a Product Owner, there is a lot of knowledge, experience and many interesting perspectives from others you can learn from. So, estimate the value of Product Backlog Items together with your stakeholders and Scrum Team. Also, involve your customers, users, and your Development Team(s). They may have very interesting viewpoints to learn from, which could lead to you delivering much more value, with much less effort.
Pergunta 69: Correto
Which would best describe the essence of Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The essence of Scrum is a small team of people. The individual team is highly flexible and adaptive. These strengths continue operating in single, several, many, and networks of teams that develop, release, operate and sustain the work and work products of thousands of people. They collaborate and interoperate through sophisticated development architectures and target release environments.
Pergunta 70: Correto
There should be a release for every Sprint.

Explicação

Every Increment should be potentially releasable but you don't have to release it every time.
Pergunta 71: Incorreto
Multiple Scrum Teams working on the same product should integrate their Increments every Sprint.

Explicação

Because we're developing complex products in a complex environment, there are unknowns that the teams will not be able to foresee. There are technical dependencies that the PO will not know and some dependencies that won't be discovered until the team tries to make the increment shippable. Thus, a way to reduce the risk of being blocked or blocking another team is to integrate as often as possible in order to address any issues early on.
Pergunta 72: Correto
Select the two focus areas that are not considered in executing Value Driven Development by the Product Owner ? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

In executing Value Driven Development, the Product Owner must consider the focus areas of: Product Value Maximizer Product Visionary Product Marketplace Expert Product Release Decision Maker Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement Other Product Owner role Considerations
Pergunta 73: Correto
When multiple teams are working on the same product, the Product Owner should maintain separate Product Backlogs for each team.

Explicação

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. For one product there is one Product Backlog, regardless of the number of teams working on the product. This increases transparency and reduces complexity.
Pergunta 74: Correto
Scrum requires having a new Increment of working software released to end users at the end of every Sprint

Explicação

The Product Owner decides when it is best to release Increments.
Pergunta 75: Correto
Peter is new to the Product Owner role. He understands that the Product Owner is accountable for Product Backlog. However, he is unsure about how to minimize waste when developing and sustaining the Product Backlog. What advise would you give Peter? (Choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Waste consumes valuable resources and makes it harder to focus on what’s important. Minimize the amount of detailed Product Backlog items and only include items in the backlog that are essential for creating a successful product. Ensure that just-enough high-priority items are detailed just in time for the next Sprint Planning meeting. As a consequence, Product Backlog items are progressively decomposed and refined – from Sprint to Sprint. Lower-priority items stay coarse-grained and sketchy until their priority changes. Jointly discovering and describing Product Backlog items avoids handing off requirements to the team. It ensures clarity of the requirements thereby reducing defects.
Pergunta 76: Correto
What pre-requisites must be met before a Sprint Planning can start? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Scrum events should be held at the same time each Sprint. This helps with consistency, making improvements to the process, and reducing waste. In an event that a Scrum event cannot begin at the Scrum Team's designated time, they will need to inspect and adapt the event itself in order to maximize the effectiveness of the event. Delaying events is a short-term solution and results in reducing the team's opportunities to improve.
Pergunta 77: Correto
Before a Product Backlog item is selected in Sprint Planning, the Product Owner must create clear and unambiguous acceptance criteria for each Product Backlog item.

Explicação

At a minimum, there should be just enough information for the Development Team to start the work. As the work progresses, new information will emerge and the Scrum Team will adapt accordingly. Sometimes, it's not possible to predict all of the necessary work needed to make something done and would require starting and frequently inspecting and adapting.
Pergunta 78: Incorreto
Why does Scrum require having a new Increment of working software done at the end of every Sprint?

Explicação

Working software is the primary measure of progress. Failure to produce an Increment at the end of the Sprint will reduce transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt the product.
Pergunta 79: Correto
Who would be considered typical Key Stakeholders? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

According to the Scrum Glossary, a stakeholder is “a person external to the Scrum Team with a specific interest in and knowledge of a product that is required for incremental discovery. Represented by the Product Owner and actively engaged with the Scrum Team at Sprint Review.” Typically, they fall into one of three broad categories: The Users – The human people who actually use the product under development The External Customers – The people responsible for paying to use the product The Internal Customers – The people responsible for making the funding decisions for the product development effort
Pergunta 80: Correto
What can a Burn­-down chart show? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Burn-down charts show the evolution of remaining effort against time. A Sprint ends when the time-box is over. Burn-down charts are not an effective tool for measuring team performance.

Teste 12 deki@gmail - Scrum Product Owner Certification PSPO I | Exam Prep 2021

Pergunta 1: Correto
What percentage of the Product Owner's time should be dedicated to the team?

Explicação

The amount of time required depends on the project and its environment. The Product Owner needs to spend as much time as needed to do all of their responsibilities, which results in maximizing the value. Not that the only reason for the Product Owner to spend time with the developers is not refinement but also Sprint Planning, answering questions during the Sprint, helping developers adjust their work, etc.
Pergunta 2: Correto

Who is responsible for planning releases ? Choose only ONE best answer.

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for planning releases based on the customer and end-user interests.
Pergunta 3: Correto
Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory and one of the pillars that upholds its implementation is transparency. In what ways can you maximize transparency of the Product Backlog?
Pergunta 4: Correto
A Scrum Team must have a Product Owner and Scrum Master.

Explicação

A Product Owner or Scrum Master can be dedicated to one team OR participate as a member on more than one team. How much time they spend with each team will directly impact effectiveness of the team.
Pergunta 5: Correto
What does the "cone of uncertainty" tell us about Scrum projects?

Explicação

The "cone of uncertainty" is about the fact that uncertainty is highest at the beginning of the project and reduced as we progress. This uncertainty can be about the duration, requirements, etc.
Pergunta 6: Correto
Why should there be only one Product Owner per product?

Explicação

When it's about 1 project and 1 product, there should be only 1 Product Backlog and 1 Product Owner. It makes the prioritization and accountability simpler. Remember that the Product Owner does not manage the team.
Pergunta 7: Correto
Which best describes the management style used in the Scrum framework?

Explicação

In Scrum, decisions are made locally and in a collaborative method. Two of the key characteristics of an effective Scrum Team is being cross-functional and self-organized. The Scrum Team is entrusted to make decisions they believe are best considering the situations and challenges they face. In a more traditional process, the activities and decisions are controlled by a central authority. The central authority is typically a person or group outside of the team or a single person within the team. Hence, Scrum's management style is best described as being decentralized. This accelerates decision making and unlocks the team's creativity and problem solving abilities. The best architectures, requirements, and designs emerge from self-organizing teams. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work and has proven itself to be increasingly effective for any complex work.
Pergunta 8: Correto
What would be the main benefits of self-organization?

Explicação

Self-organized teams allow teams to creatively solve difficult problems, be accountable for the work they do, and commit to each other and the goals of the team.
Pergunta 9: Correto
How small should a selected Product Backlog item be at Sprint Planning? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, in which a "Done", useable, and potentially releasable product Increment is created. Failure to produce an increment results in a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt. Therefore, "ready" items should be small enough to be done within a Sprint in order to reduce the risk of failing to produce an increment.
Pergunta 10: Correto
Who is responsible for representing the interests of the stakeholders?

Explicação

The Product Owner is constantly in contact with the stakeholders and reflects the results in the Product Backlog.
Pergunta 11: Correto
A client has just hired you to lead a new project where three teams new to Scrum will be working on their new product. What would you propose?

Explicação

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.
Pergunta 12: Correto
A Scrum Team has been working on the same product for 12 Sprints. What would likely be the immediate impact on the original Scrum Team if two new Scrum Teams are to be added the same product?

Explicação

The productivity of the original Scrum Team would likely decrease as they would need to take time to assist and support the new Scrum Teams in order for them to perform optimally.
Pergunta 13: Correto
Peter is new to the Product Owner role and is asking you for advice on how to maximize the value of the product being delivered by the team. What advice would be appropriate? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The above activities are reflected in the preferred stances of a Product Owner. These stances are defined as: The Visionary, The Collaborator, The Customer Representative, The Decision Maker, The Experimenter and The Influencer
Pergunta 14: Incorreto
At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What should the Scrum Team do? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog makes visible all the work that the Development Team identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. To ensure continuous improvement, it includes at least one high priority process improvement identified in the previous Retrospective meeting.
Pergunta 15: Correto
The flow of value is reflected in the ordering of the Product Backlog. The higher ordered Product Backlog items is work that the Product Owner wants to have done in an upcoming Sprint. These items are usually clearer and has more detail than lower ordered ones and should be Ready enough to be presented during the Sprint Planning. What is the best description of Ready Product Backlog items?
Pergunta 16: Correto
Scrum has a role called Project Manager.

Explicação

The Scrum Framework only recognizes 3 roles although others may be needed to help the team build the most valuable product possible.
Pergunta 17: Correto
The Sprint Review is no more than a demo of the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint. Is this statement correct? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

No. The Sprint Review contains much more activities to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog. For example: The Product Owner also explains what has not been “Done”; The entire group collaborates on what to do next, so that the Sprint Review provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning; Review of the timeline, budget, potential capabilities, and marketplace for the next anticipated releases of functionality.
Pergunta 18: Correto
Which of the following is the best response from the Product Owner when the developers have difficulty understanding the expectations in the middle of the Sprint?

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for spending enough time with the Development Team to ensure the items are clear and understood. The Daily Scrums are only for the Development Team members. Others may attend but they won't participate.
Pergunta 19: Correto
Who is accountable for the final order of the items in the Product Backlog?
Pergunta 20: Correto
Select the correct Scrum Team roles defined in Scrum.

Explicação

The Scrum Framework only recognizes these 3 roles although others may be needed to help the team build the most valuable product possible.
Pergunta 21: Incorreto
As a Product Owner, how much of your time must be dedicated to be with the Development Team? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

A Product Owner must spend as much time as needed with the Development Team. If the Development Team needs clarification, runs into issues, or needs anything from the Product Owner, he/she needs to be available so that the team can continue sprinting and reduce the risk of having a failed Sprint.
Pergunta 22: Correto
When is a Product Backlog item "ready" for selection in a Sprint Planning meeting?

Explicação

Items at the top of the Product Backlog should be small enough to fit in one Sprint. They should also be clear and detailed enough but not too detailed (eg with all the tasks identified), as it would be an upfront planning. Tasks are created gradually during the Sprint. The Scrum Guide doesn't recognize a "definition of ready" concept.
Pergunta 23: Incorreto
What would be the best action to do if the Scrum Team has identified several important process improvement items during the Sprint Retrospective?
Pergunta 24: Correto
At the eighth Sprint Review, the stakeholders are upset that the product being built is not what they expected and will incur additional costs that was not planned for. What may have led to this?

Explicação

Scrum requires significant aspects of the process to be visible to those responsible for the outcome. This includes transparency with internal and external stakeholders. Although, the Scrum Guide does not directly state that the Scrum Master is responsible for ensuring transparency it is implicit. The Scrum Master is responsible for the process in which Scrum is adopted and enacted. Scrum is founded on empiricism and the Scrum Master helps those inside and outside the team work in an empirical environment which includes transparency (one of the three pillars of empiricism).
Pergunta 25: Correto
Who must ensure that the product being released is delivering the most value to its users? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product resulting from work of the Development Team. Releasing product increments frequently and in short iterations enables the Product Owner to quickly measure, manage, and increase the value derived from their product delivery. This allows the Product Owner to focus on improving outcomes, reducing risks, and optimizing investments.
Pergunta 26: Incorreto
The Product Owner usually ensures value by maximizing ...

Explicação

The business value is usually connected to the return on investment (ROI) concept. When the ROI is increased, the value is normally increased as well.
Pergunta 27: Incorreto
Which of the following is emphasized in Scrum framework?

Explicação

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master. Individual team members may have specialized skills and areas of focus, but the responsibility for the success of the product belongs to the team as a whole. When the values of commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect are embodied and lived by the Scrum Team, the Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation come to life and build trust for everyone. The Scrum Team members learn and explore those values as they work with the Scrum events, roles and artifacts.
Pergunta 28: Correto
Who can change the Sprint Backlog in the middle of the Sprint?

Explicação

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog. As work is performed or completed, the estimated remaining work is updated. When elements of the plan are deemed unnecessary, they are removed.
Pergunta 29: Correto
Who takes the lead in terms of getting feedback from the Key Stakeholders in the Sprint Review? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is a vital leader in terms of getting feedback from the key stakeholders in the Sprint Review.
Pergunta 30: Correto
When should the Product Owner update the project plan?

Explicação

There's no "project plan" artifact in Scrum. The Product Backlog is a form of planning in Scrum projects and it's updated continuously (Product Backlog refinement).
Pergunta 31: Correto
What is value-based prioritization?

Explicação

Our highest priority is to satisfy the customer through early and continuous delivery of valuable software. In Scrum, this is done through ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions and optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs.
Pergunta 32: Correto
When technical debt occurs, the system will become more unstable as development progresses and code is added resulting in future work being slowed down.

Explicação

Technical debt is any shortcomings in the code. It is a natural by-product of software development (unavoidable) and can at best be managed. If neglected, it will compound and have a negative effect on the team's ability to the deliver value. A team can have an artificially high velocity by taking shortcuts or introducing technical debt into the system. This can give a false assumption about the current state of the product. It can look good on the surface but underneath can be a mess.
Pergunta 33: Correto
A person that is new to the Product Owner role is unsure how to manage the Product Backlog. He does understand that the Product Backlog contains all of the user features but he's unsure about where to put the stability requirements, performance requirements, product functionality, documentation, and fixes. What advice would you give the new Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog lists all features, functions, requirements, enhancements, and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases. Being the single source of truth for the product reduces complexity and increases transparency.
Pergunta 34: Correto
What should the Product Owner do in the middle of the Sprint when the Development Team realizes they are not able to finish all the Sprint Backlog items?

Explicação

Help the developers adjust their work and meet the Sprint Goal
Pergunta 35: Incorreto
There must be at least one action item, selected in the Sprint Retrospective, to be included in the next Sprint to work on.

Explicação

Adding the action item to the Sprint Backlog will enhance transparency and will help remind the team on the changes that would like to improve.
Pergunta 36: Correto
Technical Debt can lead to false assumptions about the current state of the system and the Increment reviewed at the end of the Sprint.

Explicação

Technical debt is any shortcomings in the code. It is a natural by-product of software development (unavoidable) and can at best be managed. If neglected, it will compound and have a negative effect on the team's ability to the deliver value. A team can have an artificially high velocity by taking shortcuts or introducing technical debt into the system. This can give a false assumption about the current state of the product. It can look good on the surface but underneath can be a mess.
Pergunta 37: Correto
On the 3rd day of a 10 day Sprint, a customer is requesting to add 2 new features to the product. As a Product Owner, which action is most appropriate? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. Often times during the development process, the Product Owner will discover and identify new product/customer needs. He/She will need to weigh the importance of the new items against the existing items in order to maximize the flow of value. Some newly discovered items may be important but might not be important enough to disrupt the active Sprint. This will of course be dependent on the overall context of the situation. The PO should not add new items to an active Sprint solely based on a customer request as he/she will need to take into account many other factors.
Pergunta 38: Correto
The Product Owner is using split testing to measure the end users' satisfaction to judge the success of the project and use the information for the remaining Sprints. Is it a right way of product ownership in Scrum?

Explicação

Scrum is based on using feedback for adaptation and letting the product evolve. The end users' direct and indirect feedback has a great role here and using split testing is a good way of measuring the results and incorporating them in the remaining Sprints. Split testing is when you use two different products for two groups of randomly selected users and measure how differently they behave.
Pergunta 39: Correto
When is the most opportune time to update the Definition of Done?
Pergunta 40: Correto
What is a good way for a Scrum Team to ensure that security concerns are addressed and transparent?

Explicação

The Product Backlog and the Definition of Done are artifacts that promote transparency.
Pergunta 41: Ignorado
The Product Backlog and the Definition of Done are artifacts that promote transparency.

Explicação

The Development Team is responsible for all work effort estimations in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Development Team by helping it understand and select tradeoffs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.
Pergunta 42: Correto
Who can do the legwork of gathering the marketplace data for the Product Owner? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner may or may not be the one doing the legwork of gathering the marketplace data, but he/she should definitely be aware of said data/research.
Pergunta 43: Correto
Which topic should NOT be discussed during the Sprint Retrospective?
Pergunta 44: Correto
If burn-down charts are used to visualize progress, what does a trendline projection through a release burn-down chart indicate? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The trendline is based on the team's average velocity and the projective completion to zero is based on the team's velocity. The burndown chart is a helpful tool for Development Teams to self-manage BUT it is not mandatory as the teams will decide the best way to manage their own progress and promote transparency.
Pergunta 45: Correto
Who's responsible for ordering the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for ordering the Product Backlog and has the final say about it. Product Owner's decisions about the Product Backlog should be respected by everyone; no one can override his/her decisions. The Product Owner's decisions can be influenced by any stakeholder but the last say still belongs to the Product Owner.
Pergunta 46: Correto
How would the Product Backlog be impacted by the changes in the environment in which the product will be used?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a dynamic concept that is not completely composed in the beginning of the project (or any other time) and is never made static by baselining. The Product Backlog always changes to reflect the feedback from the customer, end users, market and their environment. It's fair to say that the whole framework is designed in a way that enables such a responsive Product Backlog.
Pergunta 47: Correto
Which of the following is an advantage of having the whole team responsible for quality? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The focus of agile teams is shifted towards the outcome rather than the process that produces the output. The outcomes for the project is the result of collaborative efforts of the team as a whole.
Pergunta 48: Correto
The three pillars of empirical process control consist of:

Explicação

These 3 pillars uphold every implementation of the empirical process control. Without them, Scrum cannot be implemented as intended.
Pergunta 49: Correto
Who is responsible for the monitoring of the remaining work towards the Project Goal? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.
Pergunta 50: Correto
The Development Team is ready to start the first Sprint, while the Product Backlog is not complete yet. What should the Product Owner do?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a dynamic concept that is never complete. You don't have to have all the items identified before starting the first Sprint.
Pergunta 51: Correto
When should the Sprint Retrospective happen?
Pergunta 52: Correto
Peter, a Project Manager, has raised concerns about your Scrum Team's productivity and progress towards the objectives. Which is the best way to respond to Peter's concerns?

Explicação

One of the key pillars that support the empirical process control is Transparency. Transparency will help manage stakeholder expectations and allow the teams to effectively adapt if and when needed.
Pergunta 53: Incorreto
Who is responsible for creating of the Definition of 'Done'? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

If the definition of 'Done' for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If 'done' for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of 'Done'.
Pergunta 54: Correto
Which of the following can be the basis for ordering the Product Backlog?

Explicação

Product Backlog items are ordered based on their value which is assumed to be the same as the Product Owner's need. It depends on the project and Scrum doesn't provide a system for determining value; it's all up to the Product Owner. Product Backlog items are supposed to be non-technical and independent; so, there would be no dependency in the way of ordering. Both risk and complexity can influence the business value but they are not considered directly for ordering the items.
Pergunta 55: Correto
What is the Scrum Master's responsibility during a Sprint Retrospective?
Pergunta 56: Correto
Doing your best and helping other Scrum Team members demonstrates which of the following? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

People personally commit to achieving the goals of the Scrum Team by doing their best and helping others.
Pergunta 57: Incorreto
What best describes the Sprint Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.
Pergunta 58: Correto
What should the Product Owner do in the middle of the Sprint when the Development Team realizes they are not able to finish all the Sprint Backlog items?

Explicação

It is OK if some of the items are not done until the end of the Sprint. What we have in the Sprint Backlog is our best guess on what we can deliver. If there's a pressure on the developers to finish everything, they will start adding margins to their estimates which turns into less productivity because of the Parkinson's law. When the Development Team realizes they cannot finish everything, they get help from the Product Owner to adjust their work (tasks) to ensure they will deliver maximum value by the end of the Sprint. Remember that they get help from the Product Owner to make better decisions; the Product Owner doesn't make the adjustments directly. The Product Backlog items in the Sprint Backlog are not added or removed during the Sprint.
Pergunta 59: Correto
What is the Product Owner's responsibility during a Sprint Retrospective?

Explicação

In order for the Scrum Team to improve, all members must attend.
Pergunta 60: Correto
Which Scrum Value impacts trust? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Without trust, team members will have difficulties acting and behaving in the ways that reflect the Scrum values and how effective they apply empiricism.
Pergunta 61: Correto
A Development Team is waiting for a specific software component that they need to integrate and use. The component should be ready in two months. The Product Backlog items with highest priorities depend on this specific component. What should the Product Owner do? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The ordering of the Product Backlog is a key mechanism for reducing and eliminating dependencies. Usually items with external dependencies are not considered “Ready” for selection unless the other team is at the Sprint Planning to provide their support. Development Teams should deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint.
Pergunta 62: Correto
What is the typical size of items in a Sprint Backlog when compared to the average size of items in the Product Backlog?

Explicação

Items on the bottom of the Product Backlog will not be developed soon, therefore, there's no need to spend time breaking them down into smaller items. When they move to the top of the Product Backlog, they are usually made smaller and more detail will be added to them. Therefore, the items on the top of the Product Backlog are usually smaller than those at the bottom. Since the Sprint Backlog items come from the top of the Product Backlog, they would be smaller than the average size of Product Backlog items.
Pergunta 63: Correto
Is the Product Owner optional at the Sprint Retrospective?

Explicação

In order for the Scrum Team to improve, all members must attend.
Pergunta 64: Correto
Which of the following items should NOT be raised during a retrospective meeting?

Explicação

The Scrum Master is making an assumption that the person requires more training because he is struggling to find defects. The Scrum Master's role is to be objective and facilitate conversations in order for the team to decide if this is actually a problem and what to do if it is.
Pergunta 65: Correto
What does the word 'development' mean in the context of Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

When the words 'develop' and 'development' are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.
Pergunta 66: Correto
The Product Owner should track the performance of the project at least ...

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for measuring the performance of the project while the developers are responsible for measuring the progress of Sprints. The project performance should be measured at least once per Sprint (to be presented to the customer at the Sprint Review). The Sprint performance should be measured daily.
Pergunta 67: Correto
During the Sprint Retrospective, what topics could a Scrum Team discuss?

Explicação

The Sprint Retrospective is focused on inspecting and adapting the Scrum Team and their process.
Pergunta 68: Correto
Stakeholders are only allowed to meet with the Scrum Team at Sprint Review.

Explicação

Getting feedback from Stakeholders is a crucial activity in Scrum. Working with stakeholders frequently ensures the team to focus on the right things to build. Although it is required to have Stakeholders at Sprint Review, they can also engage with the Scrum Team during Product Backlog Refinement, Sprint Planning or during the Sprint if the Scrum Team requires it.
Pergunta 69: Correto
Who identifies the Key Stakeholders for the Product? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

In order to maximize value, the Product Owner should identify the Key Stakeholders for the Product, and involve them as necessary throughout the development effort.
Pergunta 70: Correto
Which of the following helps the Product Owner avoid waste in the project?

Explicação

There's no need to spend too much time on the items at the bottom of the Product Backlog. They can be broken down into smaller items and have more details when they move to the top of the backlog.
Pergunta 71: Correto
What is the correct time-box for the Sprint Review event?

Explicação

For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.
Pergunta 72: Correto
Scrum is based on which of the following?

Explicação

Scrum addresses complex problems in complex environments and asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. What is known can only be discovered in hindsight.
Pergunta 73: Correto
Who is the most important stakeholder that the Product Owner should satisfy? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Every product has different types of stakeholders. A stakeholder is anyone with a vested interested in the work or the product that the team is creating. This includes internal stakeholders (ie CEO, founders, sponsors, investors, etc) and external stakeholders (buyers and consumers). The items in the Product Backlog has an assumed value which is based on some type of data (research, surveys, analytics, etc). Only after the item has been delivered to the end users, can he/she validate this assumption ("validated learning"). In the process of doing this, he/she also needs to balance the expectations of all stakeholders but the market response is what will help the PO decide the next best steps. This is done through the empirical process control in which Scrum is based upon.
Pergunta 74: Correto
Which of the following is a reason for the Product Owner to pay attention to technical debt?

Explicação

Technical debt is any shortcoming in the solution that makes it less than "good enough" and might create problems in the future. When there's a lot of technical debt, the velocity might decrease in the future because developers have to deal with the shortcomings. On the other hand, this debt might even remain in the final product and make it harder and more expensive to maintain the product. Refactoring is a common way of reducing technical debt. It's when the code is improved without changing its external behavior. It's a good idea to Agile teams to spend some of their capacity on continuous refactoring. Improving the definition of "Done" is the second way of reducing technical debt.
Pergunta 75: Correto
What is the primary focus during the Sprint Review?

Explicação

The Sprint Review is focused on inspecting and adapting the product.
Pergunta 76: Correto
In order to start the first Sprint, Scrum only requires a Product Owner with enough ideas, a Development Team to execute on those ideas, and a Scrum Master to guide the process.

Explicação

In complex domains, you are only able to know the outcomes in hindsight. Empiricism, from which Scrum was founded on, asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. New knowledge will emerge as work is being done.
Pergunta 77: Incorreto
A Product Owner has a deep understanding of the market in which the Product will exist.

Explicação

The Product Owner should be expertly aware of the marketplace for the product. They should constantly be gathering and regathering information and data regarding the marketplace, so that the product value is maximized. Getting out of touch with the marketplace can be a recipe for product disaster.
Pergunta 78: Correto
How should the Product Owner forecast the completion date?

Explicação

Using a trend line in the burn-down chart can help (if the team is using that chart), as well as simple or complex formulas such as the one mentioned above. But all of these are just guides for the Product Owner and he/she should consider all factors and come up with a reliable completion date forecast.
Pergunta 79: Correto
Which group is required to be at the Sprint Review? Select the best answer.

Explicação

The Sprint Review is an inspect and adapt opportunity for both the Scrum Team and key stakeholders.
Pergunta 80: Correto
Which statement best describes Scrum?

Explicação

Frameworks allow those closest to the problem the flexibility to creatively and productively deliver products of the highest possible value. Each component of Scrum serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum's success and your usage of Scrum to develop complex projects.

Teste 13 deki@gmail - Scrum Product Owner Certification PSPO I | Exam Prep 2021

Pergunta 1: Correto
Product Backlog items that do not have complete acceptance criteria cannot be selected by the Development Team in Sprint Planning.

Explicação

Product Backlog items do not need to have complete acceptance criteria to be selected at the Sprint Planning. At a minimum, there should be just enough information for the Development Team to start the work. As the work progresses, new information will emerge and the Scrum Team will adapt accordingly. Sometimes, it's not possible to predict all of the necessary work needed to make something done and requires frequent inspecting and adapting.
Pergunta 2: Correto
Done Increments must be shipped to end users at the end of each Sprint.

Explicação

The Product Owner decides when it is best to release Increments.
Pergunta 3: Correto
What measures can help determine product success? (choose the best 3 answers)

Explicação

As a Product Owner, you have to find a balance in both delivering internal value and external value. Internal measures can be cost savings, FTE reductions, employee satisfaction, time spend on a certain (internal) process, revenues, etc. External measures can be customer satisfaction, NPS, etc.
Pergunta 4: Correto
How much time should a Product Owner spend with the team? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Product Owner is not a full-time job and the amount of time requires depends on the project and its environment. They need to spend as much time as needed to do all their responsibilities which results in maximizing the value. Note that the only reason for the Product Owner to spend time with the developers is not refactoring but also Sprint Planning, answering questions during the Sprint, helping developers adjust their work, etc.
Pergunta 5: Correto
The Product Owner should attend the Daily Scrums in a silent mode

Explicação

The Product Owner "may" attend the Daily Scrums in silent mode but they don't "have" to.
Pergunta 6: Correto
Which is the best description of the Sprint Backlog?
Pergunta 7: Correto
As a Product Owner, which of the following would be a valid point of focus? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. The Product Owner works diligently to identify these needs. The Product Owner is responsible for ensuring that the status of the project is visible, transparent, and clear to all. At any point in time, the total work remaining to reach a goal can be summed and information is made transparent to all stakeholders.
Pergunta 8: Correto
How frequently should product releases occur? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

While Scrum doesn’t require a release to occur every Sprint, it should be noted that the more elapsed time that accumulates since the last release, the higher the risk that the product’s value will get out of line with the marketplace. Product Owners should keep this risk in the forefront of their mind. Looking at it another way, the sooner you release, the sooner you can start capturing the value created by the product.
Pergunta 9: Correto
The ordering of the Product Backlog should NOT be influenced by software dependencies.

Explicação

Software dependencies could influence how the Product Owner orders Product Backlog Items. Because the Product Backlog is a single ordered list, the Product Owner will order it depending on several factors in order to maximize the value of flow. These dependencies can include other items in the Product Backlog, availability of the team members, skillset and level of expertise, other products, urgency, size, etc.
Pergunta 10: Incorreto
What is the Sprint Backlog composed of?

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is a forecast about what will be delivered in the Increment and meeting the Sprint Goal.
Pergunta 11: Correto
What are the desired benefits of a Producing Owner having a clear Product vision? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Having a clear and inspiring Product vision helps in motivating and inspiring the people involved and affected by the product. It also provides a common understanding of the direction we are working towards. It also supports the Product Owner in making choices about what to build and what not to build for the Product.
Pergunta 12: Correto
Who has the “final say” on the order of the items in the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

While the Product Owner is not the only person who may influence the ordering of the Product Backlog, the Product Owner has the 'final say' on the order of the Product Backlog, and those wanting to change the order of the Product Backlog have to influence the Product Owner to do so.
Pergunta 13: Correto
All Development Teams working on the same Product pull work from the same Product Backlog.

Explicação

Multiple Scrum Teams often work together on the same product. One Product Backlog is used to describe the upcoming work on the product.
Pergunta 14: Correto
Which of the following does NOT reflect the values of Scrum or the Scrum theory?

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is a living artifact that evolves as more is learned. Static plans do not allow room to adjust or change directions if needed.
Pergunta 15: Correto
What areas of focus can help a Product Owner make sure that the product is delivering value? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Customer Satisfaction, Customer Usage Index, and Customer or user satisfaction gap are Key Value Measures defined in the Evidence-Based Management (EBM) approach. It is an empirical approach that provides organizations with the ability to measure the value they deliver to customers.
Pergunta 16: Correto
The Product Owner determines the scope of work in the Sprint Backlog for the Development Team. (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Because the Development Team is the one doing the work and responsible for all estimates, only it can determine how much work it can do (ie projected capacity for the Sprint).
Pergunta 17: Correto
The Scrum Master should not allow the Product Owner to attend the Sprint Planning if the Product Owner is not ready with a Sprint Goal.

Explicação

The Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal during the Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 18: Correto
What is time-boxing?

Explicação

Time-boxing is allotting a fixed, maximum unit of time for an activity. It helps teams focus on the most important tasks at hand in order to achieve the objectives of the specified activity.
Pergunta 19: Correto
How does the Product Owner communicate marketplace knowledge to the Scrum Team? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

The Product Owner communicates all of this marketplace knowledge to the Scrum Team through daily ad hoc interactions as well as Product Backlog Refinement and in Sprint Reviews.
Pergunta 20: Correto
Although Burn-down charts are optional, it can be useful tool for tracking what measure? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Burn-down chart shows the amount of work left to be done, versus the time allocated for the iteration. Burn-down charts are an efficient tracking tool, because they show when the work remaining is projected to be completed if nothing changes on the backlog or Development Team. The burn-down chart is a helpful tool for Development Teams to self-manage BUT it is not mandatory as the teams will decide the best way to manage their own progress and promote transparency.
Pergunta 21: Correto
The Product Backlog is only refined during the Sprint Planning and Sprint Review.

Explicação

The Product Backlog refinement is a continuous activity; it can happen anytime.
Pergunta 22: Correto
The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for deliver the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal. When can the Development Team add, remove or change the work needed to complete the Increment and meet the Sprint Goal?

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is a living artifact that evolves as more is learned.
Pergunta 23: Correto
Your organization is new to Scrum. Management would like to understand what measures are helpful in determining if value is being delivered. As a Product Owner, which two metrics would be appropriate? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Time-to-Market is a Key Value Area (KVA) of the Evidence Based Management (EBM) approach that expresses the organization’s ability to quickly deliver new capabilities, services, or products. Customer satisfaction is a Key Value Measure (KVM) under the Current Value KVA that helps gauge customer engagement and happiness with the product.
Pergunta 24: Correto
As a Product Owner, what should be taken into consideration when ordering the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

While the Product Backlog must be ordered, ordering by priority is only one many techniques. The Product Backlog indeed must be ordered: its ordering determines the Product Backlog items' (PBI) order of delivery. The Development Team can discuss PBI ordering with the Product Owner but, in the end, the Development Team must take PBIs in Product Backlog order. However, the Product Backlog is not guaranteed to represent an ordering of PBIs by either value or priority. You can’t just assign priorities to PBIs — whether they come from ROI or importance to the business or anywhere else — and then prioritize the backlog on the basis of those relative values. As a Product Owner, you must consider the entire backlog of PBIs together. How this is done may vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.
Pergunta 25: Correto
The Product Owner must provide transparency of the project status by...

Explicação

The type of chart used is not important; they just have to measure the completed and remaining work. "Work" here refers to the cumulative size of the Product Backlog items.
Pergunta 26: Correto
The Sprint Backlog is owned by the:

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected by the Development Team and their plan for delivering the work.
Pergunta 27: Correto
Technical debt… (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Technical debt is a concept in programming that reflects the extra development work that arises when code that is easy to implement in the short run is used instead of applying the best overall solution. In other words it can be defined as the longer term consequences of poor design decisions. Technical debt is a real risk which can genuinely be incurred. It compromises long­-term quality of the Product. One of the ways of handling technical debt is recording it on the Product Backlog. So, it becomes visible to the Scrum Team.
Pergunta 28: Correto
Could the Product Owner and the Scrum Master be a part of the Development Team?

Explicação

Scrum does not prohibit the Product Owner or the Scrum Master do development work. However, it is not the best practice because it could create a conflict of interest and increase complexity.
Pergunta 29: Correto
What would be the best strategy for the Product Owner to take if multiple Stakeholders have varied interests in the product and conflicting opinions? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Inherent in the role of facilitating key stakeholder involvement is weighing and balancing the (likely) differing viewpoints of multiple stakeholders who might have varied interests in the product. The Product Owner’s responsibility is to maximize the value of the product as a whole, and this will involve an intelligent balancing of interests.
Pergunta 30: Correto
When is ownership of individual items, in the Sprint Backlog, assigned to Development Team members?

Explicação

The Development Team is responsible for doing the work in the Sprint Backlog in order to satisfy the Sprint Goal.
Pergunta 31: Correto
How can the Product Owner bring his Product vision to life? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

The Product Owner should communicate and reiterate his product vision early and often, reminding all involved of how to help maximize value. Utilizing the underlying empirical product planning features of Scrum, the Product Owner should also be ready to make strategic pivots for the product vision. This vision is brought to life in a more tactical way, via the Product Backlog and iterating towards that vision every Sprint.
Pergunta 32: Correto
Who updates the project plan in Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product and is considered the project plan for the product. This is a living artifact that evolves as more is discovered and learned.
Pergunta 33: Correto
Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.
Pergunta 34: Correto
What impact does an evolving environment have on the Product Backlog?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a living artifact that evolves and changes as more is learned.
Pergunta 35: Correto
The Scrum Team consists of: (choose all that apply)

Explicação

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master.
Pergunta 36: Correto
Which answer best describes the job of a Product Owner?

Explicação

All items are less or more applicable but remember that the main responsibility of the Product Owner is to maximize value and "working with stakeholders to identify the most important requirements" is the closest answer to "increasing value".
Pergunta 37: Correto
Who is allowed to tell the Development Team what work is needed to be done? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one is allowed to tell the Development Team to work from a different set of requirements, and the Development Team isn’t allowed to act on what anyone else says.
Pergunta 38: Correto
Each Development Team must have a different Product Owner.

Explicação

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.
Pergunta 39: Correto
Which of the following would best describe the meaning of value in a shippable increment? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

Increasing customer satisfaction will fill the user satisfaction gap between the user's desired experience and their current experience. Reducing operational costs will help improve the team's time-to-market and ability-to-innovate.
Pergunta 40: Correto
Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Development Team tracks this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Development Team can manage its progress.
Pergunta 41: Correto
Who has the authority to cancel the Sprint? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Development Team, or the Scrum Master.
Pergunta 42: Correto
How is the Product Backlog ordered?

Explicação

For the Product Owner to succeed, the entire organization must respect his or her decisions.
Pergunta 43: Correto
As a Product Owner, what are valid considerations when ordering the Product Backlog? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

The tools the Development Team uses and their practices to make the work done would not influence the ordering of the Product Backlog items. How the Development Team delivers the work is localized to the Development Team and does not effect the value of the Product Backlog items.
Pergunta 44: Correto
The Scrum Master has asked Peter, the Product Owner, to spend more time with the Scrum Team. What might have caused this? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Scrum Master must work with the Product Owner, Development Team, and other involved parties to understand if the artifacts are completely transparent. There are practices for coping with incomplete transparency; the Scrum Master must help everyone apply the most appropriate practices in the absence of complete transparency. Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed at the point of work. The reduction of this practice introduces risk and may cause deviation from the goal.
Pergunta 45: Correto
Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.
Pergunta 46: Correto
Which statement regarding the Product Backlog is FALSE?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a living artifact that evolves and changes as more is learned.
Pergunta 47: Correto
What typically happens during an active Sprint? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

During the Sprint: No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal; Quality goals do not decrease; Scope may be clarified and renegotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned.
Pergunta 48: Correto
Which concept illustrates that, as a forecast lengthens, the level of unknowns also increase? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of best case uncertainty during a project. At the beginning of a project, comparatively little is known about the product or work results, and so estimates are subject to large uncertainty. As more research and development is done, more information is learned about the project, and the uncertainty then tends to decrease.
Pergunta 49: Correto
Who can participate in the Daily Scrum? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Development Team. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.
Pergunta 50: Correto
Who is responsible for estimating the Product Backlog items?

Explicação

The ones doing the work are the best ones to create the estimations.
Pergunta 51: Correto
What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.
Pergunta 52: Correto
How much of the Development Team's capacity is usually allocated for Product Backlog refinement? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team.
Pergunta 53: Correto
The Product Owner wants to apply some non­-functional requirements to the Product. What is the best way to proceed? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Non-functional requirements describe qualities of the Product being developed. For example, the Product should be secure and extensible. The only way to meet such requirements is to have them as a part of the Definition of Done and check every Increment against these criteria.
Pergunta 54: Correto
How is architecture and infrastructure handled?
Pergunta 55: Correto
Who participates at the Sprint Review? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value.
Pergunta 56: Correto
What would naturally occur if the Product Backlog isn't adequately clear at Sprint Planning? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Having a healthy Product Backlog improves the effectiveness of Sprint Planning. Ambiguous and unclear Product Backlog items are difficult for the Development Team to estimate as they are the ones doing the work. The higher the uncertainty, the more difficult it is for the Development Team to forecast. Including the Scrum Team in Product Backlog refinement will reduce the uncertainty before running the Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 57: Incorreto
What's the most important metric for a Product Owner to measure in order to ensure the progress of the project is transparent? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The most important thing to calculate is the completion date of the project. That's also the most important thing that should be communicated with the customer. Traditional criterial such as lines of code or man-hours spent on the project are not good measures of performance. The velocity can be a guide in forecasting the completion date, but is not enough, and is not a main reporting item. Remember that "working software is the primary measure of progress." Velocity can only tell you the team's average speed. ie 30 units, 25 units, 18 units, etc. Although, it's important to know, it does not tell you where you're at during the journey. Providing forecasted completion dates will provide a better overview as it shows where you want to be and when you might arrive.
Pergunta 58: Correto
Multiple teams working on the same product should maintain separate Product Backlogs.

Explicação

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.
Pergunta 59: Correto
Pick 3 activities that can be the responsibilities of the Product Owner. (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

Designing the software is part of the development and should be done by the developers. They are self-organized and make technical decisions and volunteer for tasks (assign them to themselves). Estimation is the responsibility of the developers because they are the people who will develop the item. The rest are done by the Product Owner.
Pergunta 60: Correto
When is the Scrum Team allowed to interact with the Key Stakeholders? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for making sure that the Key Stakeholders attend and interact in the Sprint Reviews, but really the Stakeholders can be involved with the Scrum Team any time where it’s valuable to have the Stakeholder input.
Pergunta 61: Correto
The Product Owner is not sure about sustainability of the current velocity when s/he's calculating the completion date. What can be the reason?

Explicação

Technical debt is the consequence of poor system design and architecture which can happen when features are done gradually in an adaptive environment. The Development Team should be careful with it and repay it with continuous refactoring. Refactoring is improving the code without changing the external behavior. If the technical debt keeps increasing because the team doesn't refactor or have a poor definition of "Done", development will become harder day after day and it will slow down the progress on one hand and even create problems for releases on the other hand.
Pergunta 62: Correto
Which statement is true about the Product Backlog?

Explicação

Changes in business requirements, market conditions, or technology may cause changes in the Product Backlog.
Pergunta 63: Correto
Select the two Scrum Events in which people outside the Scrum Team can participate. (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The Development Team may invite other people to attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice. The Product Owner is responsible for inviting the Key Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting.
Pergunta 64: Correto
In which Scrum event do Key Stakeholders actively participate? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Key Stakeholders participate in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time.
Pergunta 65: Correto
Who is responsible for maximizing the value of the work the Development Team performs?

Explicação

While you might be tempted to select the Development Team because they are supposed to be self-organized, this is the responsibility of the Product Owner. This is so, because the value of the developers' work is highly dependent on what sequence of items they are developing and this is decided on by the Product Owner. Not that the Product Owner does not give the developers a list of items to develop during the Sprint. The Product Owner only orders the Product Backlog and the developers pick as many items as they like (from the top of the backlog) in the Sprint Planning meeting.
Pergunta 66: Correto
Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory and one of the pillars that upholds its implementation is transparency. In what ways can you maximize transparency of the Product Backlog?
Pergunta 67: Correto
Who is allowed to make changes in the Product Backlog? (choose the best two answers)

Explicação

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for the Product Backlog. However, he or she can delegate some work related to product backlog management to the Development Team.
Pergunta 68: Incorreto
Peter has been asked to take the Product Owner role of a large product initiative. 4 teams new to Scrum will be building this product. He has created the initial Product Backlog but is unsure of how to minimize the dependencies between the Scrum Teams. Which of the following would be the best advice to give Peter? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

Because the Development Teams are the ones doing the work, they would be the best ones to help the Product Owner analyze and reduce the dependencies between the work to be done.
Pergunta 69: Correto
What can be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the Product? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that might be needed in the product and is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.
Pergunta 70: Correto
Multiple teams working on the same product should have separate Product Owners.

Explicação

For a single product there is one Product Backlog. For a single Product Backlog there is one Product Owner.
Pergunta 71: Correto
How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? (choose the best three answers)

Explicação

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including: Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible; Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management; Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items; Understanding product planning in an empirical environment; Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value; Understanding and practicing agility; and, Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.
Pergunta 72: Correto
How long does the Product Backlog exists? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. If a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.
Pergunta 73: Correto
Who's responsible for engaging the stakeholders?

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for engaging them, understanding them, communicating with them and representing their interests in the Scrum Team.
Pergunta 74: Correto
Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Development Team collaborate on the details of the items in the Product Backlog. When should this activity occur?

Explicação

Refining the Product Backlog and Product Backlog items will optimize the flow of value and help make the upcoming work 'ready' for the team to work on thus they will do this 1-2 preceding Sprints ahead. Sometimes they might need to refine the items in the actual Sprint if required.
Pergunta 75: Correto
What are the artifacts in Scrum? (choose all that apply)

Explicação

The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.
Pergunta 76: Correto
What provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment? (choose the best answer)

Explicação

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment.
Pergunta 77: Correto
When can the Product Backlog be refined?

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is an ongoing process. It is done by the Product Owner and usually with collaboration from the Development Team.
Pergunta 78: Correto
Non-functional requirements (i.e. performance, security, technical debt) are typically not visible to end users or stakeholders. How would you ensure these items are transparent?
Pergunta 79: Correto
All of the items on the Product Backlog must be written by the Product Owner before they are handed over to the Development Team.

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog. Who adds the items and how they are added to the Product Backlog vary widely across organizations, Scrum Teams, and individuals.
Pergunta 80: Correto
What must be delivered, by the Development Team, at the end of any Sprint?

Explicação

Failure to produce an Increment results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt the product.

Teste 14 deki@gmail - Product Owner exam simulator (SG v.2020)

Pergunta 2: Incorreto
Transitioning from Waterfall to Scrum is a very significant step for the organization. How will the organization measure the success of Scrum implementation? Select all correct answers

Explicação

​​Customer's and end user's satisfaction is important. It’s not an abstract measure like lines of code or velocity. There can be some KPIs for measuring the value of the releases and when improved will show our success. Increased velocity is desired but it’s not directly connected to value and can be misleading. That’s the same with production cost. It’s mandatory to deliver an Increment every Sprint.​
Pergunta 4: Incorreto
The Scrum Team discusses PB items at the Sprint Planning. As the Sprint Planning meeting progresses Developers sees the workload is greater than they can handle. According to this what are two valid actions?

Explicação

When Developers realize they cannot finish everything they get help from the Product Owner to adjust their work (tasks) to ensure they will deliver maximum value by the end of the Sprint.
Pergunta 8: Incorreto
There are some needs that each Product Backlog item should meet before being tackled in a Sprint. Select all correct answers

Explicação

There are three minimum needs that each Product Backlog item should meet before being tackled in a Sprint: 1. Small enough to be completed within one Sprint. 2. Sized so that you can get an idea about the overall effort of the whole Product Backlog.3. Just enough detail (acceptance criteria) so that it can act as confirmation that the Product
Pergunta 20: Incorreto
The Scrum Team just finished the Sprint Planning meeting. Accidentally the Product Owner finds that it makes sense to develop a new functionality to the Sprint Backlog. What is the right action from Developers.

Explicação

The Product Owner can't introduce the new functionality in the middle of the Sprint unless Developers gets more capacity to work and they mutually agree to take this in. After the Product Owner adds the new functionality and orders it to be on the top of the Product Backlog Developers can review that for selection in next Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 22: Incorreto
According to the Scrum Guide the four-hour Sprint Planning is common for Sprints that are … long.

Explicação

​Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints the event is usually shorter.​
Pergunta 40: Incorreto
From the following answers choose one what is not a responsibility of Developers? (according to the Scrum Guide)

Explicação

It is the responsibility of the Product Owner to break down the large Product Backlog items into smaller ones. Developers usually “helps” in this but it doesn’t make them responsible.
Pergunta 46: Incorreto
Which of the following statements regarding the Net Present Value (NPV) is incorrect?

Explicação

NPV alone is not the ideal financial benefit measurement method. NPV values are highly dependent on the magnitude of the project. Usually NPV measurements are presented along with the project IRR or the initial investment estimates to demonstrate the financial feasibility of a project.
Pergunta 48: Incorreto
Who is responsible for decision to fund the next Sprint?

Explicação

The PO is responsible for maximizing the value of the product...or to put it another way the return on investment. It is reasonable to expect a PO to have some budgetary responsibilities if he or she is to account for product value and ROI. More specifically the Scrum Team must understand the timeline and scope for the next anticipated release and the extent to which this has been budgeted for. They and other stakeholders will look to the PO for guidance and accountability in these matters.
Pergunta 53: Incorreto
From the following answers select one which is the less likely thing to be used by a Scrum Team

Explicação

WBS and Gantt Chart are used in traditional projects because they are focused on an upfront understanding of the scope of the project. The scope of Agile projects evolve during the project.
Pergunta 58: Incorreto
The Product Owner has proposed a feature to develop an object-relational mapping tool that would simplify the mapping of objects in the programming language to relational database tables. Under what revenue stream is this feature BEST classified?
Pergunta 65: Incorreto
In the middle of the Sprint a Developers realized that they have free time for additional work. After some discussion they decided to add a few more items to the SB from the PB. Who should be present to decide additional work and accordingly modify the Sprint Backlog (select all correct answers)

Explicação

The Product Owner if it is required will explain the item to Developers and Developers will include an item to Sprint Backlog
Pergunta 73: Incorreto
It is forecasted that the product development will be over in 2 Sprints. The Product Owner wants to design different tests (such as UAT FT and others) for all items. What’s the best response from the Scrum Master?

Explicação

It is not a good idea since the Team has DoD and due to this they have accepted all criteria
Pergunta 74: Incorreto
Managing stakeholders effectively may be rather challenging and complex from time to time. Especially with the more 'difficult' stakeholders. Although you as a Product Owner is responsible for stakeholder management this doesn't mean you have to do it on your own. Who else can help you to in stakeholder management process? Select from the following answers

Explicação

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways including by facilitation collaboration with stakeholders as requested or needed. Let your Scrum Master support you. He or she can perfectly support you when you are getting a lot of questions about the development process the way of working why you're working Agile etc. Stakeholders (especially (senior) management) are often used to having 'control'. And this is important for him/her since they are often responsible for running a (part of the) business.
Pergunta 78: Incorreto
Sprint planning is an event in the Scrum framework where the team determines the product backlog items they will work on during that Sprint and discusses their initial plan for completing those product backlog items.Which of the following is not input to the Sprint Planning event?

Explicação

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to Developers on why it is building the Increment. It is created during the Sprint Planning meeting.

Teste 15 deki@gmail - Product Owner exam simulator (SG v.2020)

Pergunta 1: Correto
……. are Scrum values

Explicação

​​When the values of commitment courage focus openness and respect are embodied and lived by the Scrum Team the Scrum pillars of transparency inspection and adaptation come to life and build trust for everyone.​​
Pergunta 2: Correto

Scrum Artifacts provide key information that the Scrum Team and the stakeholders need to be aware of for understanding the product under development, the activities being planned, and the activities that are done in the product development.  Due to this, the Scrum Team uses the information of Scrum artifacts to make ongoing decisions. The soundness of these decisions depends on

Explicação

Scrum relies on transparency. Decisions to optimize value and control risk are made based on the perceived state of the artifacts. To the extent that transparency is complete, these decisions have a sound basis. To the extent that the artifacts are incompletely transparent, these decisions can be flawed, the value may diminish and risk may increase.

Pergunta 3: Correto
For one month Sprint what is the recommended duration of the Sprint Review?

Explicação

A Sprint Review is at most a four-hour meeting for one-month Sprints. For shorter Sprints the event is usually shorter.
Pergunta 4: Correto
When should Increment be shipped?

Explicação

​All Increments should be potentially releasable (shippable) but we don’t have to release all of them. It depends on the project environment and the customer and the Product Owner is supposed to decide on it​
Pergunta 5: Correto
What are examples of questions that the Product Owner or organization need to continually re-evaluate for time to market?

Explicação

The reason for looking at time to market is to minimize the amount of time it takes for the organization to deliver value. Without actively managing time to market the ability to sustainably deliver value in the future is unknown. Questions that organizations need to continually re-evaluate for time to market are:1. How fast can the organization learn from new experiments and information?2. How fast can you adapt based on the information?3. How fast can you test new ideas with customers? Improving time to market helps improve the frequency at which an organization can potentially change CV.
Pergunta 6: Correto
In majority cases these types of stakeholders are the most important stakeholders the Product Owner should satisfy

Explicação

​Considering the end users as the most important stakeholder helps increase value.
Pergunta 7: Incorreto
From the following answers choose the most common outcomes of Daily Scrum? Select all correct answers

Explicação

Daily Scrums improve communications eliminate other meetings identify impediments to development for removal highlight and promote quick decision-making and improve Developers’ level of knowledge. This is a key inspect and adapt meeting. If the Scrum Master presents at the event he or she removing impediments. However this doesn't mean that it is only his/her activity.
Pergunta 8: Correto
The Team realized they are not able to complete Sprint Backlog items. Who should try to resolve this case?

Explicação

Developers and the Product Owner should discuss how they can resolve this issue. First of all it’s OK if the Sprint Backlog is not complete until the end of the Sprint. However we would try to complete it if it’s possible. When developers find out they are behind schedule they will ask the Product Owner for help and together they will adjust the work (tasks) or reorder the items to make sure the highest value is created at the end of the Sprint.
Pergunta 9: Correto
The Scrum Team adapts the definition of done at …...

Explicação

During each Sprint Retrospective the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of "Done" if appropriate and not in conflict with a product or organizational standards.
Pergunta 10: Incorreto
In Scrum teams use often the Product burndown chart and the Sprint burndown chart. What is the difference between these 2 charts?

Explicação

Despite burn-down charts not being mandatory in Scrum be ready to encounter such questions.
Pergunta 11: Correto
During the Sprint …..... and ….....

Explicação

During the Sprint as more is learned the scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Developers. This is mainly focused on the interpretation of the Product Backlog items and the tasks created by decomposing them.
Pergunta 12: Correto
At the Sprint Review the team realized that the Sprint Backlog items does not meet the definition of “Done”. What should the team do with the undone SB items?

Explicação

During the Sprint: - No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal; - Quality does not decrease; - The Product Backlog is refined as needed; and - Scope may be clarified and renegotiated with the Product Owner as more is learned.
Pergunta 13: Correto
The Sprint is cancelled …....

Explicação

​In general a Sprint should be cancelled if it no longer makes sense given the circumstances. But due to the short duration of Sprints cancellation rarely makes sense.​
Pergunta 14: Correto
In the middle of the Sprint Developers realized they are not able to finish all Sprint Backlog items. What is the right action from the Product Owner?

Explicação

It is OK if some of the items are not done until the end of the Sprint. What we have in the Sprint Backlog is our best guess on what we can deliver. If there’s pressure on the developers to finish everything they will start adding margins to their estimates which turns into less productivity because of Parkinson’s law. When Developers realize they cannot finish everything they get help from the Product Owner to adjust their work (tasks) to ensure they will deliver maximum value by the end of the Sprint.
Pergunta 15: Correto

The Product Owner and the Scrum Master can also be  Developers in the Scrum Team

Explicação

It is ok for the Scrum Master or for the Product Owner to be also a member of Developers. If the Product Owner or Scrum Master are actively working on items in the Sprint Backlog they participate as Developers.
Pergunta 16: Incorreto
The Scrum Team decided to have tests in the definition of “Done”. What is the benefit of this decision? Select all correct answers

Explicação

Items are not really done unless we have tested them; so tests should be included in the definition of “Done”. In this case the Increments will be closer to what we can practically call “complete” “done” “potentially releasable” or “potentially shippable”; to something useable for the users.Increments should be potentially releasable; for starters because it makes it easier for the customer to try it and give feedback. The feedback enables adaptation which is essential to Agile.Having an effective definition of “Done” increases transparency because everyone will know what we mean when we say an item is done.
Pergunta 17: Correto
How should a Product Backlog item be refined when it is located at the top? Select all correct answers

Explicação

Items at the top of the Product Backlog should be small enough to fit in one Sprint. They should also be clear and detailed enough; but not too detailed (e.g. not with all the tasks identified) as it would be an upfront planning. Tasks are created gradually during the Sprint.Product Backlog items require multiple expertise and usually done by multiple developers. Therefore they are not assigned. Tasks however are assigned to the individual developers while everyone stays accountable.
Pergunta 18: Correto
Since the Product Owner is responsible for making the Product Backlog items clear to Developers when many Developers are working on the same product one person won’t be enough and it might require having multiple Product Owners.

Explicação

In this case: one Product Owner = one Product Backlog
Pergunta 19: Correto
The Product Owner wants to refine the Product Backlog. When should the Product Backlog items be refined?

Explicação

​Product Backlog refinement is a continuous activity. When an item is at the top of the backlog which means it will be developed in the near future more refinements are usually needed to make sure it is clear and contains just enough details (not all possible details). It’s preferred to have the items that will be selected in the Sprint Backlog completely refined before Sprint Planning; however it’s OK to have more refinement done during the development. Remember that there’s no such thing as Sprint 0 and there’s no time between two Sprints that can be spent on something such as refinement. The team is also cross-functional and does the a-z of the work needed for each item including refinement; they don’t use people from other parts of the company.
Pergunta 20: Correto
A Definition of Done is most effective when created as a collaboration among the entire Scrum Team. In the 2020 Scrum Guide the Definition of Done is created by entire Scrum Team. What is the role of the Product Owner in this activity?

Explicação

Product Owners often have inputs related to quality from the business perspective. For example the business may plan to expand an online application or a business process to support additional geographies and more concurrent users. And of course quality impacts value. Product Owners have a stake in the quality and transparency of the Increment so it is important that they both understand the Definition of Done and have an appreciation for what it takes to create a quality useable Increment.
Pergunta 21: Incorreto
From the following anwers choose what is correct about the Scrum (Select all correct answers)

Explicação

​Scrum is a framework for developing delivering and sustaining complex products. Scrum is a process framework that has been used to manage work on complex products since the early 1990s. Scrum is not a process technique or definitive method. Rather it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques. Scrum makes clear the relative efficacy of your product management and work techniques so that you can continuously improve the product the team and the working environment.​​Scrum is founded on empiricism and lean thinking. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is observed. Lean thinking reduces waste and focuses on the essentials.
Pergunta 22: Correto
An organisation has decided to implement the Scrum and to create many Scrum Teams. What happens if they tailor the Scrum terminology to match their current environment? Select all correct answers

Explicação

Scrum is a framework rather than a methodology. It’s very lightweight and only contains the essential required aspects. Therefore it shouldn’t be tailored like methodologies
Pergunta 23: Correto
The maximum duration of Sprint Planning is:

Explicação

​Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints the event is usually shorter.​
Pergunta 24: Correto
The Product Backlog management includes …..... Select all correct answers

Explicação

Product Backlog management includes: - Clearly expressing Product Backlog items; - Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions; - Optimizing the value of the work Developers performs; - Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible transparent and clear to all and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and - Ensuring Developers understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.
Pergunta 25: Correto
What does the market growth potential dimension express to the Product Owner?

Explicação

The market growth potential dimension expresses the degree to which the product has growth potential in its market or the degree to which it can significantly grow revenues.
Pergunta 26: Correto
The Product Owner and the Scrum Master cannot tell Developers how to build the product and prepare the increment

Explicação

​Developers find its own way to build valuable product instead of receiving orders.
Pergunta 27: Correto
A Definition of Done drives the quality of work and is used to assess when an item has been completed. From the following answers choose incorrect (the least accurate) statement about the Definition of Done

Explicação

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.
Pergunta 28: Incorreto
A new Increment of working software must be available …...

Explicação

​The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints. At the end of a Sprint the new Increment must be "Done" which means it must be in useable condition and meet the Scrum Team’s definition of "Done".​
Pergunta 29: Correto
Which of the following is required for ordering the Product Backlog?

Explicação

​The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog including its content availability and ordering.​
Pergunta 30: Correto
According to the Scrum Guide the Product Backlog is only refined during the Sprint Planning and the Sprint Review. It is prohibited to refine the Product Backlog on any other time

Explicação

The Product Backlog refinement is a continuous activity. it can happen anytime.
Pergunta 31: Correto
Who represent the interests of stakeholders and ensure the value of the completed work?

Explicação

The Product Owner is one person not a committee. The Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog but those wanting to change a Product Backlog item’s priority must address the Product Owner. For the Product Owner to succeed the entire organization must respect his or her decisions. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force Developers to work from a different set of requirements.
Pergunta 32: Correto
This member of the Scrum team is responsible for engaging stakeholders

Explicação

​The Product Owner is responsible for engaging them understanding them communicating with them and representing their interests in the Scrum Team.
Pergunta 33: Correto
What’s velocity in Scrum?

Explicação

Velocity is a measure of the amount of work a Team can tackle during a single Sprint and is the key metric inScrum.
Pergunta 34: Correto
The Product Owner has decided to delegate the responsibility of estimating to Developers. He/She is the only person who has such right

Explicação

Estimating is the responsibility of Developers by default. The Product Owner doesn’t have such authority in the first place to delegate it.
Pergunta 35: Correto
The Product Owner decides not to create a Product Goal. In this case (select all correct answers)

Explicação

As we know from the Scrum Guide while implementing only parts of Scrum is possible (by removing the Product Goal) the result is not Scrum. Scrum exists only in its entirety and functions well as a container for other techniques methodologies and practices. In this case the best action from the Scrum Master to discuss it the Product Owner and find techniques for effective Product Goal definition
Pergunta 36: Correto
The Product Owner is the owner of the Product Backlog

Explicação

The Product Owner is the sole responsible person and they even “own” the Product Backlog.Note: remember that the Sprint Backlog is owned by Developers.This is not in contrast to the fact that the Product Backlog items are estimated by the developers; they provide this information to the Product Owner to be included in the Product Backlog.There are multiple implications by saying that the Product Owner “owns” the Product Backlog or is the sole responsible person including: Only they can add items to the backlog or decompose them into smaller items; while this is done by input from the customers and developers and the Product Owner can even delegate this responsibility to the developers.Only they can decide on the order of the items on the Product Backlog while this is usually based on the input from customers and developers.
Pergunta 37: Correto
How much time should a Product Owner spend with Developers?

Explicação

The Product Owner should be committed to the delivery of product value and should spend enough time with Developers to meet that commitment. Note that the only reason for the Product Owner to spend time with the developers is not refactoring but also Sprint Planning answering questions during the Sprint helping developers adjust their work etc.
Pergunta 38: Correto
No one tell Developers how they must work and therefore they (Developers) can decide to drop the Daily Scrum as event in Scrum

Explicação

All Scrum ceremonies are mandatory in Scrum for Developers
Pergunta 39: Incorreto
The Product Owner is not sure about the the quality and correct explanation of the definition of “Done”. What is the right action from the Product Owner?

Explicação

During each Sprint Retrospective the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of "Done" if appropriate and not in conflict with a product or organizational standards.
Pergunta 40: Incorreto
The Product Backlog Refinement is not a mandatory event in Scrum. However almost all Scrum Teams are holding this event. From the following answers select all correct about benefits of the Product Backlog Refinement

Explicação

In general there are 6 important benefits of the PBR. Here they are: - Increase transparency - Clarify value - Break things into consumable pieces - Reduce dependencies - Forecasting - Incorporate learning
Pergunta 41: Correto
The Product Owner is using some testing techniques to measure the end users’ satisfaction to judge the success of the project and use the information for the remaining Sprints. Is it a correct way of Product Ownership in Scrum?

Explicação

End users are the most valuable customers to measure satisfaction of new Product
Pergunta 42: Correto
Developers hired 2 new developers and now ready to start the first Sprint. The problem is that the Product Backlog is not completed yet. What should the Product Owner do?

Explicação

In this case the Scrum Team should start Sprint and continue refining the Product Backlog
Pergunta 43: Correto
The Increment is …...

Explicação

Increments are a set of done Product Backlog items. All items should be non-technical and independent. The user interface design evolves throughout the project as the database architecture and other similar things. They are all part of functional features rather than separate ones
Pergunta 44: Correto
When does individual developer become the exclusive owner of a Sprint Backlog item?

Explicação

Individual Developer may have specialized skills and areas of focus but accountability belongs to Developers as a whole.
Pergunta 45: Correto
There are 4 multiple teams and they are working on the same product. Who should make sure that their outputs can be integrated into one Increment?

Explicação

It’s up to the developers to find their way and ensure that their outputs will create an integrated Increment that is potentially releasable.
Pergunta 46: Correto
Imagine you are a Product Owner and you need to check hypothesis. As a Product Owner how will explain what does hypothesis mean? Hypothesis is …..

Explicação

According to the Evidence Based ManagementIn simplified terms a hypothesis is a proposed explanation for some observation that has not yet been proven (or disproven). In the context of requirements it is a belief that doing something will lead to something else such as delivering feature X will lead to outcome Y. An experiment is a test that is designed to prove or reject some hypothesis
Pergunta 47: Incorreto
As we know from the Scrum Guide Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint. From the following answers choose all correct responsibilities of Developers

Explicação

It’s the responsibility of Developers to estimate the amount of work of Product Backlog items and to select an appropriate number of them for each Sprint. They also break down the items into tasks during the Sprint. Measuring the project performance is the responsibility of the Product Owner while measuring the Sprint performance is done by Developers. Creating new Product Backlog items ordering them (prioritization) and making sure that everyone has a clear understanding of them is the responsibility of the Product Owner.
Pergunta 48: Correto
From the following answers choose activities which are typical works for a Product Owner between the end of the Sprint Planning and before the Sprint Review

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is continuous and can happen anytime. Besides that the Product Owner is constantly in contact with the developers to make sure everything is clear.Assignments and Sprint performance measurement are done by Developers and only Developers participate in the Daily Scrums.​
Pergunta 49: Correto
The Product Owner should be expertly aware of the marketplace for the product.

Explicação

Product Owner should be expertly aware of the marketplace for the product. They should constantly be gathering and re-gathering information and data regarding the marketplace so that the product value is maximized. Getting out of touch with the marketplace can be a recipe for product disaster.
Pergunta 50: Correto
During the Sprint the Product Owner realized that Developers has difficulty with understanding of items in the middle of the Sprint. What is the right action from the Product Owner in this situation?

Explicação

Product Owner should spend enough time ​with Developers to explain everything that is required to complete Sprint Backlog
Pergunta 51: Correto
The Product vision describes the purpose of a Product the intention with which the Product is being created and what it aims to achieve for customers and users.The benefits of having a solid product vision are (select all correct answers)

Explicação

Product vision is not explained in the Scrum Guide and is not a mandatory part of the framework. However it’s recommended to have one and use it to help align the decisions and development with the expected outcome of the project.
Pergunta 52: Incorreto
A “ready” item should be …..........

Explicação

A “ready” item should be clear feasible and testable. A story is clear if all Scrum team members have a shared understanding of what it means. Collaboratively writing user stories and adding acceptance criteria to the high-priority ones facilitates clarity. Bear in mind that Developers are new to the product or market/domain typically have a need for clearer more detailed stories. As the knowledge of Developers increase stories can often become less detailed. An item is testable if there is an effective way to determine if the functionality works as expected. Acceptance criteria ensure that each story can be tested. A story is feasible if it can be completed in one sprint according to the definition of done. This implies two things: The item must be small enough and it must not be too complex.
Pergunta 53: Correto
How frequently should you (as a Product Owner) change the Product Goal?

Explicação

The Product Goal is a strategic vision and the frequency of update will reflect your situation and context. If the market and Product is fairly stable it may be every quarter if the situation is rapidly changing then more frequently.
Pergunta 54: Incorreto
The duration of the Sprint for the Scrum Team is 3 weeks. What is the maximum duration (in hours) of the Sprint Planning meeting according to the Scrum Guide?

Explicação

Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints the event is usually shorter. In this case the maximum duration of Sprint Planning is 6 hours
Pergunta 55: Correto
It is the responsibility of the Scrum Master to engage the stakeholders to maximize the value of the product

Explicação

While the Scrum Master is responsible for helping to maximize the value of outside interactions with the Scrum Team the Product Owner is responsible for continually engaging the stakeholders.
Pergunta 56: Correto
Who is the leader in terms of getting feedback from the Key Stakeholders in the Sprint Review?

Explicação

The Product Owner is a vital leader in terms of getting feedback from the key stakeholders in the Sprint Review.
Pergunta 57: Correto
The Product Owner is the only person responsible for the definition of “Done”.

Explicação

If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.
Pergunta 58: Correto
the Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for Developers to synchronize activities and create a plan for the next 24 hours. During this event this plan is used as a reference to understand the changes in progress

Explicação

Developers use the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog. The Daily Scrum optimizes the probability that Developers will meet the Sprint Goal. Every day Developers should understand how it intends to work together to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment by the end of the Sprint.
Pergunta 59: Correto
Which of the following does not happen in the first Sprint if there are more than one Sprint? Select all answers that apply

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a dynamic concept that is never complete; especially at the beginning of the project. Trying to prepare a complete Product Backlog at the beginning of the project is a form of upfront planning that doesn’t suit Agile environments. The same goes for the architecture; it’s not designed upfront because we don’t know exactly what we’re going to develop.All Sprints have the same purpose of bringing value to the customer by creating a potentially releasable Increment.
Pergunta 60: Correto
Select correct topics (from the list of answers) which should be discussed at the Sprint Planning event

Explicação

Topic One: Why is this Sprint valuable? Topic Two: What can be Done this Sprint? Topic Three: How will the chosen work get done?
Pergunta 61: Correto
What are the example of questions that Product Owner needs to continually re-evaluate for current value?

Explicação

According to the Evidence Based Management The purpose of looking at current value is to understand the value that an organization delivers to customers and stakeholders at the present time; it considers only what exists right now not the value that might exist in the future. Questions that organizations need to continually re-evaluate for current value are: 1. How happy are users and customers today? Is their happiness improving or declining? 2. How happy are your employees today? Is their happiness improving or declining? 3. How happy are your investors and other stakeholders today? Is their happiness improving or declining?
Pergunta 62: Correto
The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. According to the Scrum Guide when should the Product Owner update the Product Backlog?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is a form of planning in Scrum projects and it’s updated continuously.
Pergunta 63: Correto
Definition of “Done” .......... (select all correct answers)

Explicação

​When a Product Backlog item or an Increment is described as "Done" everyone must understand what "Done" means. Although this may vary significantly per Scrum Team members must have a shared understanding of what it means for work to be complete to ensure transparency. This is the definition of "Done" for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment.​
Pergunta 64: Correto
Technical debt can be defined as the longer term consequences of poor design decisions. In a sense it’s like any other debt - there ought to be a clear understanding of why it is incurred and how and when to pay it back. What is a reason for the Product Owner to pay attention to technical debt?

Explicação

Technical debt is any shortcoming in the solution that makes it less than “good enough” and might create problems in the future. When there’s a lot of technical debt the velocity might decrease in the future because developers will have to deal with the shortcomings. On the other hand this debt might even remain in the final product and make it harder and more expensive to maintain the product. Refactoring is a common way of reducing technical debt. It’s when the code is improved without changing its external behaviour. It’s a good idea for Agile teams to spend some of their capacity on continuous refactoring. Improving the definition of “Done” is the second way of reducing technical debt.
Pergunta 65: Correto
The Product Owner has always to think about the value of the product. Awareness of which of the following is required for a Product Owner to maximise value? (select all correct answers)

Explicação

The product vision (while is not mandatory in Scrum) describes the purpose of the solution. How features serve the purpose affects their value. The customer and end-user feedback are important for value as well. Velocity is not directly connected to value and the results of unit tests is a technical matter that developers need to pay attention to.
Pergunta 66: Correto
This type of technique is the most useful and effective for representing Product Backlog Items

Explicação

User stories are a fairly common technique for representing Product Backlog Items but other techniques can be used instead. For instance a team can use scenarios use cases acceptance tests etc. The Product Backlog might even contain a heterogeneous mix of the above. The Product Owner should work with the rest of the Scrum Team on choosing and optimizing the techniques used to represent Product Backlog Items.
Pergunta 67: Incorreto
Collaboration interaction and conversation call for a different management style to be effective. Scrum teams are facilitated through true leadership. This type of leadership role includes

Explicação

​One of the ways that the Scrum Master as a true leader protects the team is by shielding it from interruptions.​
Pergunta 68: Correto
This member of the Scrum Team should know the most about the release and product requirements

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for product including decisions about release. The Product Owner’s decisions are visible in the content and ordering of the Product Backlog. No one can force Developers to work from a different set of requirements.
Pergunta 69: Correto
When do Developers prepare the tools and infrastructure for the development?

Explicação

This is an ongoing activity and it continues throughout the project
Pergunta 70: Correto
There are 4 Scrum Teams and they develop the same product. So in this case they should ….

Explicação

When there is more than 1 Scrum Team it means that they should mutually define their definition of Done so their combined work will be potentially releasable
Pergunta 71: Correto
The Product Owner doesn’t spend enough time to maximise the value of the product. Furthermore he/she has missed the last Sprint Retrospective event. Which of the following options is the best response from the Scrum Master?

Explicação

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways including:- Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management;- Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;- Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and- Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.
Pergunta 72: Correto
Who can change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

Explicação

​The Sprint Backlog is a plan with enough detail that changes in progress can be understood in the Daily Scrum. Developers modify the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as Developers work through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal.​
Pergunta 73: Correto
What should the Product Owner do during the Sprint zero?

Explicação

​There is no Sprint Zero in Scrum
Pergunta 74: Correto
As we know from the Scrum Guide ….... is the responsibility of the project manager in Scrum?

Explicação

There is no such role as Product Manager in Scrum
Pergunta 75: Correto
According to the Scrum Guide which of the following is not a pillar of Scrum?

Explicação

​Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency inspection and adaptation.​
Pergunta 76: Correto
…... is the average amount of work done per Sprint

Explicação

Velocity is an average amount of work done per Sprint
Pergunta 77: Correto
The highest priority of the Product Owner in Scrum is

Explicação

The Product Owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product. How this is done may vary widely across organizations Scrum Teams and individuals.
Pergunta 78: Correto
The Product Owner decided to cancel the Sprint. What should happen to the “Done” items when the Sprint is cancelled?

Explicação

​When a Sprint is cancelled any completed and "Done" Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog. The work done on them depreciates quickly and must be frequently re-estimated.​
Pergunta 79: Incorreto
Scrum is not:

Explicação

Agile is all about depending on adaptation instead of a predictive (static upfront) plan and design.
Pergunta 80: Correto
Conflict (when the source is the working process) should be avoided at all cost on Scrum teams.

Explicação

All conflicts should be resolved as soon as possible but it is also very good opportunity to increase value of the Product. Sometimes tensions are needed in order to get a team to higher levels. This is all part of the Scrum Values of trust openness courage and respect. While you have talked about it with the individuals the rest of the team might benefit from discussing it also so that the individuals can see how they impacted everyone else.

Teste 16 deki@gmail - Product Owner exam simulator (SG v.2020)

Pergunta 1: Correto
How should developers deal with non-functional or system requirements?

Explicação

All non-functional features should be incorporated into every Increment
Pergunta 2: Correto
As we know from the Scrum Guide the adaptation occurs in Scrum …...

Explicação

Adaption in Scrum occurs on each Scrum event
Pergunta 3: Correto
A company has 3 products. Which two of the following are acceptable ways of forming Scrum teams?

Explicação

When there’s one product there should be only one Product Owner even if the product is large and there are many Developers. However when there are multiple products there are two options: 1) considering them separately and have a Product Owner for each of them and 2) have only one Product Owner for all of them and develop them like a larger project to ensure compatibility.
Pergunta 4: Correto
The Product Owner should use user stories to compose the Product Backlog items.

Explicação

User stories are the most popular type of requirements in Scrum but are definitely not mandatory.
Pergunta 5: Correto
What of the following is not Scrum's set of accountability?

Explicação

There is no Product Manager role in Scrum
Pergunta 6: Incorreto
The stakeholders were invited to the Sprint Review. During the Sprint Review they noticed that the product development progress was not very clearly visible and lack transparency. Moreover they were not able to understand the team’s next steps. Who bears the primary responsibility for this status?

Explicação

The entire Scrum Team is responsible for "how they planned and performed their work". So if there is a question about who is responsible for failure or success of scrum work the answer is the Scrum Team for sure. The Scrum Master of course needs to help the Product Owner in coaching techniques for better backlog management increasing the transparency of backlog and more. So the Scrum Master's responsibility is to coach the team to adhere to Scrum and its principles. However the Scrum Master does not bear the primary responsibility for those items that are clearly owned by specific role. There are clearly defined responsibilities for each role as well. In this case the question is - who is responsible for a specific activity of backlog management including its transparency. The Product Owner is accountable for maximizing the value of the product resulting from the work of the Scrum Team. How this is done may vary widely across organizations Scrum Teams and individuals. The Product Owner is also accountable for effective Product Backlog management which includes:- Developing and explicitly communicating the Product Goal; - Creating and clearly communicating Product Backlog items; - Ordering Product Backlog items; and - Ensuring that the Product Backlog is transparent visible and understood.
Pergunta 7: Correto
The Product Owner is responsible for preparing the Sprint Goal before the Sprint Planning.

Explicação

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to Developers on why it is building the Increment. It is created during the Sprint Planning meeting by the entire Scrum Team.
Pergunta 8: Correto
The Product Owner needs to get more information about the Sprint. How can she or he get this option? Select all correct answers from the following

Explicação

It is not the responsibility of Developers to report to the Product Owner the status of the Sprint. So if the Product Owner wants to be informed about the Sprint activities he or she should at least attend the Daily Scrum or check the task board
Pergunta 9: Correto
The Scrum Team consists of

Explicação

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner Developers and a Scrum Master.
Pergunta 10: Correto
The Product Owner can delegate some of his/her responsibilities to Developers.

Explicação

The Product Owner may do the above work or have Developers do it. However the Product Owner remains accountable.​​
Pergunta 11: Correto
The Product Owner wants to prioritize the Product Backlog. From the following answers what can be considered for prioritizing the Product Backlog?

Explicação

The Product Backlog should be ordered by importance. Higher ordered Product Backlog items are usually clearer and more detailed than lower ordered ones. More precise estimates are made based on greater clarity and increased detail; the lower the order the less detail. Product Backlog items that will occupy Developers for the upcoming Sprint are refined so that any one item can reasonably be "Done" within the Sprint time-box. Product Backlog items that can be "Done" by Developers within one Sprint are deemed "Ready" for selection in a Sprint Planning. Product Backlog items usually acquire this degree of transparency through the refining activities described above
Pergunta 12: Correto
In Scrum the Product Backlog is …...

Explicação

​The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that is known to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog including its content availability and ordering. A Product Backlog is never complete.
Pergunta 13: Correto
What’s the most important metric for a Product Owner to measure in order to make the progress of the project clear?

Explicação

The most important thing to calculate is the completion date of the project. That’s also the most important thing that should be communicated to the customer. Traditional criteria such as lines of code or man-hours spent on the project are not good measures of performance. The velocity can be a guide in forecasting the completion date but is not enough and is not the main reporting item.
Pergunta 14: Correto
During the …....... Developers synchronise their work and report impediments for removal

Explicação

Developers use the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog. The Daily Scrum optimizes the probability that Developers will meet the Sprint Goal. Every day Developers should understand how it intends to work together to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment by the end of the Sprint.
Pergunta 15: Correto
The Product Owner is accountable for the result and therefore should have the final say over the definition of “Done”.

Explicação

The Definition of Done is a formal description of the state of the Increment when it meets the quality measures required for the product.. If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.
Pergunta 16: Correto
From the following answers choose one. What best describes the definition of “Done”?

Explicação

Each artifact contains a commitment to ensure it provides information that enhances transparency and focus against which progress can be measured. For the Increment it is the Definition of Done. The Definition of “Done” helps us to understand when everything is done on a Product Backlog item. If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product.
Pergunta 17: Incorreto
The increment (the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during a Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints) is valuable when …..

Explicação

The customer's satisfaction is valuable and important to us. Reducing the operational costs which consequently decreases the total cost of ownership is also a way of bringing value.All Increments are delivered on time because the Sprints are timeboxed.There’s no need to have all the Sprint Backlog items completed before the end of the Sprint. At least this is not the most important thing when we are dealing with value.
Pergunta 18: Correto
The Scrum Master has decided to assign each Sprint Backlog Item to each developer individually. In this case when does each developer become the exclusive owner of the Sprint Backlog item?

Explicação

Sprint Backlog and all of its items are collectively owned by Developers. No individual team member can claim ownership of an item as this would block communication and collaboration. And of course the Scrum Master can't assign the Sprint Backlog item for Developers
Pergunta 19: Correto
Developers have trouble in communication with the Product Owner. From the following answers choose the unproductive way for the Scrum Master to improve Developers’s communications with the Product Owner

Explicação

Several symptoms indicate that the Scrum Master is struggling to let the team self-manage. That person is acting more as a manager than as a Scrum Master. Three keys symptoms of this "bad behaviour" are: - the Scrum Master assigns tasks - the Scrum Master makes decisions for the Team - the Scrum Master acts as a go-between for the Team and the Product Owner
Pergunta 20: Correto
Scrum is the …........ type of process control

Explicação

Scrum is founded on empiricism and lean thinking. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is observed. Lean thinking reduces waste and focuses on the essentials.
Pergunta 21: Correto
What percentage of the Product Owner’s time should be dedicated to the team?

Explicação

The Product Owner should spend as much time with Developers as needed to maximise value of the Product and the activity in Sprint Backlog
Pergunta 22: Correto
The Product Backlog item must be refined before it development begins. How should it be? Choose all correct answers

Explicação

Items at the top of the Product Backlog need to be small enough to fit into one Sprint. They also need to be clear and detailed enough; but not too detailed (e.g. not with all the tasks identified) as it would be an upfront planning. Tasks are created gradually during the Sprint. Product Backlog items require multiple expertise and usually done by multiple developers. Therefore they are not assigned. Tasks however are assigned to the individual developers while everyone stays accountable.
Pergunta 23: Correto
The Product Backlog item is “Done”? What does it mean in Scrum? Select all correct answers

Explicação

Items are “Done” when they are complete based on the definition of “Done”. In that case they would have the potential of creating a releasable/shippable Increment that is usable by the end user. Tests are also part of the work and items are not “Done” before the tests are complete; even the user acceptance tests. Quality requirements are part of the work but not all of it (e.g. non-functional features and development processes are also part of the work). We cannot trust the identified tasks because we might have missed some tasks and the sum of them do not conform to the definition of “Done”.
Pergunta 24: Correto
In the middle of the Sprint Developers realised they are not able to finish all Sprint Backlog items. What is the right action for the Product Owner?

Explicação

It is required for entire Scrum Team to complete Sprint Goal in Sprint. So if there are some risks in doing this the Product Owner should help Developers adjust their work and meet the Sprint Goal
Pergunta 25: Correto
More features always bring more value.

Explicação

It depends on many factors. In the majority of cases this is not true
Pergunta 26: Correto
In Scrum the time to integrate solution is …..

Explicação

Integration is part of the development of each item and a step in a normal definition of “Done”. Agile projects use continuous integration to make the output potentially releasable.
Pergunta 27: Correto
As we know from the Scrum Guide stakeholders attend the Sprint Review. Why do the key stakeholders are invited to the Sprint Review?

Explicação

The purpose of the Sprint Review is to inspect the outcome of the Sprint and determine future adaptations. The Scrum Team presents the results of their work to key stakeholders and progress toward the Product Goal is discussed. During the event the Scrum Team and stakeholders review what was accomplished in the Sprint and what has changed in their environment. Based on this information attendees collaborate on what to do next. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted to meet new opportunities. The Sprint Review is a working session and the Scrum Team should avoid limiting it to a presentation.
Pergunta 28: Correto
The Definition of “Done” …....... and …........

Explicação

Developers deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is usable so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. If the Definition of Done for an increment is part of the standards of the organization all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If it is not an organizational standard the Scrum Team must create a Definition of Done appropriate for the product. When a Product Backlog item or an Increment is described as "Done" everyone must understand what "Done" means. Although this may vary significantly per Scrum Team members must have a shared understanding of what it means for work to be complete to ensure transparency. This is the definition of "Done" for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment.
Pergunta 29: Correto
According to the Scrum Guide which of the following is the responsibility of the Product Owner? (select all correct answers)

Explicação

Designing the software is part of the development and should be done by the Developers. They make technical decisions and volunteer for tasks (assign them to themselves). Estimation is the responsibility of the developers because they are the people who will develop the item.The rest is done by the Product Owner.
Pergunta 30: Correto
Who’s responsible for Gantt Charts in Scrum?

Explicação

Gannt chart is not necessary in Scrum
Pergunta 31: Correto
The Scrum Team begins the Sprint Planning. From the following answers choose a prerequisite or input for starting the Sprint Planning meeting

Explicação

Sprint Planning initiates the Sprint by laying out the work to be performed for the Sprint. This resulting plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team. In the following list there is no prerequisite for starting Sprint Planning.
Pergunta 32: Correto
A company has three products. Which two of the following are right action to form Scrum teams?

Explicação

The maximum number of Product Owners for one Scrum team - 1. The minimum number of Product Owners for all Scrum Teams woth a single product - 1
Pergunta 33: Correto
The Product Owner predicts the release date by …...

Explicação

​Using a trend line in the burn-down chart can help (if the team is using that chart) as well as simple or complex formulas such as the one mentioned above. But all of these are just guides for the Product Owner and s/he should consider all factors and come up with a reliable completion date forecast.
Pergunta 34: Correto
From the following answers choose the best definition of transparency in Scrum

Explicação

​Transparency is about visibility and doesn’t contain understanding; even though we’d better try our best to create the right understanding too but that’s another story.The “whole process” might be too much for some stakeholders; “significant aspects” is enough as we treat most things in Agile environments.​ The emergent process and work must be visible to those performing the work as well as those receiving the work. With Scrum important decisions are based on the perceived state of its three formal artifacts. Artifacts that have low transparency can lead to decisions that diminish value and increase risk.
Pergunta 35: Correto
The Product Owner is a project manager in Scrum

Explicação

There is no such role in Scrum as a Project Manager. All activities of a Project Manager are distributed through all Scrum team members.
Pergunta 36: Correto
From the following answers choose the best. What must be done in the first Sprint?

Explicação

​There’s no difference between the first Sprint and the next ones. The main purpose is creating Increments.
Pergunta 37: Correto
What should the Product Owner do during the Sprint Retrospective?

Explicação

The whole Scrum Team should participate in the Sprint Retrospective to find an improvement to be applied in the next Sprint; this includes the Product Owner
Pergunta 38: Correto
According to the Scrum Guide this artefact contains a plan for realizing the Sprint Goal

Explicação

​The Sprint Backlog makes visible all the work that Developers identify as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. The Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning event and then added to the Sprint Backlog. As the Developers work during the Sprint they keep the Sprint Goal in mind. If the work turns out to be different than they expected they collaborate with the Product Owner to negotiate the scope of the Sprint Backlog within the Sprint without affecting the Sprint Goal.
Pergunta 39: Correto
No one has the right to give Developers additional tasks (not related to the current Sprint) during the Sprint. The Sprint Goal should remain unchanged. These are conditions that increase the efficiency and productivity of Developers. According to this which of the following is NOT correct?

Explicação

Developers modify the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a list of everything that is required to complete in the Sprint but this artefact is not fully completed at the Sprint Planning and new items may be added to the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint
Pergunta 40: Correto
The Scrum Team release a product every 3-4 Sprints. How can the success of the product be evaluated? (select all correct answers)

Explicação

Customer and end user satisfaction is important. It’s not an abstract measure like lines of code or velocity.There can be some KPIs for measuring the value of the releases and when improved will show our success.Increased velocity is desired but it’s not directly connected to value and can be misleading. That’s the same with production cost.It’s mandatory to deliver an Increment every Sprint.
Pergunta 41: Correto
The Product Owner is using burn-up charts instead of burn-down charts. What would be your response as the Scrum Master?

Explicação

Burn-up and Burn-down charts are not mandatory in Scrum. In this case Product Owner may choose any type of diagram
Pergunta 42: Correto
The Scrum team has just begun the Sprint Planning. How much of the Sprint Backlog should be defined during this event?

Explicação

The Sprint Backlog includes the items selected from the Product Backlog and the tasks created by decomposing the items. The items are completely planned in the Sprint Planning but not all tasks are created; just enough for the first few days of development. The rest of the tasks will be created during the Sprint.
Pergunta 43: Correto
Who’s in the Scrum Team? (Choose multiple answers)

Explicação

​The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner Developers and a Scrum Master​
Pergunta 44: Correto

The Product Owner has a real problem with managing the product. What is the right action from the Scrum Master in this case?

Explicação

The Scrum Master is supposed to know the tools and techniques and to help everyone in that regard. However it’s only about helping training coaching and consulting rather than taking over.The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways including: - Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management; - Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items; - Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and - Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.
Pergunta 45: Correto
One of the very important customer for organization wants a new feature to be added to the current Sprint. How should Developers respond?

Explicação

​The Product Owner is one person not a committee. The Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog but those wanting to change a Product Backlog item’s priority must address the Product Owner.​
Pergunta 46: Correto
This member of the Scrum Team is responsible for representing stakeholders

Explicação

​The Product Owner is constantly in contact with the stakeholders and reflects the results in the Product Backlog.​
Pergunta 47: Incorreto
Which Scrum artifacts may be prioritised?

Explicação

The Product Backlog is ordered (prioritized) based on the business value.The items in the Sprint Backlog follow the same order they had in the Product Backlog and therefore are prioritized.
Pergunta 48: Correto
The number of developers has increased from 8 to 15. The duration of the Daily Scrum is more than 15 minutes. What’s the best response for this problem?

Explicação

The optimal number of the Scrum Team (incl. Developers) are 10 people. If more is needed it’s possible to use scaled Scrum (more than one team working on the same product)
Pergunta 49: Correto
What does the “cone of uncertainty” describe in Scrum framework? Select all correct answers

Explicação

The “cone of uncertainty” is about the fact that uncertainty is highest at the beginning of the project and reduces as we progress. This uncertainty can be about the duration requirements etc.
Pergunta 50: Incorreto
The consequences of the technical debt are (select all correct answers)

Explicação

Technical debt refers to quality consequences by poor technical choices made. Risk Assessment (RA) focuses on all potential risks and what their chances of occurring are and it focuses on the potential impact of events. Business Impact Analysis (BIA) is more concerned with the impact on the stakeholders due to limited or no normal services and what the recovery time would be as to the acceptable tolerance level of such an event. Infrastructure Age / Obsolescence is a constant struggle for all businesses. We all know how fast technology changes and the benefits of lower costs and better function change brings. When a given system or application is installed it begins to become obsolete immediately.
Pergunta 51: Correto
From the following answers select all correct answers. These statements are right about the technical debt

Explicação

Technical debt is the consequence of poor system design and architecture which can happen when they are done gradually in an adaptive environment. Developers should be careful with it and repay it with continuous refactoring. Refactoring is improving the code without changing the external behaviour.If the technical debt keeps increasing because the team doesn’t refactor development will become harder day after day and it will slow down the progress on the one hand and create problems for releases on the other hand.
Pergunta 52: Correto
Why does the Product Owner must pay attention to the technical debt?

Explicação

​Technical debt is any shortcoming in the solution that makes it less than “good enough” and might create problems in the future. When there’s a lot of technical debt the velocity might decrease in the future because developers will have to deal with code problems. On the other hand this debt might remain in the final product and make it harder and more expensive to maintain the product.“Total cost of ownership” is the combination of production and maintenance costs of a product.
Pergunta 53: Incorreto
Which of the following is a valid service from the Scrum Master to the Product Owner? (according tot the Scrum Guide)

Explicação

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways including: - Helping find techniques for effective Product Goal definition and Product Backlog management; - Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items; - Helping establish empirical product planning for a complex environment; and - Facilitating stakeholder collaboration as requested or needed.
Pergunta 54: Correto
The model of taking a small step to produce an outcome observe the result and then adjusting the next step based on this observation and experience is known as

Explicação

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Scrum employs an iterative incremental approach to optimize predictability and control risk.
Pergunta 55: Correto
How frequently should product releases occur?

Explicação

Releases occur frequently enough to eliminate the risk that the product’s value will get out of line with the marketplace
Pergunta 56: Correto
The Product Backlog refinement shouldn’t take more than 10% of the Product Owner’s time.

Explicação

​Refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of Developers. However Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.​
Pergunta 57: Incorreto
The Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details such as ….....

Explicação

Product Backlog refinement is the act of breaking down and further defining Product Backlog items into smaller more precise items. This is an ongoing activity to add details, such as a description, order, and size. Attributes often vary with the domain of work.

Pergunta 58: Incorreto
The backlog refinement (or backlog grooming) occurs ….

Explicação

​Product Backlog refinement is the act of adding detail estimates and order to items in the Product Backlog. This is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and Developers collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items. During Product Backlog refinement items are reviewed and revised. The Scrum Team decides how and when refinement is done. However Product Backlog items can be updated at any time by the Product Owner or at the Product Owner’s discretion.​ Product Backlog Refinement occurs during the Sprint in the preparation of next Sprints​
Pergunta 59: Correto
Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel a Sprint. However Developers are trying to convince the Product Owner that the Sprint should be cancelled. What’s the right response from the Scrum Master?

Explicação

Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel a Sprint and the final decision belongs to her/him. However this decision can be influenced by the customer (incl. stakeholders) or/and developers or/and Scrum Master.
Pergunta 60: Correto
Which one of the following statements is correct when multiple Scrum teams are working on the same product?

Explicação

​One product = one Product Backlog
Pergunta 61: Correto
The internal stakeholder asked Developers to help with some external (for the Scrum Team) task since the organisation urgently requires it. The team referred them to Product Owner. In this case the Scrum Master ….

Explicação

No one is allowed to work from a different set of requirements and Developers are not allowed to act on anyone else's say so
Pergunta 62: Correto
How does the Product Owner transfer his or her marketplace knowledge to the Scrum Team (select all answers that apply)?

Explicação

The Product Owner communicates all of this marketplace knowledge to the Scrum Team through daily ad hoc interactions as well as Product Backlog Refinement and in Sprint Reviews.
Pergunta 63: Correto
Which two of the following are the most important considerations when forming multiple Scrum teams?

Explicação

Having the proper size in each team and having an effective mixture of skill in each team to avoid dependencies are the 2 most important considerations
Pergunta 64: Correto
Why do many Scrum Teams use MoSCoW technique? Select only one best answer

Explicação

MoSCoW (Must Have Should Have Could Have Won’t Have this time) is primarily used to prioritise requirements although the technique is also useful in many other areas. Atern recommends no more than 60% effort for Must Haves for a project with 40% Shoulds and Coulds. Anything higher than 60% poses a risk to the success and predictability of the project unless the environment is well understood the team is established and the external risks are minimal.
Pergunta 65: Correto
From the following answers choose 3 activities that are the accountability of Developers

Explicação

Developers are the people in the Scrum Team that are committed to creating any aspect of a usable Increment each Sprint. The specific skills needed by the Developers are often broad and will vary with the domain of work. However the Developers are always accountable for: - Creating a plan for the Sprint the Sprint Backlog;- Instilling quality by adhering to a Definition of Done;- Adapting their plan each day toward the Sprint Goal; and - Holding each other accountable as professionals.
Pergunta 66: Correto
What does the Product Owner use to identify unfinished work at the end of the Sprint?

Explicação

​Definition of Done is used by entire Scrum Team to identify unfinished work
Pergunta 67: Correto
Which of the following are optional in Scrum? (Select all correct answers)

Explicação

​Burn-down charts and Velocity are not mandatory in Scrum
Pergunta 68: Correto
This member of Scrum Team is responsible for Burn-down chart and Gantt chart in Scrum

Explicação

​Burn-down and Gannt chart are not mandatory in Scrum
Pergunta 69: Correto
​A good practice of quality in Scrum is

Explicação

Building quality into the Product from the beginning is good practice because it eliminates the potential for late rework and pushes the Product one step ahead towards the releasable quality
Pergunta 70: Incorreto
The frequency of Inspection in Scrum must be …...

Explicação

Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work. Other than the Sprint itself which is a container for all other events each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something.
Pergunta 71: Incorreto

A Sprint Goal is created during the Sprint Planning. The Sprint Goal should .....

Explicação

A discussion about the potential Sprint Goal happens during Sprint Planning "Topic One: Why is this Sprint valuable?" The Scrum Team must finalize the Sprint Goal before the end of Sprint Planning. It should be tangible measurable and concise but most importantly it should explain "the why." The Sprint Goal resides in the Sprint Backlog alongside the selected Product Backlog Items and the plan to deliver the Sprint Goal. Sprint Goals should help the Scrum Team to navigate towards the Product Goal.
Pergunta 72: Correto
The burn….. shows the trend of remaining effort in the Product Backlog at the end of Sprints

Explicação

The burn-down chart is a graphical representation of work left to do versus time. The outstanding work (or backlog) is often on the vertical axis with time along the horizontal. That is it is a run chart of outstanding work. It is useful for predicting when all of the work will be completed.
Pergunta 73: Correto
How will changes in the environment in which the product will be used affect the Product Backlog?

Explicação

A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves
Pergunta 74: Correto
The velocity is a key measure of success for the Product Owner

Explicação

A key measure of success for the Product Owner is high value product
Pergunta 75: Correto
Choose owner metrics from the following answers

Explicação

Here is the list of owner metrics: - Revenue - Costs - Customer satisfaction - Employee satisfaction - Usage - Lead & Cycle Time - Innovation Rate
Pergunta 76: Correto
There are many non-functional or system requirements which the team must complete to build a valuable product. How can we ensure that the performance requirements are addressed in the solution? select all correct answers

Explicação

It is very good practice to add performance (non-functional) requirements to DoD and to Product Backlog
Pergunta 77: Correto
From the following answers choose all that apply. …...... and …....... are good ways for a Scrum Team to ensure security concerns are satisfied?
Pergunta 78: Correto
How can a Scrum Master help multiple teams keep their output aligned in a single product?

Explicação

It is the responsibility of multiple teams to work with the other teams to create aligned outputs and an integrated Increment. If they have some trouble understanding this the Scrum Master should teach them.
Pergunta 79: Correto
Which outcome is expected as Scrum Teams mature?​

Explicação

As Scrum Teams mature they improve their definition of “Done” to include more stringent criteria.​
Pergunta 80: Correto
One of the principle of Agile Product Development is